CALVIN WILSON MATEER

[Illustration: C. W. MATEER]




                           CALVIN WILSON MATEER

                      FORTY-FIVE YEARS A MISSIONARY
                            IN SHANTUNG, CHINA

                               A BIOGRAPHY

                           BY DANIEL W. FISHER

                               PHILADELPHIA
                          THE WESTMINSTER PRESS
                                   1911

                           COPYRIGHT, 1911, BY
                THE TRUSTEES OF THE PRESBYTERIAN BOARD OF
                   PUBLICATION AND SABBATH SCHOOL WORK

                        PUBLISHED SEPTEMBER, 1911




CONTENTS


                                                                      PAGE

    INTRODUCTION                                                         9

                                CHAPTER I

    THE OLD HOME                                                        15

      Birth—The Cumberland Valley—Parentage—Brothers and Sisters,
      Father, Mother, Grandfather—Removal to the “Hermitage”—Life on
      the Farm—In the Home—Stories of Childhood and Youth.


                               CHAPTER II

    THE MAKING OF THE MAN                                               27

      Native Endowments—Influence of the Old Home—A Country
      Schoolmaster—Hunterstown Academy—Teaching School—Dunlap’s Creek
      Academy—Profession of Religion—Jefferson College—Recollections
      of a Classmate—The Faculty—The Class of 1857—A Semi-Centennial
      Letter.

                               CHAPTER III

    FINDING HIS LIFE WORK                                               40

      Mother and Foreign Missions—Beaver Academy—Decision
      to be a Minister—Western Theological Seminary—The
      Faculty—Revival—Interest in Missions—Licentiate—Considering
      Duty as to Missions—Decision—Delaware, Ohio—Delay in
      Going—Ordination—Marriage—Going at Last.

                               CHAPTER IV

    GONE TO THE FRONT                                                   57

      Bound to Shantung, China—The Voyage—Hardships and Trials on the
      Way—At Shanghai—Bound for Chefoo—Vessel on the Rocks—Wanderings
      on Shore—Deliverance and Arrival at Chefoo—By Shentza to
      Tengchow.

                                CHAPTER V

    THE NEW HOME                                                        70

      The Mateer Dwelling—Tengchow as It Was—The Beginning of
      Missions There—The Kwan Yin Temple—Making a Stove and
      Coal-press—Left Alone in the Temple—Its Defects—Building a New
      House—Home Life.

                               CHAPTER VI

    HIS INNER LIFE                                                      88

      Not a Dreamer—Tenderness of Heart—Regeneration—Religious
      Reserve—Record of Religious Experiences—Depression and
      Relief—Unreserved Consecration—Maturity of Religious
      Life—Loyalty to Convictions.

                               CHAPTER VII

    DOING THE WORK OF AN EVANGELIST                                    105

      Acquiring the Language—Hindrances—Beginning to Speak
      Chinese—Chapel at Tengchow—Province of Shantung—Modes of
      Travel—Some Experiences in Travel—First Country Trip—Chinese
      Inns—A Four Weeks’ Itineration—To Wei Hsien—Hatred of
      Foreigners—Disturbance—Itinerating with Julia—Chinese
      Converts—To the Provincial Capital and Tai An—Curtailing His
      Itinerations—Later Trips.

                              CHAPTER VIII

    THE TENGCHOW SCHOOL                                                128

      The School Begun—Education and Missions—First Pupils—Means
      of Support—English Excluded—Growth of School—A Day’s
      Programme—Care of Pupils—Discipline—An Attempted
      Suicide—Conversion of a Pupil—First Graduates—Reception After
      Furlough—An Advance—Two Decades of the School.

                               CHAPTER IX

    THE PRESS AND LITERARY LABORS                                      150

      Contributions to the Periodicals—English Books—The Shanghai
      Mission Press—Temporary Superintendency—John Mateer—Committee
      on School Books—Earlier Chinese Books—School Books—Mandarin
      Dictionary—Mandarin Lessons—Care as to Publications—Pecuniary
      Returns.

                                CHAPTER X

    THE CARE OF THE NATIVE CHRISTIANS                                  173

      Reasons for Such Work—The Church at
      Tengchow—Discipline—Conversion of School Boys—Stated Supply
      at Tengchow—Pastor—As a Preacher—The Scattered Sheep—Miao of
      Chow Yuen—Ingatherings—Latest Country Visitations—“Methods
      of Missions”—Presbytery of Shantung—Presbytery in the
      Country—Synod of China—Moderator of Synod—In the General
      Assembly.

                               CHAPTER XI

    THE SHANTUNG COLLEGE                                               207

      “The College of Shantung”—The Equipment—Physical and
      Chemical Apparatus—Gathering the Apparatus—The Headship
      Laid Down—The Anglo-Chinese College—Problem of Location and
      Endowment—Transfer of College to Wei Hsien—A New President—“The
      Shantung Christian University”—Personal Removal to Wei
      Hsien—Temporary President—Official Separation—The College of
      To-day.

                               CHAPTER XII

    WITH APPARATUS AND MACHINERY                                       236

      Achievements—Early Indications—Self-Development—Shop—Early
      Necessities—As a Help in Mission Work—Visitors—Help to
      Employment for Natives—Filling Orders—A Mathematical
      Problem—Exhibitions.

                              CHAPTER XIII

    THE MANDARIN VERSION                                               252

      First Missionary Conference—The Chinese Language—Second
      Missionary Conference—Consultation as to New Version of
      Scriptures—The Plan—Selection of Translators—Translators at
      Work—Difficulties—Style—Sessions—Final Meeting—New Testament
      Finished—Lessons Learned—Conference of 1907—Translators of the
      Old Testament.

                               CHAPTER XIV

    INCIDENTS BY THE WAY                                               275

      Trials—Deaths—The “Rebels”—Tientsin Massacre—Japanese War
      with China—Boxer Uprising—Famine—Controversies—English
      in the College—Pleasures—Distinctions and
      Honors—Journeys—Furloughs—Marriage—The Siberian Trip—Scenes of
      Early Life.

                               CHAPTER XV

    FACING THE NEW CHINA                                               305

      The Great Break-Up—Past Anticipations—A Maker of
      the New China—Influence of Missionaries—Present
      Indications—Dangers—Duties—Future of Christianity.

                               CHAPTER XVI

    CALLED UP HIGHER                                                   319

      The Last Summer—Increasing Illness—Taken to Tsingtao—The
      End—A Prayer—Service at Tsingtao—Funeral at Chefoo—Tributes
      of Dr. Corbett, Dr. Hayes, Dr. Goodrich, Mr. Baller,
      Mrs. A. H. Mateer—West Shantung Mission—English Baptist
      Mission—Presbyterian Board—Secretary Brown—Biographer—“Valiant
      for the Truth.”




INTRODUCTION


It is a privilege to comply with the request of Dr. Fisher to write a
brief introduction to his biography of the late Calvin W. Mateer, D.D.,
LL.D. I knew Dr. Mateer intimately, corresponded with him for thirteen
years and visited him in China. He was one of the makers of the new
China, and his life forms a part of the history of Christian missions
which no student of that subject can afford to overlook. He sailed from
New York in 1863, at the age of twenty-eight, with his young wife and
Rev. and Mrs. Hunter Corbett, the journey to China occupying six months
in a slow and wretchedly uncomfortable sailing vessel. It is difficult
now to realize that so recently as 1863 a voyage to the far East was so
formidable an undertaking. Indeed, the hardships of that voyage were so
great that the health of some members of the party was seriously impaired.

Difficulties did not end when the young missionaries arrived at their
destination. The people were not friendly; the conveniences of life were
few; the loneliness and isolation were exceedingly trying; but the young
missionaries were undaunted and pushed their work with splendid courage
and faith. Mr. Corbett soon became a leader in evangelistic work, but
Dr. Mateer, while deeply interested in evangelistic work and helping
greatly in it, felt chiefly drawn toward educational work. In 1864,
one year after his arrival, he and his equally gifted and devoted wife
managed to gather six students. There were neither text-books, buildings,
nor assistants; but with a faith as strong as it was sagacious Dr. and
Mrs. Mateer set themselves to the task of building up a college. One by
one buildings were secured, poor and humble indeed, but sufficing for a
start. The missionary made his own text-books and manufactured much of
the apparatus with his own hands. He speedily proved himself an educator
and administrator of exceptional ability. Increasing numbers of young
Chinese gathered about him. The college grew. From the beginning, Mr.
Mateer insisted that it should give its training in the Chinese language,
that the instruction should be of the most thorough kind, and that it
should be pervaded throughout by the Christian spirit. When, after
thirty-five years of unremitting toil, advancing years compelled him to
lay down the burden of the presidency, he had the satisfaction of seeing
the college recognized as one of the very best colleges in all Asia. It
continues under his successors in larger form at Wei Hsien, where it now
forms the Arts College of the Shantung Christian University.

Dr. Mateer was famous not only as an educator, but as an author and
translator. After his retirement from the college he devoted himself
almost wholly to literary work, save for one year, when a vacancy in
the presidency of the college again devolved its cares temporarily upon
him. His knowledge of the Chinese language was extraordinary. He prepared
many text-books and other volumes in Chinese, writing some himself and
translating others. The last years of his life were spent as chairman
of a committee for the revision of the translation of the Bible into
Chinese, a labor to which he gave himself with loving zeal.

Dr. Mateer was a man of unusual force of character; an educator, a
scholar and an executive of high capacity. Hanover College, of which Dr.
D. W. Fisher was then president, early recognized his ability and success
by bestowing upon him the honorary degree of Doctor of Divinity, and in
1903 his alma mater added the degree of Doctor of Laws. We mourn that the
work no longer has the benefit of his counsel; but he builded so well
that the results of his labors will long endure, and his name will always
have a prominent place in the history of missionary work in the Chinese
empire.

Dr. Fisher has done a great service to the cause of missions and to the
whole church in writing the biography of such a man. A college classmate
and lifelong friend of Dr. Mateer, and himself a scholar and educator of
high rank, he has written with keen insight, with full comprehension of
his subject, and with admirable clearness and power. I bespeak for this
volume and for the great work in China to which Dr. Mateer consecrated
his life the deep and sympathetic interest of all who may read this book.

                                                       ARTHUR JUDSON BROWN

156 FIFTH AVENUE, NEW YORK CITY, _April 13th, 1911_




PREFACE


When I was asked to become the biographer of Dr. Mateer, I had planned
to do other literary work, and had made some preparation for it; but I
at once put that aside and entered on the writing of this book. I did
this for several reasons. Though Dr. Mateer and I had never been very
intimate friends, yet, beginning with our college and seminary days, and
on to the close of his life, we had always been very good friends. I had
occasionally corresponded with him, and, being in hearty sympathy with
the cause of foreign missions, I had kept myself so well informed as to
his achievements that I had unusual pleasure in officially conferring on
him the first of the distinctions by which his name came to be so well
adorned. As his college classmate, I had joined with the other survivors
in recognizing him as the one of our number whom we most delighted to
honor. When I laid down my office of college president, he promptly wrote
me, and suggested that I occupy my leisure by a visit to China, and that
I use my tongue and pen to aid the cause of the evangelization of that
great people. Only a few months before his death he sent me extended
directions for such a visit. When—wholly unexpectedly—the invitation came
to me to prepare his biography, what could I do but respond favorably?

It has been my sole object in this book to reveal to the reader Dr.
Mateer, the man, the Christian, the missionary, both his inner and his
outer life, just as it was. In doing this I have very often availed
myself of his own words. Going beyond these, I have striven neither
to keep back nor to exaggerate anything that deserves a place in this
record. All the while the preparation of this book has been going forward
in my hands my appreciation of the magnitude of the man and of his work
has been increasing. Great is the story of his career. If this does not
appear so to any reader who has the mind and the heart to appreciate it,
then the fault is mine. It, in that case, is in the telling, and not in
the matter of the book, that the defect lies.

So many relatives and acquaintances of Dr. Mateer have contributed
valuable material, on which I have drawn freely, that I dare not try to
mention them here by name. It is due, however, to Mrs. J. M. Kirkwood
to acknowledge that much of the chapter on “The Old Home” is based on a
monograph she prepared in advance of the writing of this biography. It
is due also to Mrs. Ada H. Mateer to acknowledge the very extensive and
varied assistance which she has rendered in the writing of this book:
first, by putting the material already on hand into such shape that
the biographer’s labors have been immensely lightened, and later, by
furnishing with her own pen much additional information, and by her wise,
practical suggestions.

                                                                  D. W. F.

WASHINGTON, 1911




I

THE OLD HOME

    “There are all the fond recollections and associations of my
    youth.”—JOURNAL, March 4, 1857.


Calvin Wilson Mateer, of whose life and work this book is to tell, was
born in Cumberland County, Pennsylvania, near Shiremanstown, a few miles
west of Harrisburg, on January 9, 1836.

This Cumberland valley, in which he first saw the light, is one of
the fairest regions in all our country. Beginning at the great, broad
Susquehanna, almost in sight of his birthplace, it stretches far away, a
little to the southwest, on past Chambersburg, and across the state line,
and by way of Hagerstown, to its other boundary, drawn by a second and
equally majestic stream, the historic Potomac. Physically considered,
the splendid Shenandoah valley, still beyond in Virginia, is a further
extension of the same depression. It is throughout a most attractive
panorama of gently rolling slopes and vales, of fertile and highly
cultivated farms, of great springs of purest water and of purling brooks,
of little parks of trees spared by the woodman’s ax, of comfortable
and tasteful rural homes, of prosperous towns and villages where church
spires and school buildings and the conveniences of modern civilization
bear witness to the high character of the people,—all of this usually
set like a picture in a framework of the blue and not very rugged, or
very high, wooded mountains between which, in their more or less broken
ranges, the entire valley lies.

True, it was winter when this infant first looked out on that world
about him, but it was only waiting for spring to take off its swaddling
of white, and to clothe it with many-hued garments. Twenty-eight years
afterward, almost to the very day, he, cast ashore on the coast of
China, was struggling over the roadless and snow covered and, to him,
wholly unknown ground toward the place near which he was to do the work
of his life, and where his body rests in the grave. When he died, in
his seventy-third year, the spiritual spring for which he had prayed
and longed and labored had not yet fully come, but there were many
indications of its not distant approach.

John Mateer, the father of Calvin, was born in this beautiful Cumberland
valley, on a farm which was a part of a large tract of land entered by
the Mateers as first settlers, out of whose hands, however, it had almost
entirely passed at the date when this biography begins. The mother of
Calvin was born in the neighboring county of York. Her maiden name was
Mary Nelson Diven. Both father and mother were of that Scotch-Irish
descent to which especially Pennsylvania and Virginia are indebted for so
many of their best people; and they both had behind them a long line of
sturdy, honorable and God-fearing ancestors.

At the time of Calvin’s birth his parents were living in a frame house
which is still standing; and though, with the passing of years, it has
much deteriorated, it gives evidence that it was a comfortable though
modest home for the little family.

One of the employments of his father while resident there was the running
of a water mill for hulling clover seed; and Calvin tells somewhere of
a recollection that he used to wish when a very little boy that he were
tall enough to reach a lever by which he could turn on more water to make
the mill go faster,—a childish anticipation of his remarkable mechanical
ability and versatility in maturer years.

Calvin was the oldest of seven children—five brothers and two sisters;
in the order of age, Calvin Wilson, Jennie, William Diven, John Lowrie,
Robert McCheyne, Horace Nelson and Lillian, of whom Jennie, William,
Robert and Horace are still living. Of these seven children, Calvin and
Robert became ministers of the gospel in the Presbyterian Church, and
missionaries in Shantung, China; John for five years had charge of the
Presbyterian Mission Press at Shanghai, and later of the Congregational
Press at Peking, where he died; Lillian taught in the Girls’ School
at Tengchow, and, after her marriage to Rev. William S. Walker, of the
Southern Baptist Mission, in the school at Shanghai, until the failing
health of her husband compelled her to return to the United States;
William for a good while was strongly disposed to offer himself for the
foreign missionary service, and reluctantly acting on advice, turned
from it to business. Jennie married an exceptionally promising young
Presbyterian minister, and both offered themselves to the foreign work
and were under appointment to go to China when health considerations
compelled them to remain in their homeland. Some years after his death
she married a college professor of fine ability. Horace is a professor in
the University of Wooster, and a practicing physician.

In view of this very condensed account of the remarkable life and work
of the children in this household, one may well crave to know more about
the parents, and about the home life in the atmosphere of which they
were nurtured. Their father and mother both had the elementary education
which could be furnished in their youth by the rural schools during the
brief terms for which they were held each year. In addition, the mother
attended a select school in Harrisburg for a time. Both father and mother
built well on this early foundation, forming the habit of wise, careful
reading. Both were professing Christians when they were married, and in
infancy Calvin was baptized in the old Silver Spring Church, near which
they resided. Later the father became a ruling elder in the Presbyterian
church to which they had removed their membership. In this capacity
he was highly esteemed, his pastor relying especially on his just,
discerning judgment. He had a beautiful tenor voice and a line musical
sense, and he led the choir for a number of years. Few laymen in the
church at large were better informed as to its doctrines and history, and
few were more familiar with the Bible. There was in the church a library
from which books were regularly brought home; religious papers were taken
and read by the whole family, and thus all were acquainted with the
current news of the churches, and with the progress of the gospel in the
world.

In the conduct of his farm Mr. Mateer was thrifty, industrious and
economical. His land did not yield very bountifully, but all of its
products were so well husbanded that notwithstanding the size of his
family he yet accumulated considerable property. Though somewhat
reluctant at first to have his boys one after another leave him, thus
depriving him of their help on the farm, he aided each to the extent of
his ability, and as they successively fitted themselves for larger lives
he rejoiced in their achievements.

Mr. Mateer died at Monmouth, Illinois, in 1875. When the tidings reached
Calvin out in China, he wrote home to his mother a beautiful letter,
in which among other things he said: “Father’s death was eminently
characteristic of his life—modest, quiet and self-suppressed. He died
the death of the righteous and has gone to a righteous man’s reward.
The message he sent John and me was not necessary; that he should ‘die
trusting in Jesus’ was not news to us, for we knew how he had lived.”

[Illustration: DR. MATEER’S MOTHER]

By reading the records that have been at my command I have gotten the
conviction that the mother was the stronger character, or at least that
she more deeply impressed herself on the children. When Calvin made his
last visit to this country, he was asked whose influence had been most
potent in his life, and he at once replied, “Mother’s.” In his personal
appearance he strongly resembled her. If one could have wished for any
change in his character, it might have been that he should have had
in it just a little bit more of the ideality of his father, and just
a little bit less of the intense realism of his mother. Some of his
mother’s most evident characteristics were in a measure traceable as an
inheritance from her father, William Diven; for example, the place to
which she assigned education among the values of life. He was a man of
considerable literary attainments, for his day, and for one residing out
in the country; so that when in later years he came to make his home
with the Mateers he brought with him a collection of standard books,
thus furnishing additional and substantial reading for the family. Even
Shakspere and Burns were among the authors, though they were not placed
where the children could have access to them, and were made familiar to
them only by the grandfather’s quotation of choice passages. When his
daughter was a little girl, so intense was his desire that she should
have as good an education as practicable, that if the weather was too
inclement for her to walk to the schoolhouse he used to carry her on his
back. It was her lifelong regret that her education was so defective;
and it is said that after she was seventy years of age, once she dreamed
that she was sent to school at Mount Holyoke, and she awoke in tears to
find that she was white-haired, and that it was only a dream. Although it
involved the sacrifice of her own strength and ease, she never faltered
in her determination that her children should have the educational
advantages to which she had aspired, but never attained; and in what they
reached in this direction she had a rich satisfaction. Toward every other
object which she conceived to be good and true, and to be within the
scope of her life, she set herself with like persistence, and strength,
and willingness for self-sacrifice. Her piety was deep, thorough and
all-controlling; but with her it was a principle rather than a sentiment.
Its chief aim was the promotion of the glory of the infinitely holy God,
though as she neared the visible presence of her Saviour, this softened
somewhat into a conscious love and faith toward him. She survived her
husband twenty-one years, and died at the advanced age of seventy-nine.
When the tidings of this came to her children in China, their chief
lament was, “How we shall miss her prayers!”

When Calvin was about five years old, his parents bought a farm twelve
miles north of Gettysburg, near what is now York Springs, in Adams
County. It is some twenty miles from the place of his birth, and beyond
the limits of the Cumberland valley. Even now it is a comparatively
out-of-the-way spot, reached only by a long drive from the nearest
railway station; then it was so secluded that the Mateers called the
house into which they removed the “Hermitage.” Here the family continued
to reside until about the time of Calvin’s graduation from college. Then
a second and much longer move was made, to Mercer County, in western
Pennsylvania. Still later, a third migration brought them to Illinois.
It is to the home in Adams County that Calvin refers in the line quoted
at the head of this chapter, as the place where “were all the fond
recollections and associations” of his youth.

The farm was not very large, and the soil was only moderately productive,
notwithstanding the labor and skill that the Mateers put upon it. In
picking off the broken slate stones which were turned up thick by the
plow, the children by hard experience were trained in patient industry as
to small details. At least the two elder frequently beguiled the tedium
of this task “by reciting portions of the Westminster Catechism and
long passages of Scripture.” Another really tedious occupation, which,
however, was converted into a sort of late autumn feast of ingathering,
was shared by the whole family, but was especially appreciated by the
children. This was the nut harvest of the “shellbark” hickory trees of
the forest. As many as fifty or more bushels were gathered in a season;
the sale of these afforded a handsome supplement to the income of the
household. Along the side of the farm flows a beautiful stream, still
bearing its Indian name of Bermudgeon, and in front of the house is a
smaller creek; and in these Calvin fished and set traps for the muskrats,
and experimented with little waterwheels, and learned to swim. Up on an
elevation still stand the old house and barn, both constructed of the red
brick once so largely used in the eastern section of Pennsylvania. Both
of these are still in use. Though showing signs of age and lack of care,
they are witnesses that for those days the Mateers were quite up to the
better standard of living customary among their neighbors. “This growing
family,” says Mrs. Kirkwood (Jennie), “was a hive of industry, making
most of the implements used both indoors and out, and accomplishing
many tasks long since relegated to the factory and the shop. Necessity
was with them the mother not only of invention, but of execution as
well. All were up early in the morning eating breakfast by candlelight
even in summer, and ready before the sun had risen for a day’s work
that continued long after twilight had fallen.” In the barn they not
only housed their horses and cattle and the field products, but also
manufactured most of the implements for their agricultural work. Here
Calvin first had his mechanical gifts called into exercise, sometimes
on sleds and wagons and farm tools, and sometimes on traps and other
articles of youthful sport.

In this home family worship was held twice each day,—in the morning
often before the day had fully dawned, and in the evening when the
twilight was vanishing into night. In this service usually there were not
only the reading of Scripture and the offering of prayer, but also the
singing of praise, the fine musical voice of the father and his ability
to lead in the tunes making this all the more effective. Of course, on
the Sabbath the entire family, young and old, so far as practicable,
attended services when held in the Presbyterian church not far away. But
that was not all of the religious observances. The Sabbath was sacredly
kept, after the old-fashioned manner of putting away the avoidable work
of the week, and of giving exceptional attention to sacred things. Mrs.
Kirkwood, who was near enough in age to be the “chum” of Calvin, writes:
“Among the many living pictures which memory holds of those years, there
is one of a large, airy, farmhouse kitchen, on a Sabbath afternoon. The
table, with one leaf raised to afford space for ‘Scott’ and ‘Henry’
stands between two doors that look out upon tree-shaded, flower-filled
yards. There sits the mother, with open books spread all about her,
studying the Bible lesson for herself and for her children. Both parents
and children attended a pastor’s class in which the old Sunday School
Union Question Book was used. In this many references were given which
the children were required to commit. Older people read them from their
Bibles, but these children memorized them. Some of the longer ones could
never be repeated in after times without awakening associations of the
muscularizing mental tussles of those early days.” It was a part of the
religious training of each child in that household, just as soon as able
to read, to commit to memory the Westminster Shorter Catechism,—not so
as to blunder through the answers in some sort of fashion, but so as to
recite them all, no matter how long or difficult, without mistaking so
much as an article or a preposition.

Stories are handed down concerning the boy Calvin at home, some of which
foreshadow characteristics of his later years. One of these must suffice
here. The “Hermitage,” when the Mateers came into it, was popularly
believed to be haunted by a former occupant whose grave was in an old
deserted Episcopal churchyard about a mile away. The grave was sunken,
and it was asserted that it would not remain filled. It was also rumored
that in the gloomy woods by which the place was surrounded a headless
man had been seen wandering at night. Nevertheless the Mateer children
often went up there on a Sabbath afternoon, and entered the never-closed
door, to view the Bible and books and desk, which were left just as
they had been when services long before had ceased to be held; or
wandered about the graves, picking the moss from the inscriptions on the
headstones, in order to see who could find the oldest. It was a place
that, of course, was much avoided at night; for had not restless white
forms been seen moving about among these burial places of the dead? The
boy Calvin had been in the habit of running by it in the late evening
with fast-beating heart. One dark night he went and climbed up on the
graveyard fence, resolved to sit in that supremely desolate and uncanny
spot till he had mastered the superstitious fear associated with it. The
owls hooted, and other night sounds were intensified by the loneliness,
but he successfully passed his chosen ordeal, and won a victory worth the
effort. In a youthful way he was disciplining himself for more difficult
ordeals in China.




II

THE MAKING OF THE MAN

    “It has been said, and with truth, that when one has finished
    his course in an ordinary college, he knows just enough to be
    sensible of his own ignorance.”—LETTER TO HIS MOTHER, January
    15, 1857.


The letter from which the sentence at the head of this chapter is taken
was written a week after Mateer had reached his twenty-first year and
when he was almost half advanced in his senior year in college. Later in
the letter he says: “Improvement and advancement need not, and should
not, stop with a college life. We should be advancing in knowledge so
long as we live.” With this understanding we may somewhat arbitrarily set
his graduation from college as terminating the period of his life covered
by what I have designated as “the making of the man.”

Back of all else lay his native endowments of body and of mind.
Physically he was exceptionally free from both inherited and acquired
weaknesses. In a letter which he wrote to his near relatives in this
country on the occasion of his seventieth birthday, he said, “I have not
only lived, but I have enjoyed an exceptional measure of health.” At
no period was he laid aside by protracted sickness. At the same time,
this must not be understood to signify that he had one of those iron
constitutions that seem to be capable of enduring without harm every
sort of exposure except such as in its nature must be mortal. In that
part of his Journal covering portions of his college and seminary work
he often tells of a lassitude for which he blames himself as morally
at fault, but in which a physician would have seen symptoms of a low
bodily tone. Bad food, lack of exercise and ill treatment on the voyage
which first brought him to China left him with a temporary attack of
dyspepsia. Occasionally he had dysentery, and once he had erysipelas. At
no time did he regard himself as so rugged in constitution that he did
not need to provide himself with proper clothing and shelter, so far as
practicable. Nevertheless it was because of the sound physique inherited
from his parents, and fostered by his country life during early youth,
that without any serious breaking down of health or strength he was able
to endure the privations and the toils and cares of his forty-five years
in China.

As to his native mental endowments, no one would have been more ready
than he to deny that he was a “genius,” if by this is meant that he had
an ability offhand to do important things for the accomplishment of which
others require study and effort. If, as to this, any exception ought
to be made in his favor, it would be concerning some of the applied
sciences and machinery, and possibly mathematics. He certainly had an
extraordinary aptitude especially as to the former of these. While he
himself regarded his work in the Mandarin as perhaps the greatest of his
achievements, he had no such talent for the mastery of foreign languages
that he did not need time and toil and patience to learn them. In college
his best standing was not in Latin or Greek. In China other missionaries
have been able to preach in the native tongue after as short a period of
preparation; and the perfect command of the language which he attained
came only after years of ceaseless toil.

Such were his native physical and mental endowments: a good, sound,
though not unusually rugged, bodily constitution; and an intellect
vigorous in all of its faculties, which was in degree not so superior as
to set him on a pedestal by himself, yet was very considerably above the
average even of college students.

Concerning the qualities of his heart and of his will it is best to wait
and speak later in this volume.

In the making of a man native endowments are only the material out of
which and on which to build. Beyond these, what we become depends on our
opportunities and the use to which we put them. The atmosphere of the
old home had much to do with the unfolding of the subsequent life and
character of Mateer. Some of his leading qualities were there grown into
his being.

Other powerful influences also had a large share in his development.
About three quarters of a mile from the “Hermitage” stood a township
schoolhouse, a small brick building, “guiltless alike of paint or
comfort,” most primitive in its furnishing, and open for instruction
only five or six months each year, and this in the winter. The pressure
of work in the house and on the farm never was allowed to interrupt the
attendance of the Mateer children at this little center of learning for
the neighborhood. Of course, the teachers usually were qualified only to
conduct the pupils over the elementary branches, and no provision was
made in the curriculum for anything beyond these. But it so happened that
for two winters Calvin had as his schoolmaster there James Duffield,
who is described by one of his pupils still living as “a genius in his
profession, much in advance of his times, and quite superior to those
who preceded and to those who came after him. In appearance Duffield
was awkward and shy. His large hands and feet were ever in his way,
except when before a class; then he was suddenly at ease, absorbed in
the work of teaching, alert, full of vitality, with an enthusiasm for
mastery, and an intellectual power that made every subject alive with
interest, leaving his impress upon each one of his pupils.” Algebra
was not recognized as falling within the legitimate instruction, and
no suspicion that any boy or girl was studying it entered the minds
of the plain farmers who constituted the official visitors. One day a
friend of the teacher, a scholarly man, came in at the time when the
examinations were proceeding, and the teacher sprang a surprise by asking
this friend whether he would like to see one of his pupils solve a
problem in algebra. He had discerned the mathematical bent of the lad,
Calvin Mateer, and out of school hours and just for the satisfaction
of it he had privately been giving the boy lessons in that study. When
an affirmative response was made by the stranger, Calvin went to the
blackboard and soon covered half of it with a solution of an algebraic
problem. Surprised and delighted, the stranger tested the lad with
problem after problem, some of them the hardest in the text-book in use,
only to find him able to solve them. It would have been difficult to
discover which of the three principal parties to the examination, the
visitor, the teacher, or the pupil, was most gratified by the outcome.
There can be no question that this country school-teacher had much to do
with awakening the mathematical capabilities and perhaps others of the
intellectual gifts which characterized that lad in manhood and throughout
life.

When Calvin was in his seventeenth year, he started in his pursuit of
higher education, entering a small academy at Hunterstown, eight miles
from the “Hermitage.” In this step he had the stimulating encouragement
of his mother, whose quenchless passion for education has already been
described. His father probably would at that time have preferred that
he should remain at home and help on the farm; and occasionally, for
some years, the question whether he ought not to have fallen in with the
paternal wish caused him serious thought. As it was, he came home from
the academy in the spring, and in the autumn and also at harvest, to
assist in the work.

The first term he began Latin, and the second term Greek, and he kept
his mathematics well in hand, thus distinctly setting his face toward
college. But his pecuniary means were narrow, and in the winter of
1853-54 he had to turn aside to teach a country school some three miles
from his home. In a brief biographical sketch which, by request of his
college classmates, he furnished for the fortieth anniversary of their
graduation he says: “This was a hard experience. I was not yet eighteen
and looked much younger. Many of the scholars were young men and women,
older than I, and there was a deal of rowdyism in the district. I held my
own, however, and finished with credit, and grew in experience more than
in any other period of my life.”

When the school closed he returned to the academy, which by that time
had passed into the hands of S. B. Mercer, in whom he found a teacher of
exceptional ability, both as to scholarship and as to the stimulation
of his students to do and to be the best that was possible to them. In
the spring of 1855 Mr. Mercer left the Hunterstown Academy, and went
to Merrittstown, Fayette County, Pennsylvania, where he took charge of
the Dunlaps Creek Academy. Calvin, influenced by his attachment to his
teacher, and also by his intention to enter Jefferson College, situated
in a neighboring county, went with him. Here he made his home, with
other students, in the house occupied by the Mercers. For teaching two
classes, one in geometry and one in Greek, he received his tuition. For
the ostensible reason that he had come so far to enter the academy he was
charged a reduced price for his board. All the way down to the completion
of his course in the theological seminary he managed to live upon the
means furnished in part from home, and substantially supplemented by
his own labors; but he had to practice rigid economy. It was while at
Merrittstown that he made a public profession of religion. This was only
a few months before he entered college. He found in Dr. Samuel Wilson,
the pastor of the Presbyterian church, a preacher and a man who won his
admiration and esteem, and who so encouraged and directed him that he
took this step.

In the autumn of 1855 he entered the junior class of Jefferson College,
at Canonsburg, Pennsylvania. In those days it was customary for students
to be admitted further advanced as to enrollment than at present. I had
myself preceded Mateer one year, entering as a sophomore in the same
class into which he first came as a junior. One reason for this state
of things was that the requirements were considerably lower than they
now are; and they were often laxly enforced. Then, because the range of
studies required was very limited in kind, consisting until the junior
year almost exclusively of Latin, Greek and mathematics, it was possible
for the preparatory schools to carry the work of their students well up
into the curriculum of the college. Mateer had the advantage, besides,
of such an excellent instructor as Professor Mercer, and of experience in
teaching. He says: “I was poorly prepared for this class, but managed to
squeeze in. The professor of Latin wanted me to make up some work which
I had not done; but I demurred, and I recollect saying to him, ‘If after
a term you still think I ought to make it up, I will do it, or fall back
to the sophomore class.’ I never heard of it afterwards. I was very green
and bashful when I went to college, an unsophisticated farmer’s boy from
a little country academy. I knew little or nothing of the ways of the
world.”

As his classmate in college, and otherwise closely associated with him
as a fellow-student, I knew him well. I remember still with a good deal
of distinctness his appearance; he was rather tall, light-haired, with a
clear and intelligent countenance, and a general physique that indicated
thorough soundness of body, though not excessively developed in any
member. When I last saw him at Los Angeles a few years ago, I could
perceive no great change in his looks, except such as is inevitable from
the flight of years, and from his large and varied experience of life.
It seems to me that it ought to be easy for any of his acquaintances
of later years to form for themselves a picture of him in his young
manhood at the college and at the theological seminary. So far as I can
now recall, he came to college unheralded as to what might be expected
of him there. He did not thrust himself forward; but it was not long
until by his work and his thorough manliness, it became evident that in
him the class had received an addition that was sure to count heavily
in all that was of importance to a student. I do not think that he
joined any of the Greek letter secret societies, though these were at
the height of their prosperity there at that time. In the literary
societies he discharged well and faithfully his duties, but he did not
stand out very conspicuously in the exercises required of the members.
In those days there was plenty of “college politics,” sometimes very
petty, and sometimes not very creditable, though not wholly without
profit as a preparation for the “rough-and-tumble” of life in after
years, but in this Mateer did not take much part. Most of us were still
immature enough to indulge in pranks that afforded us fun, but which were
more an expression of our immaturity than we then imagined; and Mateer
participated in one of these in connection with the Frémont-Buchanan
campaign in 1856. A great Republican meeting was held at Canonsburg, and
some of us students appeared in the procession as a burlesque company of
Kansas “border ruffians.” We were a sadly disgraceful-looking set. Of one
thing I am sure, that while Mateer gave himself constantly to his duties
and refrained from most of the silly things of college life, he was not
by any of us looked upon as a “stick.” He commanded our respect.

The faculty was small and the equipment of the college meager. The
attendance was nearly three hundred. As to attainments, we were a mixed
multitude. To instruct all of these there were—for both regular and
required work—only six men, including one for the preparatory department.
What could these few do to meet the needs of this miscellaneous crowd?
They did their best, and it was possible for any of us, especially
for the brighter student, to get a great deal of valuable education
even under these conditions. Mateer in later years acknowledges his
indebtedness to all of the faculty, but particularly to Dr. A. B. Brown,
who was our president up to the latter part of our senior year; to Dr.
Alden, who succeeded him; and to Professor Fraser, who held the chair
of mathematics. Dr. Brown was much admired by the students for his
rhetorical ability in the pulpit and out of it. Dr. Alden was quite
in contrast to his predecessor as to many things. He had long been a
teacher, and was clear and concise in his intellectual efforts. Mateer
said, late in life, that from his drill in moral science he “got more
good than from any other one branch in the course.” Professor Fraser
was a brilliant, all-round scholar of the best type then prevalent, and
had the enthusiastic admiration even of those students who were little
able to appreciate his teaching. In the physical sciences the course
was necessarily still limited and somewhat elementary. His classmates
remember the evident mastery which Mateer had of all that was attempted
by instruction or by experimentation in that department. It was not
possible to get much of what is called “culture” out of the curriculum,
and that through no fault of the faculty; yet for the stimulation of
the intellectual powers and the unfolding of character there was an
opportunity such as may be seriously lacking in the conditions of college
instruction in recent years.

These were the palmy days of Jefferson College. She drew to herself
students not only from Pennsylvania and the contiguous states, but also
from the more distant regions of the west and the south. We were dumped
down there, a heterogeneous lot of young fellows, and outside of the
classroom we were left for the most part to care for ourselves. We had
no luxuries and we were short of comforts. We got enough to eat, of a
very plain sort, and we got it cheap. We were wholly unacquainted with
athletics and other intercollegiate goings and comings which now loom up
so conspicuously in college life; but we had, with rare exceptions, come
from the country and the small towns, intent on obtaining an education
which would help us to make the most of ourselves in after years. As to
this, Mateer was a thoroughly representative student. He could not then
foresee his future career, but he was sure that in it he dared not hope
for success unless he made thoroughly good use of his present, passing
opportunities. He was evidently a man who was there for a purpose.

The class of 1857 has always been proud of itself, and not without
reason. Fifty-eight of us received our diplomas on commencement. Among
them were such leaders in the church as George P. Hays, David C. Marquis
and Samuel J. Niccolls, all of whom have been Moderators of the General
Assembly of the Presbyterian Church. In the law, S. C. T. Dodd, for
many years the principal solicitor of the Standard Oil Company, stands
out most conspicuously. Three of our number have served for longer or
shorter periods as college presidents. Of Doctors of Divinity we have
a long list, and also a goodly number of Doctors of Law; and others,
though they have received less recognition for their work, have in our
judgment escaped only because the world does not always know the worth
of quiet lives. To spend years in the associations of such a class in
college is itself an efficient means of education. It is a high tribute
to the ability and the diligence of Mateer that, although he was with
us only two years, he divided the first honor. The sharer with him in
this distinction was the youngest member of the class, but a man who,
in addition to unusual capacity, also had enjoyed the best preparation
for college then available. On the part of Mateer, it was not what
is known as genius that won the honor; it was a combination of solid
intellectual capacity, with hard, constant work. The faculty assigned him
the valedictory, the highest distinction at graduation, but on his own
solicitation, this was given to the other first honor man.

In a letter sent by him from Wei Hsien, China, September 4, 1907, in
answer to a message addressed to him by the little remnant of his
classmates who assembled at Canonsburg a couple of months earlier, to
celebrate the fiftieth anniversary of their graduation, he said:

    It was with very peculiar feelings of pleasure mingled with
    sadness that I read what was done by you at your meeting.
    The distance that separated me from you all adds a peculiar
    emphasis to my feelings, suggestive of loneliness. I have
    never been homesick in China. I would not be elsewhere than
    where I am, nor doing any other work than what I am doing. Yet
    when I read over the account of that meeting in Canonsburg my
    feelings were such as I have rarely had before. Separated by
    half the circumference of the globe for full forty-four years,
    yet in the retrospect the friendship formed in these years
    of fellowship in study seems to grow fresher and stronger
    as our numbers grow less. A busy life gives little time for
    retrospection, yet I often think of college days and college
    friends. Very few things in my early life have preserved their
    impression so well. I can still repeat the roll of our class,
    and I remember well how we sat in that old recitation room of
    Professor Jones [physics and chemistry]. I am in the second
    half of my seventy-second year, strong and well. China has
    agreed with me. I have spent my life itinerating, teaching and
    translating, with chief strength on teaching. But with us all
    who are left, the meridian of life is past, and the evening
    draws on. Yet a few of us have still some work to do. Let us
    strive to do it well, and add what we can to the aggregate
    achievement of the class’s life work—a record of which I trust
    none of us may be ashamed.

In the unanticipated privilege of writing this book I am trying to
fulfill that wish of our revered classmate.




III

FINDING HIS LIFE WORK

    “From my youth I had the missionary work before me as a dim
    vision. A half-formed resolution was all the while in my mind,
    though I spoke of it to no one. But for this it is questionable
    whether I would have given up teaching to go to the Seminary.
    After long consideration and many prayers I offered myself
    to the Board, and was accepted.”—AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH for
    college class anniversary, 1897.


In the four sentences at the head of this chapter we have a condensed
outline of the process by which Calvin Mateer came to be a foreign
missionary. In his case it did not, as in the antecedent experience of
most other clergymen who have given themselves to this work, start with
an attraction first toward the ministry, and then toward the missionary
service; but just the reverse. In order to understand this we need to
go back again to “the old home,” and especially to his mother. We are
fortunate here in having the veil of the past lifted by Mrs. Kirkwood,
as one outside of the family could not do, or, even if he could, would
hesitate to do.

    Long before her marriage, when indeed but a young girl,
    Mary Nelson Diven [Calvin’s mother] heard an appeal for the
    Sandwich Islands made by the elder Dr. Forbes, one of the early
    missionaries of the American Board, to those islands. He asked
    for a box of supplies. There was not much missionary interest
    in the little church of Dillsburg, York County, Pennsylvania,
    of which she was a member; for the Presbyterian Board of
    Foreign Missions had not been organized, and the American Board
    had not attained its majority. Her pastor sympathized with the
    newly awakened zeal and interest of his young parishioner,
    when she proposed to canvass the congregation in response to
    Dr. Forbes’s appeal. The box was secured and sent. This was
    the seed that germinated in her heart so early and bore fruit
    through the whole of her long life.

    When in her nineteenth year she was married to John Mateer,
    hers was a marriage in the Lord; and together she and her
    husband consecrated their children in their infancy to his
    service. This consecration was not a form; they were laid upon
    the altar and never taken back. Through all the self-denying
    struggles to secure their education, one aim was steadily kept
    in view, that of fitting them either to carry the gospel to
    some heathen land, or to do the Lord’s work in their own land.

    In addition to the foreign missionary periodicals, a number
    of biographies of foreign missionaries were secured and
    were read by all the family. Not only did this mother try
    to awaken in her children an interest in missions through
    missionary literature, but she devised means to strengthen
    and make permanent this interest, to furnish channels through
    which these feelings and impulses might flow toward practical
    results. One of these was a missionary mite box which she
    fashioned with her own hands, away back in the early forties,
    before the mite boxes had been scattered broadcast in the
    land. Quaint indeed it was, this plain little wooden box,
    covered with small-figured wall paper. Placed upon the parlor
    mantel, it soon became the shrine of the children’s devotion.
    No labor or self-denial on their part was considered too great
    to secure pennies for “the missionary box.” Few pennies were
    spent for self-indulgence after that box was put in place, and
    overflowing was the delight when some unwonted good fortune
    made it possible to drop in silver coins—“six-and-a-fourth
    bits,” or “eleven-penny bits.” Most of the offerings were
    secured by such self-denials as foregoing coffee, sugar, or
    butter. There was not at that time much opportunity for country
    children to earn even pennies. The “red-letter” day of all the
    year was when the box was opened and the pennies were counted.

    This earnest-hearted mother had counted the cost of what she
    was doing in thus educating her children into the missionary
    spirit. When her first-born turned his face toward the heathen
    world, there was no drawing back—freely she gave him to the
    work. As one after another of her children offered themselves
    to the Foreign Board, she rejoiced in the honor God had put
    upon her, never shrinking from the heart strain the separation
    from her children must bring. She only made them more special
    objects of prayer, thus transmuting her personal care-taking to
    faith. She lived to see four of her children in China.

This explains how it came about that this elder son, from youth, had
before him the missionary work as “a dim vision,” and that “a half-formed
resolution” to take it up was all the while in his mind.

When he graduated from college, he had made no decision as to his life
work. During the years preceding he at no time put aside the claims of
missions, and consequently of the ministry, upon him, and in various
ways he showed his interest in that line of Christian service. As he saw
the situation the choice seemed mainly to lie between this on the one
hand, and teaching on the other. Before he graduated he had the offer of
a place in the corps of instructors for the Lawrenceville (New Jersey)
school, since grown into such magnitude and esteem as a boys’ preparatory
institution; but the conditions were not such that he felt justified in
accepting. Unfortunately, there is a blank in his Journal for the period
between March 4, 1857, some six months before he received his diploma at
Jefferson, and October 24, 1859, when he had already been a good while in
the theological seminary; and to supply it scarcely any of his letters
are available. In the autobiographical sketch already noticed he says:

    From college I went to take charge of the academy at Beaver,
    Pennsylvania. I found it run down almost to nothing, so that
    the first term (half year) it hardly paid me my board. I was on
    my mettle, however, and determined not to fail. I taught and
    lectured and advertised, making friends as fast as I could.
    I found the school with about twenty boys, all day scholars;
    I left it at the end of the third term with ninety, of whom
    thirty were boarders. I could easily have gone on and made
    money, but I felt that I was called to preach the gospel,
    and so, I sold out my school and went to Allegheny [Western
    Theological Seminary], entering when the first year was half
    over.

One of his pupils at Beaver was J. R. Miller, D.D., a distinguished
minister of the gospel in Philadelphia; and very widely known especially
as the author of solid but popular religious books. Writing of his
experience at the Beaver Academy, he says:

    When I first entered, the principal was Mr. Mateer. The first
    night I was there, my room was not ready, and I slept with him
    in his room. I can never forget the words of encouragement
    and cheer he spoke that night, to a homesick boy, away for
    almost the first time from his father and mother.... My contact
    with him came just at the time when my whole life was in such
    plastic form that influence of whatever character became
    permanent. He was an excellent teacher. His personal influence
    over me was very great. I suppose that when the records are all
    known, it will be seen that no other man did so much for the
    shaping of my life as he did.

While at Beaver he at last decided that he was called of God to study
for the ministry, but called not by any extraordinary external sign
or inward experience. It was a sense of duty that determined him, and
although he obeyed willingly, yet it was not without a struggle. He had a
consciousness of ability to succeed as a teacher or in other vocations;
and he was by no means without ambition to make his mark in the world.
Because he was convinced by long and careful and prayerful consideration
that he ought to become a minister he put aside all the other pursuits
that might have opened to him. Not long after he entered the seminary he
wrote to his mother: “You truly characterize the work for which I am now
preparing as a great and glorious one. I have long looked forward to it,
though scarcely daring to think it my duty to engage in it. After much
pondering in my own mind, and prayer for direction I have thought it my
duty to preach.”

On account of teaching, as already related, he did not enter the
theological seminary until more than a year after I did, so that I was
not his classmate there. He came some months late in the school year, and
had at first much back work to make up; but he soon showed that he ranked
among the very best students. His classmate, Rev. John H. Sherrard, of
Pittsburg, writes:

    One thing I do well remember about Mateer: his mental
    superiority impressed everyone, as also his deep spirituality.
    In some respects, indeed most, he stood head and shoulders
    above his fellows around him.

Another classmate, Rev. Dr. William Gaston, of Cleveland, says:

    We regarded him as one of our most level-headed men; our peer
    in all points; not good merely in one point, but most thorough
    in all branches of study. He was cheerful and yet not flippant,
    and with a tinge of the most serious. He was optimistic,
    dwelling much on God’s great love.... He was not only a year in
    advance of most of us in graduating from college, but I think
    that we, as students, felt that though we were classmates in
    the seminary, he was in advance of us in other things. Life
    seemed more serious to him. I doubt if any one of us felt the
    responsibility of life as much as he did. I doubt if anyone
    worked as hard as he.

The Western Theological Seminary, during the period of Mateer’s
attendance, was at the high-water mark of prosperity. The general
catalogue shows an enrollment of sixty-one men in his class; the total
in all classes hovered about one hundred and fifty. In the faculty there
were only four members, and, estimated by the specializations common
in our theological schools to-day, they could not adequately do all
their work; and this was the more true of them, because all save one
of them eked out his scanty salary by taking charge of a city church.
But they did better than might now be thought possible; and especially
was this practicable because of the limited curriculum then prescribed,
and followed by all students. Dr. David Elliott was still at work,
though beyond the age when he was at his best. Samuel J. Wilson was just
starting in his brilliant though brief career, and commanded a peculiar
attachment from his pupils. Dr. Jacobus was widely known and appreciated
for his popular commentaries. However, the member of the faculty who left
the deepest impress on Mateer was Dr. William S. Plumer. Nor in this was
his case exceptional. We all knew that Dr. Plumer was not in the very
first rank of theologians. We often missed in his lectures the marks of
very broad and deep scholarship. But as a teacher he nevertheless made
upon our minds an impression that was so great and lasting that in all
our subsequent lives we have continued to rejoice in having been under
his training. Best of all was his general influence on the students. We
doubt whether in the theological seminaries of the Presbyterian Church of
the United States it has ever been equaled, except by Archibald Alexander
of Princeton. The dominant element of that influence was a magnificent
personality saturated with the warmest and most tender piety, having its
source in love for the living, personal Saviour. For Dr. Plumer, Mateer
had then a very high degree of reverent affection, and he never lost it.

Spiritually, the condition of the seminary while Mateer was there was
away above the ordinary. In the winter of 1857-58 a great revival had
swept over the United States, and across the Atlantic. In no place
was it more in evidence than in the theological schools; it quickened
immensely the spiritual life of the majority of the students. One of its
fruits there was the awakening of a far more intense interest in foreign
missions. I can still recall the satisfaction which some of us who in the
seminary were turning our faces toward the unevangelized nations had in
the information that this strong man who stood in the very first rank as
to character and scholarship had decided to offer himself to the Board of
Foreign Missions for such service as they might select for him. It was a
fitting consummation of his college and seminary life.

Yet it was only slowly, even in the seminary, and after much searching
of his own heart and much wrestling in prayer, that he came to this
decision. Outside of himself there was a good deal that tended to impel
him toward it. The faculty, and especially Dr. Plumer, did all they
could wisely to press on the students the call of the unevangelized
nations for the gospel. Representatives of this cause—missionaries
and secretaries—visited the seminary, where there were, at that
time, more than an ordinary number of young men who had caught the
missionary spirit. In college, Mateer, without seeking to isolate
himself from others, had come into real intimacy with scarcely any
of his fellow-students. He says in the autobiographical sketch, “I
minded my own business, making comparatively few friends outside of my
own class, largely because I was too bashful to push my way.” In the
seminary he, while still rather reserved, came nearer to some of his
fellow-theologues; and especially to one, Dwight B. Hervey, who shared
with him the struggle over duty as to a field of service. They seem to
have been much in conference on that subject.

On the 21st of January, 1860, he presented himself before the Presbytery
of Ohio, to which the churches of Pittsburg belonged, passed examination
in his college studies, and was received under the care of that body;
but he had not then made up his mind to be a missionary. On the 12th
of April of the same year he went before the Presbytery of Butler, at
Butler, Pennsylvania (having at his own request been transferred to the
care of that organization, because his parents’ home was now within its
bounds), and was licensed to preach. Yet still he had not decided to be
a missionary. He was powerfully drawn toward that work, and vacillation
at no time in his life was a characteristic; there simply was as yet no
need that he should finally make up his mind, and he wished to avoid any
premature committal of himself, which later he might regret, or which he
might feel bound to recall.

The summer of 1860 he spent in preaching here and there about Pittsburg,
several months being given to the Plains and Fairmount churches; followed
by a visit home, and another in Illinois.

When the seminary opened in the autumn, he was back in his place. One
of the duties which fell to him was to preach a missionary sermon
before the Society of Inquiry. He did this so well that the students
by vote expressed a desire that the sermon should be published. In his
Journal he notes that the preparation of this discourse “strengthened
his determination to give himself to this work.” Before the Christmas
recess Dr. J. Leighton Wilson, one of the secretaries of the Presbyterian
Board of Foreign Missions, visited the seminary, and in conference did
much to stimulate the missionary spirit. He found in Mateer an eager and
responsive listener. On the 12th of December Mateer wrote a long letter
to his mother, in which he expresses feeling, because without warrant
some one had told her that he had offered himself to the Foreign Board.
He says, “I am not going to take such an important step without informing
you of it directly and explicitly.” Then he proceeds to tell her just
what was his attitude at that time:

    I have thought of the missionary work this long time, but not
    very seriously until within the last couple of years. Ever
    since I came to the seminary I have had a conviction to some
    degree that I ought to go as a missionary. That conviction has
    been constantly growing and deepening, and more especially
    of late. I have about concluded that so far as I am myself
    concerned it is my duty to be a missionary. I have thought a
    great deal on this subject and I think that I have not come to
    such a conclusion hastily. It has cost me very considerable
    effort to give up the prospects which I might have had at home.
    The matter in almost every view you can take of it involves
    trial and self-denial. I need great grace,—for this I pray. But
    even if I have prospects of usefulness at home, surely nothing
    can be lost in this respect by doing what I am convinced is
    my duty. Indeed, one of the encouraging features, in fact the
    great encouragement, is a prospect of more extended usefulness
    than at home. This may seem not to be so at the first view, but
    a more careful consideration of all the aspects of the case
    will, I think, bring a different conclusion.

The letter is very full, and lays bare his whole mind and heart as he
would be willing to do only to his mother. It is a revelation of this
strong, self-reliant, mature but filial-spirited and tenderly thoughtful
young Christian man and prospective minister, to a mother whom he
recognized as deserving an affectionate consideration such as he owed to
no other created being.

On the 7th of January, 1861, he received a letter from his mother, in
which she gave her consent that he should be a foreign missionary, naming
only one or two conditions which involved no insuperable difficulty. In a
student prayer meeting about three weeks later he took occasion in some
remarks to tell them that he had decided to offer himself for this work.
Still, it was not until the 5th of April, and when within two weeks of
graduation, that he, in a full and formal letter, such as is expected
and is appropriate, offered himself to the Board. In his Journal of that
date, after recording the character of his letter, he says: “This is a
solemn and important step which I have now taken. During this week, while
writing this letter, I have, I trust, looked again at the whole matter,
and asked help and guidance from God. I fully believe it is my duty to
go. My greatest fear has been that I was not as willing to go as I should
be, but I cast myself on Christ and go forward.” On the 13th of April he
received word from the Board that he had been accepted, the time of his
going out and his field of labor being yet undetermined.

So the problem of his life work was at length solved, as surely as it
could be by human agency. It had been his mother’s wish that he should
wait a year before going to his field, and to this he had no serious
objection; but as matters turned out, more than two years elapsed before
he was able to leave this country. This long delay was caused by the
outbreak of the Civil War, and the financial stringency which made it
impossible for the Foreign Board to assume any additional obligations.
Much of the time the outlook was so dark that he almost abandoned hope of
entering on his chosen work, though the thought of this filled his heart
with grief. He was intensely loyal to the cause of the Union, and if he
had not been a licentiate for the ministry he almost certainly would have
enlisted in the army. He records his determination to go if drafted.
Once, indeed, during this period of waiting he was a sort of candidate
for a chaplaincy to a regiment, which fortunately he did not secure. For
several months he preached here and there in the churches of the general
region about Pittsburg, and also made a visit to towns in central Ohio,
one of these being Delaware, the seat of the Ohio Wesleyan University.
Not long afterward he received an urgent request from the Old School
Presbyterian Church in that town to come and supply them. About the same
time the churches of Fairmount and Plains in Pennsylvania gave him a
formal call to become their pastor, but this he declined. He accepted
the invitation to Delaware, I suppose partly because it left him free
still to go as a missionary whenever the way might open. At Delaware he
remained eighteen months, until at last, in the good providence of God,
he was ordered “to the front” out in China.

The story of his service of the church in that place need not be told
here except in brief. It must, however, be clearly stated that it was
in the highest degree creditable to him. In fact, the conditions were
such that one may see in it a providential training in the courage and
patience and faithfulness which in later years he needed to exercise on
the mission field. The church was weak, and was overshadowed somewhat
even among the Presbyterian element by a larger and less handicapped New
School organization; and was sorely distressed by internal troubles.
For a while after Mateer came, it was a question whether it could be
resuscitated from its apparently dying stale. At the end of his period of
service it was once more alive, comparatively united, and anxious to have
him remain as pastor.

On November 12, 1862, while in charge of the church at Delaware, he was
ordained to the full work of the ministry, as an evangelist, by the
Presbytery of Marion, in session at Delaware.

On December 27, 1862, he was married in Delaware, at the home of her
uncle, to Miss Julia A. Brown, of Mt. Gilead, Ohio. Two years before
they were already sufficiently well acquainted to interchange friendly
letters; later their friendship ripened into mutual love; and now, after
an eight months’ engagement, they were united for life. Mateer says in
his Journal, “The wedding was very small and quiet; though it was not
wanting in merriment,” and naïvely adds, “Found marrying not half so hard
as proposing.” Julia, as he ever afterward calls her, was a superbly
good wife for him. In her own home, in the schoolroom, in the oversight
of the Chinese boys and girls who were their pupils, in the preparation
of her “Music Book,” in her labors for the evangelization of the women,
in her journeyings,—hindered as she was most of the time by broken
health,—she effectively toiled on, until at last, after thirty-five years
of missionary service, her husband laid away all of her that was mortal
in the little cemetery east of the city of Tengchow, by the side of her
sister, Maggie (Mrs. Capp), who had died in the same service, and of
other missionary friends who had gone on before her.

When they were married they were still left in great uncertainty as to
the time when the Board could send them out, or, indeed, whether the
Board could send them out at all. They went on their bridal trip to his
parents’ home in western Pennsylvania, reaching there on Wednesday,
December 31. Just a week afterward he received a letter from the Board
announcing their readiness to send them to China. The record of his
Journal deserves to be given here in full.

    Scarcely anything in my life ever came so unexpectedly. A peal
    of thunder in the clear winter sky would not have surprised
    us more. The letter was handed me in the morning when I came
    downstairs at grandfather’s. After reading it, I took it
    upstairs and read it to “my Jewel.” In less than three minutes
    I think our minds were made up. Her first exclamation after
    hearing the letter I shall not forget: “Oh, I am glad!” That
    was the right ring for a missionary: no long-drawn, sorrowful
    sigh, but the straight-out, noble, self-sacrificing, “Oh, I am
    glad!” I shall remember that time, that look, that expression.
    If I did not say, I felt, the same. I think I can truly say I
    was and am glad. My lifelong aspiration is yet to be realized.
    I shall yet spend my life and lay my bones in a heathen land.
    I had fully made up my mind to labor in this country, and most
    likely for some time in Delaware; but how suddenly everything
    is changed! The only regret I feel is that I am not five years
    younger. What a great advantage it would give me in acquiring
    the language! But so it is, and Providence made it so. I had
    despaired of going, and despairing I was greatly perplexed to
    understand the leadings of Providence in directing my mind so
    strongly to the work, and bringing me so near to the point of
    going before. Now I understand the matter better. Now I see
    that my strong persuasion that I would yet go was right. God
    did not deceive me. He only led me by a way that I knew not.
    Just when the darkness seemed to be greatest, then the sun
    shone suddenly out. How strange it all seems! The way was all
    closed; no funds to send out men to China; and I could not go.
    Suddenly two missionaries die, and the health of another fails;
    and the Board feels constrained to send out one man at least,
    to supply their place; and so the door opens to me. And I will
    enter it, for Providence has surely opened it. As I have given
    myself to this work, and hold myself in readiness to go, I will
    not retrace my steps now. Having put my hand to the plow, I
    will not look back. I do not wish to. It is true, however, that
    preaching a year and a half has bound strong cords around me
    to keep me here. I cannot go so easily now as I might have done
    when I first left the seminary. It will be a sore trial to tear
    myself away from the folks at Delaware. They will try hard, I
    know, to retain me; but I think my mind is set, and I must go.
    I must go; I am glad to go; I will go. The Lord will provide
    for Delaware. I commit the work there to his hands. I trust and
    believe that he will carry it on, and that it will yet appear
    that my labor there has not been in vain. Yesterday I was
    twenty-seven years old. I hope to chronicle my next birthday in
    China. The Lord has spared me twenty-seven years in my native
    land. Will he give me as many in China! Grant it, O Lord, and
    strengthen me mightily to spend them all for thee!

This strong, persistent, conscientious, self-controlled, consecrated man
had found his life work at last.




IV

GONE TO THE FRONT

    “If there had been no other way to get back to America, than
    through such another experience, it is doubtful whether I
    should ever have seen my native land again.”—AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL
    SKETCH, 1897.


The choice of the country to which he should go as a missionary had been
with him a subject of earnest consideration and prayer. He says in his
Journal, under date of September 12, 1862:

    The Board wished me to go to Canton, China, at first. This was
    altogether against my inclinations and previous plans; but the
    Board would not send me anywhere else, until in the last letter
    they offered to send me to Japan; I have long had thoughts of
    northern India or of Africa; and especially have I wished to go
    to some new mission where the ground is unoccupied, and where
    I would not be entrammeled by rules and rigid instructions.
    The languages of eastern Asia are also exceedingly difficult
    and the missionary work is peculiarly discouraging among that
    people.

Two days later, however, he sent the Board a letter saying that he would
go to Japan. When his field finally was specifically designated, it was
north China. He was to be stationed at Tengchow, a port that had been
opened to foreign commerce in the province of Shantung.

The Mateers remained at Delaware until late in April. Until that time he
continued in charge of his church. In a touching farewell service they
took leave of their people, and traveled by slow stages toward New York.

Going to live in China was then so much more serious a matter than it is
now that we can scarcely appreciate the leave-takings that fell to the
lot of these two young missionaries. The hardest trial of all was to say
good-by to mother and to father, and to brothers and sisters, some of
whom were yet small children, and for whom he felt that he might do so
much if not separated from them by half the distance round the world.

At length on July 3, 1863, they embarked at New York on the ship that was
to carry them far to the south of the Cape of Good Hope, then eastward
almost in sight of the northern shores of Australia, and finally, by the
long outside route, up north again to Shanghai. They were one hundred
and sixty-five days, or only about two weeks short of half a year, in
making the voyage. During that long period they never touched land. It
needs to be borne in mind that in 1863 the Suez Canal had only been
begun; that the railroads across our continent had not been built; and
that no lines of passenger steamers were running from our western coast
over to Asia. No blame, therefore, is chargeable to the Board of Missions
for sending out their appointees on a sailing vessel. The ship selected
was a merchantman, though not a clipper built for quick transit, was of
moderate size, in sound condition, and capable of traveling at fairly
good speed. Accompanying the Mateers were Hunter Corbett and his wife,
who also had been appointed by the Board, for Tengchow. There were six
other passengers, none of whom were missionaries, and, besides the
officers, there was a crew of sixteen men.

At best the voyage could not be otherwise than tedious and trying. The
accommodations for passengers were necessarily scant, the staterooms,
being mere closets with poor ventilation, and this cut off in rough
weather. The only place available for exercise was the poop deck, about
thirty feet long; thus walking involved so much turning as greatly to
lessen the pleasure, and many forms of amusement common on larger vessels
were entirely shut out. Food on such a long voyage had to be limited in
variety, and must become more or less stale. Of course, it was hot in the
tropics, and it was cold away south of the equator, and again up north
in November and December. Seasickness is a malady from which exemption
could not be expected. When a company of passengers and officers with so
little in common as to character and aims were cooped together, for so
long a time, in narrow quarters, where they must constantly come into
close contact, a serious lack of congeniality and some friction might be
expected to develop among them.

The ship also, on that voyage, encountered distinctive annoyances and
dangers. For weeks after they sailed they were in constant dread of
Confederate privateers. Once they were so sure that they were about to
be captured by a ship which they mistook for one of these destroyers
of American commerce that they hastily prepared as well as they could
for such a catastrophe. When they sailed from New York, the battle of
Gettysburg was in progress and still undecided; and it was not until
October 15 when they were overtaken by a vessel which had sailed eleven
days after them from New York, that their anxiety as to the result was
relieved, and their hearts were thrilled with exultation, by the news
that Meade was victorious, and also that Vicksburg had fallen. Out among
the islands to the northeast of Australia the ship was caught in a
current, and was forced so rapidly and nearly on the wild, rocky shores
of an uncivilized island that the captain himself despaired of escaping
wreck. Providentially a breeze from the land sprang up and carried them
out of danger. They were overtaken by no severe storms. Several times
their patience was sorely tested by protracted calms; in the Pacific it
once took them seventeen days to make three hundred and forty miles.

All of these things lay beyond the control of the officers and crew, and
the missionaries accepted them as trials to which they ought quietly
and patiently to submit. But imagine as added to this a half year’s
subjection to the arbitrary and autocratic rule of a captain who was
ignorant except as to seamanship; who was coarse and constantly profane
in speech; who was tyrannical and brutal so far as he dared to be, and
yet when boldly faced by those who were able to bring him to account
for his conduct was a contemptible coward; who skimped the people on
board of food adequate in quantity or decently fit in quality, partly
because of stingy greed, and partly from a desire thus to gratify his
malignant disposition; who hated missionaries and seemed to have a
special pleasure in making their lives on his ship as uncomfortable as
possible; who barely tolerated such religious observances as the asking
of a blessing at meals, or a service for social worship on the Sabbath
in the cabin, and who forbade all attempts to do any religious work,
even by conversation, among the crew; who was capable of descending to
various petty meannesses in order to gratify his base inclinations; and
who somehow yet managed to secure from officers under him a measure
of sympathy and coöperation in his conduct. When we have as fully as
possible grasped these things, we can understand why Dr. Mateer, half
a lifetime afterward, wrote to his college classmates that if in order
to reach America it had been necessary to repeat the experience of that
outward voyage, it is doubtful if ever again he had seen his native land.

But at last this voyage was nearing its end. They might have reached port
some days earlier, had it not been that all the crew except three or four
had—through lack of proper food and other bad treatment—been attacked
by scurvy, a disease already then having been almost shut out even from
sailing vessels on long trips. On December 16 they had the happiness of
going ashore at Shanghai, where they soon found a welcome in the homes
of missionaries and of other friends. Corbett was not well, and Mateer
always believed that the health of both Julia and Corbett was permanently
injured by the treatment received on that outward voyage.

On the voyage the missionaries warned the captain that they would surely
hold him to account for his conduct, when they reached Shanghai. They
kept their word. After consultation with the missionaries on the local
field, with a lawyer, and with the American consul, they determined to
proceed with formal charges against him. Learning of this, he lost no
time in coming to them, and, with fear and trembling, he begged that they
would have mercy on him. A second interview was appointed, but Corbett
was too unwell to see him, and Mateer had to meet him alone. In his
Journal he says:

    I took the paper which had been read to the consul, and read it
    to him giving copious comments and illustrations, at the same
    time asking him to explain or correct if he could. I never in
    my life gave any man such a lecturing. I just kept myself busy
    for an hour and a half telling him how mean and contemptible
    a scoundrel he was. I then offered him as a settlement of
    the matter a paper which I proposed to publish, stating in
    it that he had apologized and that we had agreed to suspend
    prosecution. From this he pled off in the most pitiful manner,
    saying that he would be ruined by it.

The third day he came again and made such an appeal for mercy that
Mateer’s sympathy, and also his desire to avoid detention at Shanghai,
led him to agree to accept a private apology, and to refer the matter
to the interested parties at New York. Years afterward Mateer, on going
aboard a coasting steamer bound for Shanghai, discovered that this man
was the captain. He at once cancelled his passage, and went ashore until
he could secure a place on another vessel.

Tengchow is distant more than five hundred miles from Shanghai. The
only way to reach it was by a second voyage northward along the coast
to Chefoo, and thence overland. On January 3, 1864, the Mateers and the
Corbetts went aboard the little coasting steamer “Swatow,” bound for
Chefoo. They had a head wind, and the ship was almost empty of cargo.
They suffered again from seasickness, and from cold on account of lack
of bed-clothing. On the evening of the third day out, at about half-past
eight, they were sitting around the stove expecting soon to be at Chefoo,
when suddenly the vessel struck the bottom and the bell rang to reverse
the engine. Bump followed bump, until it seemed as if she must go to
pieces. The captain, though not unfamiliar with the route, had allowed
himself to be deceived by the masts of a sunken ship, and supposing this
to be a vessel at anchor in the harbor of Chefoo, had gone in, and his
steamer was now hard and fast on the bottom, about fifteen miles down the
coast from his destination. We will allow Mateer in his Journal to tell
his own story.

    All was a scene of indescribable confusion. The captain lost
    all self-possession and all authority over his men. Most of
    his crew and servants were Chinese or Malays, and on such an
    occasion the worst features of their character shine out. They
    refused to do anything and went to packing up their few goods
    and at the same time seizing everything they could get hold
    of. They went everywhere and into everything, pilfering and
    destroying. Meanwhile the waves were striking the vessel at
    a fearful rate, and threatening to break it into pieces. We
    knew not what to do, or what we could do. The mates and two
    passengers (a merchant and an English naval officer) lowered
    a boat and, pushing off, succeeded in landing and in making a
    rope fast from the ship to the shore. They found that we were
    much nearer the land than we had supposed. We were now in a
    great quandary what to do, whether to remain on the ship, or
    get in the boat and go ashore. We mostly inclined to remain,
    but the captain urged us to go ashore. While the wind remained
    moderate we could stay on the ship with safety; but if the wind
    should increase before morning we might be in danger of our
    lives. The captain said that he thought that it was not more
    than eight or nine miles to Chefoo, and he was anxious that
    word should be sent there. We at length yielded to his advice,
    and about eleven o’clock got into a boat and managed to get
    ashore through the surf. It was a bitter cold night, and we
    loaded ourselves with blankets which we supposed would come
    into requisition to keep us warm. Our party consisted of nine
    passengers (we four, Rev. Williamson and wife and child, and
    Rev. McClatchie—all missionaries—and Mr. Wilson, a merchant,
    and Mr. Riddle, a naval officer) and six Chinamen. Our hope was
    to set out in the direction of Chefoo, get a lodging for the
    ladies and Mr. Corbett by the way, while the rest of us pushed
    on to Chefoo to obtain assistance. We started off according to
    this plan, but soon found our way stopped by fields of ice,
    and we were compelled to turn from our course and seek the
    hills which towered up in the distance. The walking was very
    fatiguing; indeed, the ground was covered several inches with
    snow, and at many places there were large cakes and fields of
    ice. After long and weary tramping and turning and disputing
    about the best way, we at length reached the hills. I mounted
    to the top of the first hill and tried to get the party to go
    up over the hill and directly inland until we should find a
    house or village. Other counsels prevailed, however, and we
    wandered along the foot of the hill the best part of a mile.
    At length I got in the lead, and persuaded them that no houses
    would be found unless we went inland from the barren beach.
    We then crossed the ridge at a low place and retraced our
    steps on the other side of it, and finally, after much urging,
    persuaded those who wanted to sit down until morning to follow
    on inland on the track of some of our Chinamen. We soon came
    to a village, which was indeed a welcome sight. We were cold,
    and our feet were wet, and we were very tired, especially the
    ladies. Our troubles were not over yet, however, for we could
    not induce any of the Chinese to let us in. It was now four
    o’clock, and we were suffering from the effects of five hours’
    wandering in the snow and cold. Yet they persistently closed
    their doors and kept us out. Mr. Williamson and Mr. McClatchie
    could talk to them some, yet they refused to receive us.

    At last, after shivering in the cold about an hour, we
    succeeded in getting into a sort of shanty, which, however,
    afforded but very poor comfort. There was a heated kang in it,
    and the ladies managed to warm their feet on this. When it
    began to get light Mr. Riddle and Mr. Wilson started to Chefoo,
    thinking the city was only half a mile distant. This was what
    Mrs. Williamson understood the natives to say. Some time after
    Mr. McClatchie started, supposing it was three miles. We made
    breakfast on boiled rice and sweet potatoes which the people
    brought us.

    I started back to see what had become of the ship, and to look
    after our things. I found the vessel all sound and everything
    safe. I succeeded in getting several trunks of mine and Mr.
    Williamson’s landed on the beach, and got some of them started
    up to the village, which was at least two miles from the
    ship. Mr. Williamson then went down and succeeded in getting
    a variety of other things brought off and carried up to the
    village. It was a beautiful calm day, but we feared that a gale
    might spring up, as gales were frequent in this region at that
    time of year. In such a case the vessel must quickly be broken
    in pieces, and everything destroyed.

    We now began to look around for the night, and it was not a
    very comfortable prospect. Some English people came from Yentai
    (just across the bay from Chefoo) to survey the wreck of a
    vessel that had been cast away some time before at the same
    place, and they very kindly sent us some supper—their own, in
    fact—and also brought us a supply of furs and blankets. We had
    one large kang heated, and on this five stowed themselves,
    covering themselves with the blankets, while I made a bed and
    slept on the ground. The rest of the little room was filled
    with trunks and Chinese rubbish of various kinds. We slept
    very comfortably, however, and as we were very tired and had
    not slept a wink the night before, our sleep was sweet and
    refreshing to us. We had great cause to be thankful for even
    such accommodations in the circumstances.

    We made our breakfast on two dozen boiled eggs and some bread
    which the Englishmen had left us. I started immediately to the
    ship, intending, as the day was fine, to try and get as much
    as possible of the goods belonging to us off the ship, and
    to store them there until they could be taken to Yentai. As
    I came over the top of the hill and looked out on the sea, I
    saw a steamer coming which I knew was the English gunboat from
    Chefoo. My heart bounded with joy at the sight. At last we were
    to get help, and to reach Yentai without going overland. All
    our goods also would no doubt be saved.

By land it was twenty-eight miles to Chefoo, instead of the short
distance supposed by the men who started to walk, but they had persisted;
and at their instigation the gunboat had come to relieve the party left
behind. After some failures the gunboat succeeded in pulling the “Swatow”
into water where she again floated safely. The party out at the village
returned, and the goods were brought back and put on board the gunboat,
Mateer remaining over night with the steamer and coming up the next day
to Chefoo. He notices in his Journal that although Corbett was in a very
weak state, he seemed to suffer little or no bad effects from the first
terrible night on shore; nor were the ladies apparently any the worse
for their exposure. He mentions also that while some of the natives at
the village were disposed to annoy them as much as possible, others of
them were very kind, and he adds, “Never before did I feel my helpless
condition so much as among those natives, with whom I could not speak a
single word.”

Of course, they received a hearty welcome from the missionaries at
Chefoo. On the following Wednesday they started for Tengchow, fifty-five
miles away, traveling by shentza—a mode of travel peculiar to China, and
developed largely because of the almost complete absence of anything
like good wagon roads. It is simply a sort of covered litter, sustained
between two mules, one in advance of the other; in it one reclines, and
is jolted up and down by the motion of the animals, each going after his
own fashion over rough paths which lead without plan across the plains
and hills. Mateer’s Journal says of that trip:

    We rode about fifteen miles and stopped for the night at a
    Chinese inn. We had brought our eatables along, and, having
    got some tea, we made a very good supper, and we went to bed
    all together on a Chinese kang heated up to keep us warm. Next
    morning it was bitter cold, and we did not get started until
    about ten o’clock. I made them turn my shentza and Julia’s
    around [that is, with the open front away from the wind] or I
    do not know what we should have done. About five o’clock our
    cavalcade turned into an inn, and we soon found to our chagrin
    and vexation that we were doomed to spend another night in a
    Chinese inn; which, by the way, is anything but a comfortable
    place on a cold night. We made the best of it, however, and the
    next morning we were off again for Tengchow, where we arrived
    safely about two o’clock. At last our journeying was over,—set
    down on the field of our labor.

They had reached the front. This was early in January, 1864.




V

THE NEW HOME

    “Our new house is now done, and we are comfortably fixed in it.
    It suits us exactly, and my impression is that it will suit
    anyone who may come after us.... My prayer is that God will
    spare us to live in it many years, and bless us in doing much
    work for his glory.”—LETTER TO SECRETARY LOWRIE, December 24,
    1867.


Tengchow is one of the cities officially opened as a port for foreign
commerce, under the treaty of Tientsin, which went into actual effect
in 1860. Although a place of seventy thousand or more inhabitants, and
cleaner and more healthful than most Chinese towns, it has not attracted
people from western nations, except a little band of missionaries. The
harbor does not afford good anchorage; so it has not been favorable to
foreign commerce.

When the Mateers came to Tengchow, missionary operations had already
been begun both by the Southern Baptists and the American Presbyterians,
though in a very small way. In fact, throughout the whole of
China,—according to the best statistics available,—there were then on
that immense field only something more than a hundred ordained Protestant
missionaries, and as many female missionaries. There were also a few
physicians and printers. The number of native preachers was about two
hundred and fifty, and of colporteurs about the same. Few of these
colporteurs and native preachers were full ministers of the gospel. There
were sixteen stations, and perhaps a hundred out-stations. The Chinese
converts aggregated thirty-five hundred.

In all Shantung, with its many millions of people, the only places at
which any attempt had been made to establish stations were Chefoo and
Tengchow, both on the seacoast. The Baptists reached the latter of these
cities in the autumn of 1860. They were followed very soon afterward by
Messrs. Danforth and Gayley and their wives, of the Presbyterian Board;
and the next summer Mr. and Mrs. Nevius came up from Ningpo and joined
them.

The natives seemed to be less positively unfriendly than those of
many other parts of China are even to this day; yet it was only with
protracted and perplexing difficulties that houses in which to live could
be obtained. Not long after this was accomplished, Mrs. Danforth sickened
and died, and was laid in the first Christian grave at Tengchow. Then
came a “rebel,” or rather a robber invasion, that carried desolation and
death far and wide in that part of Shantung, and up to the very walls
of Tengchow, and left the city and country in a deplorable condition of
poverty and wretchedness. Two of the Baptist missionaries went out to
parley with these marauders, and were cut to pieces. Next ensued a period
during which rumors were rife among the people that the missionaries, by
putting medicine in the wells, and by other means, practiced witchcraft;
and this kept away many who otherwise might have ventured to hear the
gospel, and came near to producing serious danger. After this followed
a severe epidemic of cholera, filling the houses and the streets with
funerals and with mourning. For a while the missionaries escaped,
and did what they could for the Chinese patients; but they were soon
themselves attacked; and then they had to give their time and strength
to ministering to their own sick, and to burying their own dead. Mr.
Gayley first, and then his child, died, and a child of one of the Baptist
missionaries. Others were stricken but recovered. The epidemic lasted
longest among the Chinese, and this afforded the missionaries opportunity
to save many lives by prompt application of remedies; and so tended
greatly to remove prejudice and to open the way for the gospel. Ten
persons were admitted to membership in the church, the first fruits of
the harvest which has ever since been gathering. But a sad depletion of
the laborers soon afterward followed. Mrs. Gayley was compelled to take
her remaining child, and go home; Mr. Danforth’s health became such that
he also had to leave; the health of Mrs. Nevius, which had been poor
for a long time, had become worse and, the physician having ordered her
away, she and her husband went south. This left Rev. Mr. Mills and his
wife as the only representatives of the Presbyterian Board, until the
Mateers and Corbetts arrived, about three years after the beginning of
the station by Danforth and Gayley.

When the Mateers and Corbetts came they were, of necessity, lodged in
the quarters already occupied by the Mills family. These consisted of no
less than four small one-story stone buildings clustered near together;
one used for a kitchen, another for a dining room, a third for a guest
room, and the fourth for a parlor and bedroom. Each stood apart from
the other, and without covered connection. The larger of them had been
a temple dedicated to Kwan Yin, whom foreigners have called the Chinese
god of mercy. According to the universal superstition, the air is full of
superhuman spirits, in dread of whom the people of China constantly live,
and to avert the displeasure of whom most of their religious services
are performed. Kwan Yin, however, is an exception in character to the
malignancy of these imaginary deities. There is no end to the myths that
are current as to this god, and they all are stories of deliverance from
trouble and danger. To him the people always turn with their vows and
prayers and offerings, in any time of special need. Partly because the
women are especially devoted to this cult, and partly because mercy is
regarded by the Chinese as a distinctively female trait, the easy-going
mythology of the country has allowed Kwan Yin, in later times, to take
the form of a woman. When the missionaries came to Tengchow, the priest
in charge of this temple was short of funds, and he was easily induced to
rent it to them. He left the images of Kwan Yin in the house. Just what
to do with them became a practical question; from its solution a boy who
lived with the Mateers learned a valuable lesson. When asked whether the
idols could do anybody harm, he promptly replied “No”; giving as a reason
that the biggest one that used to be in the room where they were then
talking was buried outside the gate! At first a wall was built around the
other idols, but by and by they were all taken down from their places
and disposed of in various ways. Mateer speaks of a mud image of Kwan
Yin, about four feet high, and weighing over two hundred pounds, still
standing in his garret in 1870.

The coming of these new mission families into the Mills residence
crowded it beyond comfort, and beyond convenience for the work that was
imperative. The Mateers had the dining room assigned to them as their
abode, this being the best that could be offered. Of course, little
effective study could under such conditions be put on the language which
must be acquired before any direct missionary labor could be performed.
Under the loss of time he thus was suffering, Mateer chafed like a caged
lion; and so, as soon as possible, he had another room cleared of the
goods of Mr. Nevius, which had been stored there until they could be
shipped, and then set to work to build a chimney and to put the place in
order for his own occupation. Thus he had his first experience of the
dilatory and unskillful operations of native mechanics. The dining room
was left without a stove, and, on account of the cold, something had to
be done to supply the want. In all Tengchow such a thing as a stove could
not be purchased; possibly one might have been secured at Chefoo, but
most probably none could have been obtained short of Shanghai. The time
had already come for Mateer to exercise his mechanical gifts. He says:

    Mr. Mills and I got to work to make a stove out of tin. We had
    the top and bottom of an old sheet-iron stove for a foundation
    from which we finally succeeded in making what proves to be a
    very good stove. We put over one hundred and sixty rivets in
    it in the process of making it. I next had my ingenuity taxed
    to make a machine to press the fine coal they burn here, into
    balls or blocks, so that we could use it. They have been simply
    setting it with a sort of gum water and molding it into balls
    with their hands. Thus prepared, it was too soft and porous to
    burn well. So, as it was the time of the new year, and we could
    not obtain a teacher, I got to work, and with considerable
    trouble, and working at a vast disadvantage from want of proper
    tools, I succeeded in making a machine to press the coal into
    solid, square blocks. At first it seemed as if it would be a
    failure, for although it pressed the coal admirably it seemed
    impossible to get the block out of the machine successfully.
    This was obviated, however, and it worked very well, and seems
    to be quite an institution.

This machine subsequently he improved so that a boy could turn out the
fuel with great rapidity.

The house, with the best arrangements that could be made, was so
overcrowded that relief of some sort was a necessity. The Corbetts,
despairing of getting suitable accommodations for themselves, went back
to the neighborhood of Chefoo and never returned,—an immense gain for
Chefoo, but an equally immense loss for Tengchow. Mills preferred to
find a new house for himself and family, and—after the usual delays
and difficulties because of the unwillingness of the people and of the
officials to allow the hated foreigners to get such a permanent foothold
in the place—he at length succeeded. But that was only a remote step
toward actual occupation. A Chinese house at its best estate commonly is
of one story; and usually has no floor but the ground and no ceiling but
the roof, or a flimsy affair made of cornstalks and paper. The windows
have a sort of latticework covered with thin paper; and it is necessary
to tear down some of the wall, in order to have a sufficient number of
them, and to give those which do exist a shape suitable for sash. The
doors are low, few in number, rudely made, and in two pieces. A Chinese
house may be large enough, but it is usually all in one big room.

It fell to these missionaries to get in order the house which Mills
secured; and to do this in the heat of summer, and during a season of
almost incessant downpour of rain. They were obliged not merely to
supervise most unsatisfactory laborers, but also to do much of the work
with their own hands. Eventually Mills fell sick, and Mateer alone was
left to complete the job. Yet he records that on the first day of August
his associate had gone to his new residence, and he and Julia were happy
in the possession of the old temple for their own abode. Unfortunately
both of them were taken down with dysentery. Of the day the Mills family
left he says in a letter to one of his brothers:

    Julia was able to sit up about half the day, and I was no
    better. You can imagine what a time we had getting our
    cooking stove up, and getting our cooking utensils out and
    in order,—no, you can’t either, for you don’t know what a
    Chinese servant is when of every three words you speak to him
    he understands one, and misunderstands two. However, we did
    finally get the machine going, and it works pretty well.

Here they remained three years; and, here, after they had built for
themselves a really “new home,” they long continued to carry on their
school work.

But experience soon convinced them that a new dwelling house was a
necessity. The buildings which they occupied proved to be both unhealthy
and unsuitable for the work they were undertaking. The unhealthiness
arose partly from the location. The ground in that section of the city is
low, and liable to be submerged in the rainy season. A sluggish little
stream ran just in front of the place, passing through the wall by a low
gate, and if this happened to be closed in a sudden freshet, the water
sometimes rose within the houses. There was a floor at least in the main
building, but it was laid upon scantlings about four inches thick,
these being placed on the ground. The boards were not grooved, and as
a consequence while making a tight enough floor in the damp season, in
the dry it opened with cracks a quarter to half an inch wide. The walls
were of stone, built without lime, and with an excess of mud mortar, and
lined on the inside with sun-dried brick. The result of all this was
that the dampness extended upward several feet above the floor, and by
discoloration showed in the driest season where it had been. The floor
could not be raised without necessitating a change in the doors and
windows, and it was doubtful whether this could be made with safety to
the house. It is no wonder that, under such conditions, Mrs. Mateer began
to suffer seriously from the rheumatism that remained with her all the
rest of her life. Added to the other discomforts, were the tricks played
them by the ceiling. This consisted of cornstalks hung to the roof with
strings, and covered on the lower side with paper pasted on. Occasionally
a heavy rain brought this ceiling down on the heads of the occupants; and
cracks were continually opening, thus rendering it almost impossible to
keep warm in cold weather.

An appeal was made to the Board for funds for a new dwelling. Happily the
Civil War was about over, and the financial outlook was brightening; so
in the course of a few months permission for the new house was granted,
and an appropriation was made. The first thing to do was to obtain a
suitable piece of ground on which to build. Mateer had in his own mind
fixed on a plot adjoining the mission premises, and understood to be
purchasable. Such transactions in China seldom move rapidly. He bided his
time until the Chinese new year was close at hand, when everybody wants
money; then, striking while the iron was hot, he bought the ground.

Long before this consummation he was so confident that he would succeed
that, foreseeing that he must be his own architect and superintendent,
he wrote home to friends for specific information as to every detail of
house-building. Nothing seems to have been overlooked. He even wanted to
know just how the masons stand when at certain parts of their work.

Early in February in 1867 he was down at Chefoo purchasing the brick
and stone and lime; and so soon as the material was on hand and as
the weather permitted, the actual construction was begun. It was an
all-summer job, necessitating his subordinating, as far as possible,
all other occupations to this. It required a great deal of care and
patience to get the foundations put down well, and of a proper shape for
the superstructure which was to rest upon them. In his Journal he thus
records the subsequent proceedings:

    When the level of the first floor was reached I began the
    brickwork myself, laying the corners and showing the masons one
    by one how to proceed. I had no small amount of trouble before
    I got them broken in to use the right kind of trowel, which
    I had made for the purpose, and then to lay the brick in the
    right way. I had another round of showing and trouble when the
    arches at the top of the windows had to be turned, and then the
    placing of the sleepers took attention; and then the setting of
    the upper story doors and windows. The work went slowly on, and
    when the level was reached we had quite a raising, getting the
    plates and rafters up. All is done, however, and to-day they
    began to put the roof on.... I hope in a few days I will be
    able to resume my work again, as all the particular parts are
    now done, so that I can for the most give it into the hands of
    the Chinese to oversee.

The early part of November, 1867, the Mateers lived “half in the old and
half in the new.” On November 21 they finally moved. That was Saturday.
In the night there came up a fierce storm of snow and wind. When they
awoke on Sabbath morning, the kitchen had been filled with snow through
a door that was blown open. The wind still blew so hard that the stove
in the kitchen smoked and rendered cooking impossible. The stair door
had not yet been hung, and the snow drifted into the hall and almost
everywhere in the house. Stoves could not be set up, or anything else
done toward putting things in order, until Thursday, when the storm
abated.

But they were in their new house. It was only a plain, two-story, brick
building, with a roofed veranda to both stories and running across the
front, a hall in the middle of the house with a room on either side, and
a dining room and kitchen at the rear. Much of the walls is now covered
by Virginia creeper, wistaria, and climbing rose. It is one of those cozy
missionary dwellings which censorious travelers to foreign lands visit,
or look at from the outside; and then, returning to their own land, they
tell about them as evidence of the luxury by which these representatives
of the Christian churches have surrounded themselves. Yet if they cared
to know, and would examine, they would out of simple regard for the
truth, if for no other reason, testify to the necessity of such homes for
the health and efficiency of the missionaries, and as powerful indirect
helps in the work of social betterment among the natives; and they would
wonder at the self-sacrifice and economy and scanty means by which these
worthy servants of Christ have managed to make for themselves and their
successors such comfortable and tasteful places of abode.

[Illustration: TENGCHOW MISSION COMPOUND, FROM THE NORTH

Extreme left, Entrance to Dr. Hayes’ House. Behind this, part of back of
Dr. Mateer’s House. Foreground, Vegetable Gardens belonging to Chinese]

The Mateer house stands on the compound of the mission of the
Presbyterian Board, which is inside and close to the water gate in the
city wall. About it, as the years went by, were erected a number of other
buildings needed for various purposes. The whole, being interspersed with
trees, combines to make an attractive scene.

There was nothing pretentious about the house, but it was comfortable,
and suited to their wants; and it was all the more dear to them because
to such a large degree it had been literally built by themselves. Here
for more than thirty-one years Julia presided, and here she died. After
that Dr. Mateer’s niece, Miss Margaret Grier, took charge previous to
her marriage to Mason Wells, and continued for some years subsequent to
that event. To this house still later Dr. Mateer brought Ada, who was
his helpmeet in his declining years, and who still survives. This was
the home of Dr. Mateer from 1867 to 1904. It was in it and from it as a
center that he performed by far the larger part of his life work. Here
the Mandarin Revision Committee held its first meeting.

It was always a genuine home of the most attractive type. What that means
in a Christian land every reader can in a good degree understand; but
where all around is a mass of strange people, saturated with ignorance,
prejudice, and the debased morality consequent on idolatry, a people of
strange and often repulsive habits of living, the contrast is, as the
Chinese visitors often used to say, “the difference between heaven and
hell.” But what most of all made this little dwelling at Tengchow a home
in the truest sense was the love that sanctified it. Dr. Mateer used
in his later years frequently to say: “In the thirty-five years of our
married life, there never was a single jar.” Nor was this true because
in this sphere the one ruled, and the other obeyed; the secret of it was
that between husband and wife there was such complete harmony that each
left the other supreme in his or her department.

Here many visitors and guests received a welcome and an entertainment
to which such as survive still revert with evidently delightful
recollections. This seems to be preëminently true of some who were
children at the time when they enjoyed the hospitalities of that home.
Possibly some persons who have thought that they knew Dr. Mateer well,
may be surprised at the revelation thus made. One of those who has told
her experience is Miss Morrison, whose father was a missionary. He died
at Peking, and subsequently his widow and their children removed to one
of the southern stations of the Presbyterian Mission. It is of a visit to
this new home at Tengchow that Miss Morrison writes. She says:

    Two of the best friends of our childhood were Dr. Calvin Mateer
    and his brother John. We spent two summers at Dr. Mateer’s
    home in Tengchow, seeking escape from the heat and malaria of
    our more southern region. It could not have been an altogether
    easy thing for two middle-aged people to take into their quiet
    home four youngsters of various ages; but Dr. and Mrs. Mateer
    made us very welcome, and if we disturbed their peace we never
    knew it. I remember Mrs. Mateer as one of the most sensible and
    dearest of women, and Dr. Mateer as always ready in any leisure
    moment for a frolic. We can still recall his long, gaunt
    figure, striding up and down the veranda, with my little sister
    perched upon his shoulders and holding on by the tips of his
    ears. She called him “the camel,” and I imagine that she felt
    during her rides very much the same sense of perilous delight
    that she would have experienced if seated on the hump of one
    of the tall, shaggy beasts that we had seen swinging along,
    bringing coal into Peking.

    Dr. Mateer loved a little fun at our expense. What a beautiful,
    mirthful smile lit up his rugged features when playing with
    children! He had what seemed to us a tremendous ball,—I suppose
    that it was a football,—which he used to throw after us. We
    would run in great excitement, trying to escape the ball, but
    the big, black thing would come bounding after us, laying us
    low so soon as it reached us. Then with a few long steps he
    would overtake us, and beat us with his newspaper till it was
    all in tatters. Then he would scold us for tearing up his
    paper. I remember not quite knowing whether to take him in
    earnest, but being reassured so soon as I looked up into the
    laughing face of my older sister.

Of other romps she also tells at length. Several old acquaintances
speak of his love of children, and of his readiness to enter into the
playfulness of their young lives. He dearly loved all fun of an innocent
sort; perhaps it is because of the contrast with his usual behavior that
so many persons seem to put special emphasis on this feature of his
character.

In those early days Pei-taiho in the north, and Kuling and Mokansan in
the south, had not been opened as summer resorts. Chefoo and Tengchow
were the only places available for such a purpose, and there were in
neither of them any houses to receive guests, unless the missionaries
opened theirs. Tengchow became very popular, on account of the beauty of
its situation, the comparative cleanness of the town, and the proximity
to a fine bathing beach. As a usual thing, if one mentions Tengchow
to any of the old missionaries, the remark is apt promptly to follow:
“Delightful place! I spent a summer there once with Dr. Mateer.”
Pleasant as he made his own home to his little friends, and to veterans
and recruits, he was equally agreeable in the homes of others who could
enter into his spheres of thought and activity. He was often a guest
in the house of Dr. Fitch and his wife at Shanghai, while putting his
books through the press. He was resident for months in the China Inland
Mission Sanitarium, and in the Mission Home at Chefoo. Dr. Fitch and his
wife, and Superintendent Stooke of the Home, tell with evident delight
of his “table talk,” and of other ways by which he won their esteem and
affection.

When the summer guests were flown from Tengchow, the missionaries were
usually the entire foreign community,—a condition of things bringing both
advantages and disadvantages as to their work. On the one hand, the cause
which they represented was not prejudiced by the bad lives of certain
foreigners coming for commercial or other secular purposes from Christian
lands. On the other hand, they were left without things that would have
ministered immensely to their convenience and comfort, and which they
often sadly needed for their own efficiency, and for their health and
even for their lives. This was largely due to the tedious and difficult
means of communication with the outside world. For instance, it was
six weeks until the goods which the Mateers left behind them at Chefoo
were delivered to them at Tengchow. Letters had to be carried back and
forth between Tengchow and Chefoo, the distributing point, by means of
a private courier. When, by and by, the entire band joined together and
hired a carrier to bring the mail once a week, this seemed a tremendous
advance. The cost of a letter to the United States was forty-five cents.

But the most serious of all their wants was competent medical attention.
How Mateer wrote home, and begged and planned, and sometimes almost
scolded, about sending a physician to reinforce their ranks! In the
meantime they used domestic remedies for their own sick, or sent them
overland to Chefoo, or in case of dire necessity brought up a physician
from that city. Mateer soon found himself compelled to attempt what he
could medically and surgically for himself and wife, and also for others,
and among these the poor native sufferers. One of his early cases was
a terribly burnt child whom he succeeded in curing; and another was a
sufferer from lockjaw, who died in spite of all he could do; and still
another case was of a woman with a broken leg. He tried his hand at
pulling a tooth for his associate, Mr. Mills, but he had to abandon the
effort, laying the blame on the miserable forceps with which he had to
operate. Later he could have done a better job, for he provided himself
with a complete set of dental tools, not only for pulling teeth and for
filling them, but also for making artificial sets. All of these he often
used. On his first furlough he attended medical lectures at Philadelphia
and did a good deal of dissection. A closet in the new house held a stock
of medicines, and by administering them he relieved much suffering, and
saved many lives, especially in epidemics of cholera. The physicians
who, in response to the appeals of the missionaries, were first sent to
the station at Tengchow did not remain long; and for many years the most
of the medicine administered came out of the same dark closet under the
stairs of “the New Home.”




VI

HIS INNER LIFE

    “I am very conscious that we here are not up to the standard
    that we ought to be, and this is our sin. We pray continually
    for a baptism from on high on the heathen round us; but we need
    the same for ourselves that we may acquit ourselves as becomes
    our profession. Our circumstances are not favorable to growth
    either in grace or in mental culture. Our only associates are
    the native Christians, whose piety is often of a low type; it
    receives from us, but imparts nothing to us. Mentally we are
    left wholly without the healthy stimulus and the friction of
    various and superior minds which surround men at home. Most
    whom we meet here are mentally greatly our inferiors, and there
    is no public opinion that will operate as a potent stimulus
    to our exertions. It may be said that these are motives of a
    low kind. It may be so; but their all-powerful influence on
    all literary men at home is scarcely known or felt till the
    absence of them shows the difference.”—LETTER TO THE SOCIETY OF
    INQUIRY, IN THE WESTERN THEOLOGICAL SEMINARY, October 1, 1867.


We have now reached a stage in this narration where the order of time can
no longer be followed, except in a very irregular manner. We must take
up distinct phases of Mateer’s life and work, as separate topics, and so
far as practicable consider each by itself. This is not at all because
in him there was any lack of singleness of aim or of persistence. This
man, from the time when he began his labors in China until he finished
his course, without interruption, put his strength and personality
into the evangelization of the people of that great empire. But in
doing this he found it necessary to follow along various lines, often
contemporaneously, though never out of sight of any one of them. For
our purpose it is best that to some extent they should be considered
separately.

But before we proceed further it appears desirable to seek an
acquaintance with his inner life. By this I do not mean his native
abilities, or his outward characteristics as these were known and read by
all men who came much into contact with him. It is from the soul life,
and especially the religious side of it, that it seems desirable to
lift the veil a little. This in the case of anyone is a delicate task,
and ought to be performed with a good deal of reserve. In the instance
now in hand there is special difficulty. Mateer never, either in speech
or in writing, was accustomed to tell others much about his own inward
experiences. For a time in his letters and in his Journal he occasionally
breaks over this reticence a little; but on November 27, 1876, he made
the last entry in the Journal; and long before this he had become so
much occupied with his work that he records very little concerning his
soul life. Still less had he to say on that subject in his letters;
and as years went by, his occupations compelled him to cut off as much
correspondence as practicable, and to fill such as he continued with
other matters. Nothing like completeness consequently is here undertaken
or is possible.

A notion that is current, especially among “men of the world,” is that a
missionary is almost always a sentimental dreamer who ignores the stern
realities of life. It has been my work to train a good many of those who
have given themselves to this form of Christian service, and to have a
close acquaintance with a good many more; and I cannot now recall one of
whom such a characteristic could be honestly affirmed. I have in mind a
number of whom almost the opposite is true. Certainly if to carry the
gospel into the dark places of the earth with the conviction of its
ultimate triumph is to be called dreaming, then every genuine missionary
is a sentimentalist and a dreamer; and Mateer was one of them. But in
meeting the experiences of life and in doing his work, he was about as
far removed from just accusation of this sort as anyone could be. Indeed,
he was such a matter-of-fact man that his best friends often wished that
he were less so. I have carefully gone over many thousands of pages of
his Journal and of his letters and papers, and I recall only one short
paragraph that savors of sentimentality. It is so exceptional that it
shall have a place here. In a letter written to a friend (Julia, I
suspect), in the spring of 1861, he says:

    I have lived in the country nearly all my life, and I much
    prefer its quiet beauty. I love to wander at this season over
    the green fields, and listen to the winds roaring through the
    young leaves, and to sit down in the young sunshine of spring
    under the lee of some sheltering bank or moss-covered rock. I
    love to think of the past and the future, and, thus meditating,
    to gather up courage for the stern realities of life.

This is not very distressingly Wertherian, and surely ought not, ever
after, to be laid up against the young man, the fountain of whose
thoughts may at that season have been unsealed by love.

But we sadly miss the truth if we infer that, because he was so
matter-of-fact in his conduct, he was without tenderness of heart or
depth of feeling. Dr. Goodrich in his memorial article in the “Chinese
Recorder” of January, 1909, says of him:

    I do not remember to have heard him preach, in English or
    Chinese, when his voice did not somewhere tremble and break,
    requiring a few moments for the strong man to conquer his
    emotion and proceed. His tenderness was often shown in quiet
    ways to the poor and unfortunate, and he frequently wept when
    some narrative full of pathos and tears was read. The second
    winter after the Boxer year the college students learned to
    sing the simple but beautiful hymn he had just translated,
    “Some one will enter the Pearly Gate.” One morning we sang the
    hymn at prayers. Just as we were ending, I looked around to see
    if he were pleased with their singing. The tears were streaming
    down his face.

    This sympathetic tenderness was as much a part of his nature as
    was his rugged strength.... He dearly loved little children,
    and easily won their affection. Wee babies would stretch out
    their tiny arms to him, and fearlessly pull his beard, to his
    great delight.

    His students both feared him and loved him, and they loved him
    more than they feared him; for, while he was the terror of
    wrongdoers and idlers, he was yet their Great-heart, ready to
    forgive and quick to help. How often have we seen Dr. Mateer’s
    students in his study, pouring out their hearts to him and
    receiving loving counsel and a father’s blessing! He loved his
    students, and followed them constantly as they went out into
    their life work.

A lady who was present tells that when the first of his “boys” were
ordained to the ministry he was so overcome that the tears coursed down
his cheeks while he charged them to be faithful to their vows.

His mother’s love he repaid with a filial love that must have been to her
a source of measureless satisfaction. Julia could not reasonably have
craved any larger measure of affection than she received from him as her
husband; and later, Ada entered into possession of the same rich gift.
One of the things that touched him most keenly when he went away to China
was his separation from brothers and sisters, toward whom he continued to
stretch out his beneficent hand across the seas.

He was a man who believed in the necessity of regeneration by the Holy
Spirit in order to begin a genuinely Christian life. This is one of those
great convictions which he never questioned, and which strengthened as he
increased in age. When he united with the church in his nineteenth year,
he thereby publicly declared that he was sufficiently sure that this
inward change had passed upon him to warrant him in enrolling himself
among the avowed followers of Christ. But of any sudden outward religious
conversion he was not conscious, and made no profession. In the brief
autobiographical sketch previously quoted he says:

    I had a praying father and mother, and had been faithfully
    taught from my youth. I cannot tell when my religious
    impressions began. They grew up with me, but were very much
    deepened by the faithful preachings of Rev. I. N. Hays, pastor
    of the church of Hunterstown, especially in a series of
    meetings held in the winter of 1852-3.

As to his external moral conduct there was no place for a visible
“conversion”; he had no vicious habits to abandon, no evil companions
from whom to separate himself. It was on the inner life that the
transformation was wrought, but just when or where he could not himself
tell,—an experience which as to this feature has often been duplicated in
the children of godly households.

The impression which I formed of him while associated with him in college
was that he lived uprightly and neglected no duty that he regarded as
obligatory on him. I knew that he went so far beyond this as to be
present at some of the religious associations of the students, such
as the Brainard Society, and a little circle for prayer; and that he
walked a couple of miles into the country on Sabbath morning to teach a
Bible class in the Chartiers church. If I had been questioned closely I
probably would have made a mistake, not unlike that into which in later
years those who did not penetrate beneath the surface of his life may
easily have fallen. I would have said that the chief lack in his piety
was as to the amount of feeling that entered into it. I would have said
that he was an honest, upright Christian; but that he needed to have the
depths of his soul stirred by the forces of religion in order that he
might become what he was capable of, for himself and for others. Possibly
such an expression concerning him at that time of life might not have
been wholly without warrant; but in later years it certainly would have
been a gross misjudgment, and while I was associated with him in college
and seminary it was far less justified than I imagined.

On October 13, 1856, he began the Journal which, with interruptions, he
continued for twenty years. In the very first entry he gives his reasons
for keeping this record, one of which he thus states:

    I will also to some extent record my own thoughts and feelings;
    so that in after years I can look back and see the history of
    my own life and the motives which impelled me in whatever I
    did,—the dark and the bright spots, for it is really the state
    of one’s mind that determines one’s depressions or enjoyments.

He records distinctly that the Journal was written for his own eye alone.
One in reading it is surprised at the freedom with which occasionally
he passes judgment, favorable and unfavorable, on people who meet him
on his way. Concerning himself also he is equally candid. Most that he
has to say of himself relates to his outward activities, but sometimes
he draws aside the veil and reveals the inmost secrets of his soul and
of his religious life. As a result we discover that it was by no means
so calm as we might suppose from looking only at the surface. In this
self-revelation there is not a line that would be improper to publish to
the world. A few selections are all that can be given here. A certain
Saturday preceding the administration of the Lord’s Supper was kept by
himself and other college students as a fast day, and after mentioning an
address to which he had listened, and which strongly appealed to him, he
goes on to say:

    I know that I have not been as faithful as I should. Though
    comparatively a child in my Christian life, as it is little
    more than a year since I was admitted to the church, yet I
    have come to the table of the Lord with my faith obscured, my
    heart cold and lifeless, without proper self-examination and
    prayer to God for the light of his countenance. I have spent
    this evening in looking at my past life and conversation, and
    in prayer to God for pardon and grace to help. My past life
    appears more sinful than it has ever done. My conduct as a
    Christian, indeed, in many things has been inconsistent. Sin
    has often triumphed over me and led me captive at its will. I
    have laid my case before God, and asked him to humble me, and
    prepare me to meet my Saviour aright. O that God would meet me
    at this time, and show me the light of his countenance, and
    give me grace and strength; that for the time to come I might
    lay aside every weight and the sins that do so easily beset me,
    and run with patience the race that is set before me! There
    seems to be some unusual interest manifested by some just
    now; so that I am not without hope that God will bless us and
    perhaps do a glorious work among us. Many prayers have this
    day ascended to God for a blessing, and if we are now left to
    mourn the hidings of God’s face, it will be because of our sins
    and our unbelief. I have endeavored to keep this as a true fast
    day; yet my heart tells me that I have not kept it as I should.
    Sin has been mingled even in my devotions. Yet I am not without
    hope, because there is One whose righteousness is all-perfect,
    whose intercessions are all-prevalent. Blessed be God for his
    unspeakable gift.

The next day, however, among other things, he wrote:

    I think that I have never enjoyed a communion season so
    much.... This day my hopes of heaven have been strengthened,
    and my faith has been increased; and if I know my own heart,
    (O that I knew it better!), I have made a more unreserved
    consecration of myself to God than I have ever done before; and
    may he grant me grace to live more to his glory!

Surely, the young man who thus opens to our view the secrets of his inner
religious life was not lacking seriously in depth of feeling. One is
reminded of the Psalmist’s hart panting after the water brooks.

In the seminary he still had seasons of troubled heart-searching and
unsatisfied longings for a better Christian life. After reading a part of
a book called “The Crucible,” he says:

    I have not enjoyed this Sabbath as I should. My own heart is
    not right, I fear. I am too far from Christ. I am overcome by
    temptation so often, and then my peace is destroyed, and my
    access to a throne of grace is hindered. I am ready to exclaim
    with Paul, “Oh, wretched man that I am, who shall deliver me
    from this body of death!” Would to God I could also say with
    the assurance he did: “I thank God, through our Lord Jesus
    Christ.”

At the same time there is evidence that he was advancing toward a higher
stage of religious experience, and that he was leaving behind him the
elements of repentance and faith, and going on toward “perfection.” He
reads the Life of Richard Williams, the Patagonian missionary, and then
sits down and writes:

    He was a wonderful man; had a wonderful life. His faith
    transcends anything I have ever had. His communion with God
    was constant and joyous, at times rising to such a pitch
    that, in his own words, “he almost imagined himself in
    heaven.” His resignation to God’s will and consecration to his
    service were complete in the highest. In his life and in his
    death is displayed in a marvelous manner the power of God’s
    grace. Reduced almost to the certainty of death by scurvy,
    in a little, uncomfortable barge or float, with scarce any
    provisions, far from all human help, in the midst of storms
    and cold, this devoted man reads God’s Word, prays to him from
    his lowly couch, and deliberately declares that he would not
    exchange places with any man living! What godlike faith! What
    a sublime height to reach in Christian life in this world!
    I am more and more convinced that our enjoyment of God and
    sweet sense of the presence of Christ as well as our success
    in glorifying God depends entirely on the measure of our
    consecration to him, our complete submission of our wills to
    his. My prayer is for grace thus to consecrate and submit
    myself to his will. Then I shall be happy.

I do not think that Mateer had any disposition to follow in the footsteps
of Williams by tempting Providence through doubtful exposure of his life
and health to danger; it was the consecration to the service of God that
he coveted. He seems about this time to have made a distinct advance
in the direction of an increasing desire to give himself up wholly to
the service of his divine Master, and to submit himself entirely to the
will of God. A most severe test of this came to him in the questions of
his duty as to foreign missions. First, it was whether he ought to go
on this errand, and whether he was willing. Nor was it an easy thing
for him to respond affirmatively. He was a strong man, and conscious of
his strength. For him to go to the unevangelized in some distant part
of the world was to put aside almost every “fond ambition” that had
hitherto attracted him in his plans for life. Opportunities to do good
were abundantly open to him in this country. Tender ties bound his heart
to relatives and friends, and the thought of leaving them with little
prospect of meeting them again in this world was full of pain. To go as
a missionary was a far more severe ordeal fifty years ago than it is in
most cases to-day. Bravely and thoroughly, however, he met the issue.
Divine grace was sufficient for him. He offered himself to the Board
and was accepted. Then followed another test of his consecration just as
severe. For a year and a half he had to wait before he ascertained that
after all he was to be sent. There were times when his going seemed to
be hopeless; and he had to learn to bow in submission to what seemed the
divine will, though it almost broke his heart. When, late in 1862, one of
the secretaries told him that unless a way soon opened he had better seek
a permanent field at home, he says in his Journal:

    It seems as if I cannot give it up. I had such strong faith
    that I should yet go.... I had a struggle to make up my mind,
    and now I cannot undo all that work as one might suppose. What
    is it? Why is it, that my most loved and cherished plan should
    be frustrated? God will do right, however; this I know. Help
    me, gracious God, to submit cheerfully to all thy blessed will;
    and if I never see heathen soil, keep within me at home the
    glorious spirit of missions.

It was a severe school of discipline to which he was thus sent, but he
learned his lesson well.

One cannot think it at all strange that under the conditions of the
outward voyage he suffered at times from spiritual depression. November
19, 1863, he made this entry in his Journal:

    Spent the forenoon in prayer and in reading God’s Word, in
    view of my spiritual state. I have felt oppressed with doubts
    and fears for some time, so that I could not enjoy myself
    in spiritual exercises as I should. I have had a flood of
    anxious thoughts about my own condition and my unfitness for
    the missionary work. I began the day very much cast down;
    but, blessed be God, I found peace and joy and assurance in
    Christ. In prayer those expressions in the 86th Psalm, “ready
    to forgive,” and “plenteous in mercy,” were brought home to
    my heart in power. I trust I did and do gladly cast myself
    renewedly on Jesus, my Saviour. Just before dinner time I went
    out on deck to walk and meditate. Presently my attention was
    attracted by Georgie (Mrs. B’s little girl) singing in her
    childish manner the words of the hymn, “He will give you grace
    to conquer.” Over and over again she said it as if singing
    to herself. They were words in season. My heart caught the
    sound gladly, and also repeated it over again and again, “He
    will give you grace to conquer.” I thought of the parallel
    Scripture, “My grace is sufficient for thee.” The Spirit of
    God was in those words, and they were precious. My fears were
    all gone. I was ready to go, in the strength of this word, to
    China, and undertake any work God should appoint. I went to my
    room, and with a full heart thanked God for this consolation.
    Out of the mouth of babes thou hast ordained strength. I am
    glad that I gave this season to special seeking of God; it has
    done me good. Lord, make the influence of it to be felt. I had
    much wandering of mind at first, but God mercifully delivered
    me from this. O, that I could maintain habitually a devotional
    spirit, and live very near to the blessed Jesus!

Though he but dimly understood it then, the Lord was in the school of
experience disciplining him in qualities which in all his subsequent
work he needed to put into exercise: to rest on the promises of God in
darkness, to wait patiently under delays that are disappointing, and to
endure in the spirit of Christ the contradictions of the very sinners for
whose higher welfare he was willing to make any sacrifice, however costly
to himself.

On his field of labor he was too busy with his duties as a missionary
to write down much in regard to his own inner life. Nor is there any
reason to regard this as a thing greatly to be regretted. The fact is
that during the decade which extended from his admission to membership
in the church to his entrance on his work in China, he matured in his
religious experience to such a degree that subsequently, though there was
increasing strength, there were no very striking changes on this side of
his character. In the past he had set before himself, as a mark to be
attained, the thorough consecration of himself to the service of God, and
it was largely because by introspection he recognized how far he fell
short of this that he sometimes had been so much troubled about his own
spiritual condition. Henceforth this consecration, as something already
attained, was constantly put into practice. He perhaps searched himself
less in regard to it; he did his best to live it.

In connection with this, two characteristics of his inner life are so
evident as to demand special notice. One of these was his convictions
as to religious truth. He believed that the Scriptures of the Old and
New Testament are the Word of God, and he was so sure that this is
radically essential in the faith of a missionary that he was not ready
to welcome any recruit who was adrift on this subject. He believed also
with like firmness in the other great evangelical doctrines set forth
in the symbols and theologies of the orthodox churches. His own creed
was Calvinistic and Presbyterian; yet he was no narrow sectarian. He was
eager to coöperate with the missionaries of other denominations than his
own; all that he asked was that they firmly hold to what he conceived to
be the essentials of Christianity. Because he believed them so strongly,
these also were the truths which he continually labored to bring home to
the people. In a memorial published by Dr. Corbett concerning him, he
says:

    Nearly thirty years ago I asked an earnest young man who
    applied for baptism, when he first became interested in the
    truth. He replied: “Since the day I heard Dr. Mateer preach at
    the market near my home, on the great judgment, when everyone
    must give an account to God. His sermon made such an impression
    on my mind that I had no peace until I learned to trust in
    Jesus as my Saviour.” An able Chinese preacher, who was with me
    in the interior, when the news of Dr. Mateer’s death reached
    us, remarked, “I shall never forget the wonderful sermon
    Dr. Mateer preached a few weeks ago in the Chinese church
    at Chefoo, on conscience.” This was the last sermon he was
    permitted to preach. Salvation through faith in the Lord Jesus
    Christ, man’s sinfulness and need of immediate repentance, and
    faith, and the duty of every Christian to live a holy life and
    constantly bear witness for Jesus, were the great truths he
    always emphasized. He died in the faith of the blessed gospel
    he so ably preached for nearly half a century.

Hand in hand with these great convictions went an absolute loyalty to
duty. To this he subordinated everything else. The reason why he toiled
with his own hands, on buildings, on machinery, on apparatus, was not
because he would rather do this than preach Christ, but because he was
convinced that the situation was such that he could not with a good
conscience refuse to perform that labor. It was not his preference to
give long years to the making of the Mandarin version of the Scriptures;
he did it because plainly it was his duty to engage in this wearisome
task. He fought with his pen his long battle for Shen as the word to be
used in Chinese as the name of God; and even when left in a commonly
conceded minority, still refused to yield, only because he believed that
in so doing he was standing up for something that was not only true but
of vital importance to Christianity in China. His unwillingness under
protracted pressure to introduce English into the curriculum of the
Tengchow school and college, the heartbreak with which he saw the changes
made in the institution after its removal to Wei Hsien, were all due not
to obstinancy but to convictions of duty as he saw it.

A man of this sort,—strong in intellect, firm of will, absolutely loyal
to what he conceives to be his duty,—travels a road with serious perils
along its line. A loss of balance may make of him a bigot or a dangerous
fanatic. Even Dr. Mateer had “the defects of his qualities.” He did not
always make sufficient allowance for persons who could not see things
just as he did. He sometimes unwarrantably questioned the rectitude of
others’ conduct when it did not conform to his own conception of what
they ought to have done. But these defects were not serious enough
greatly to mar his usefulness or to spoil the beauty of his character.
His wisdom as a rule, his rectitude, his entire consecration to the
service of God in the work of missions, his wealth of heart, after all,
were so unquestionable that any wounds he inflicted soon healed; and he
was in an exceptional degree esteemed and revered by all who came into
close touch with him.

Was Dr. Mateer a very “spiritually-minded man”? It is not strange that
this question was raised, though rarely, by some one who saw only the
outside of his life, and this at his sterner moments. He even did much
of his private praying when he was walking up and down in his room, or
taking recreation out on the city wall, and when no one but wife or
sister knew what he was doing. One had to be admitted to the inner shrine
of his heart to appreciate the fervor of his piety.




VII

DOING THE WORK OF AN EVANGELIST

    “I have traveled in mule litters, on donkeys, and on foot
    over a large part of the province of Shantung, preaching from
    village to village, on the streets, and by the wayside. Over
    the nearer portions I have gone again and again. My preaching
    tours would aggregate from twelve thousand to fifteen thousand
    miles, including from eight thousand to twelve thousand
    addresses to the heathen.”—AUTOBIOGRAPHICAL SKETCH, 1897.


The first thing which Mateer set himself to do, after he arrived at
Tengchow, was to acquire the language of the people. The difficulties
which the Chinese tongue presents to the foreigner are too well known
to need recital here, nor was it easier to Mateer than to other persons
possessed of good ability and thorough education. In January, 1902, at
the request of Secretary Speer, he prepared for the use of the Board
of Missions a paper on the subject of “Missionaries and the Language.”
In it he does not profess to be telling his own experience, and yet it
is largely an exhibit of what he had himself done. In the introductory
paragraph he says:

    One of the tasks, and to many one of the trials, of missionary
    life, is the learning of a new, and often a difficult language.
    So far as the message of the gospel is concerned, the tongue is
    tied until the language is learned. I set it down as a first
    principle, that every missionary should go out with a distinct
    and fixed determination to learn the language and to learn
    it well. Let there be no shrinking from it, no half measures
    with it. Laxity of this purpose in this matter is unworthy
    of anyone who is called to be a missionary. When I hear a
    young missionary, after a few weeks or months on the field,
    saying, “I hate this language; who can learn such outlandish
    gibberish as this?” my opinion of his fitness for the work at
    once suffers a heavy discount. Every young missionary should
    consider it his or her special business to fall in love with
    the language as quickly as possible.

Then he proceeds to lay down certain general principles and thoroughly to
elaborate them; insisting that everyone can learn the tongue of a people,
not merely well enough to make some sort of stagger at the use of it, but
thoroughly; and giving directions as to the best method of accomplishing
this result. At the same time he recognizes the fact that by no means
all missionaries are able to acquire the language so perfectly that they
are competent to contribute to the permanent Christian literature of the
country.

In his case there were exceptional difficulties as to this preliminary
work. Printed helps were few and not very good. Competent native teachers
were almost impossible to obtain at Tengchow, and were liable at any time
to abandon their work. Besides, so long as the Mateers were hampered by
their narrow quarters, along with other missionaries, in the old temple,
and while he was compelled to give almost the whole of his strength to
the repairs and construction of buildings, for him to accomplish what
he otherwise might have done in this line was impossible. Under date of
December 24, 1864, almost a year after his arrival at Tengchow, he wrote
in his Journal:

    I have been studying pretty regularly this week, yet to look
    back over it, I cannot see that I have accomplished much.
    Learning Chinese is slow work. I do not wonder that the Chinese
    have never made great advances in learning. It is such a
    herculean task to get the language that a man’s best energies
    are gone by the time he has himself prepared to work. It is as
    if a mechanic should spend half his life, or more, in getting
    his tools ready. Before I came to China I feared that I would
    have trouble acquiring the language, and I find my fears were
    well grounded.

This confession is very notable, coming as it does from the pen of him
who subsequently, as one of his associates said after his death, “became
not only the prince of Mandarin speakers among foreigners in China, but
also so grasped the principles of the language as to enable him in future
years to issue the most thoroughgoing and complete work on the language,
the most generally used text-book for all students of the spoken tongue”;
and it may be added, who was selected by the missionaries of all China,
in conference, to be chairman of the committee to revise the Mandarin
version of the Scriptures, and who in all that work was easily the chief.
The diligence with which he improved every spare moment in the study of
the language is shown by a letter of Mrs. Julia Mateer, in which she
writes of reading aloud to her husband in the evening while he practiced
writing Chinese characters.

Really he was making better progress than probably he himself imagined.
On January 14, 1865, he began to go regularly into the school, to teach
the children a phonetic method of writing the Chinese characters. He
records that on February 7 he took charge of the morning prayers, and
adds:

    It seemed very strange indeed to me to pray in Chinese, and no
    less awkward than strange. I found, however, less embarrassment
    in doing it than I at first supposed. I might easily have begun
    some time ago, but our school-teacher performs the duty very
    acceptably, and so I left the matter to him until I was fully
    prepared. I trust that it will not be long till I will be at
    home in using Chinese.

Tengchow is the seat of one of the competitive literary examinations for
students, and at the season when these are held thousands of candidates
present themselves. Under date of March 11, of that year, he says:

    A goodly number of the scholars have come to see me, to get
    books and to hear “the doctrine.” I have had opportunity
    to do considerable preaching, which I have not failed to
    embrace. Some of them understood me quite well. I find a great
    difference between talking to them and to the illiterate
    people. They understand me a great deal better. Most of
    them listen with attention, and some of them with evident
    interest. They all treated me with respect. I gave them books;
    they promising to read them, and to come again at the next
    examination.

These occasions continued to offer like opportunity in succeeding
years, and he took all the advantage of it that he could. Only rarely
did students give him any cause for annoyance. On May 22 he went to a
fair that was held just outside one of the gates, and tried his hand at
preaching to that miscellaneous audience in the open air. In the forenoon
he talked himself tired, and returned in the afternoon to repeat the
effort, but with what effect he could not tell. Rain came on and he
had to stop. He added in his Journal, “Oh, how I wish that I could use
Chinese as I can English,—then I could preach with some comfort!” On
Sabbath, June 19, he preached his first sermon before the little Chinese
church organized at Tengchow. The notice he had was short, Mills having
been taken ill, and sending him word that he must fill the pulpit. He
says: “I could not prepare a sermon, and translate it carefully and
accurately. I had just to get ready some phrases, and statements of the
main points, and depend on my Chinese for the rest. I got on better
than I expected I should, though to me at least it seemed poor enough.”
We need not follow the process of his acquisition of the language any
further, except to say that he never ceased to study it, and to seek to
improve in it, although he came by and by to be able to use it, in both
speaking and writing, so well that the Chinese often took more pleasure
in hearing and reading his productions than if he had been a native.

As the senior missionary, Mills had charge of the church organized at
Tengchow, and any preaching that Mateer did in it was occasional. It
was not long before a movement was organized for evangelistic work on
the streets, and he gladly took part in that method of work. He was
anxious also to obtain a room which he could use as a chapel. His first
efforts to secure such a building were rendered futile on account of
the intense opposition of the people, and the disinclination, or worse,
of the officials to enforce his legal rights in this matter, under the
treaty. It was not until the middle of April, 1867, that he succeeded in
opening a room where he and his Chinese assistant could have a regular
place for preaching and selling books. It stood on a principal street,
and was, therefore, as to location, well suited for the work to which it
was set apart. The opening of it was the occasion for the gathering of
a crowd of rowdies who threw stones at the doors, and otherwise created
disturbance; but prompt arrest of the ringleader and the haling of him
before a magistrate brought the rowdyism to a close. Of course, the
school afforded another local opportunity for evangelization, and it was
from the very first effectually employed.

Tengchow itself was not very responsive to the gospel. The demand for
books was soon satisfied to such an extent that sales became small.
The novelty of street preaching and of the chapel services gradually
was exhausted. The little church did not attract many on the Sabbath,
except the regular attendants. True, a city of so many inhabitants
might seem—notwithstanding such limitations as existed—a sufficient
field for all the labor that could be put upon it by the little band of
missionaries located there. But beyond the walls was all the rest of the
province of Shantung, with none to evangelize it save the missionaries at
Chefoo and Tengchow. That province is in area about one-third larger than
the State of Pennsylvania; and it now has somewhere in the neighborhood
of thirty millions of inhabitants, mostly scattered in innumerable
villages, though frequently also concentrated in cities. The climate is
about that of Kentucky, and the productions of the soil are not very
different. Part of the surface of the country is hilly and some of it
rises into mountains of moderate height; but most of it is level or
slightly rolling. Writing to one of the secretaries of the Board, under
date of May 10, 1869, Mateer thus expressed himself as to the strategic
importance of Shantung in the tremendous enterprise of evangelizing China:

    I think it is almost universally admitted that Tsinan fu [the
    capital, situated about three hundred miles southwest of
    Tengchow] offers the most promising field for missionary effort
    in China. The region in which this city lies is the religious
    center of China. Here both the great sages of China, Confucius
    and Mencius, were born. At Tai An, a short way to the south,
    the great religious festival of China is held, and there are
    unmistakable evidences that there is a religious element in the
    people of this province found nowhere else in China. I feel
    like saying with all my might, Let the Presbyterian Church
    strike for this province. It has given both religion and
    government to China in the ages that are past, and it is going
    to give Christianity to China in the future.

These pioneer missionaries in Shantung as promptly as possible sought,
first by itineration, and later by opening new stations, to carry the
gospel far and wide over the province. In this they labored under one
serious inconvenience from which their brethren in much of south China
are exempt. Down there it is easy to travel extensively on the rivers
and the numerous canals. In Shantung the one great river is the Hoang,
or Yellow, running from the west toward the east; and the one important
canal is the Grand, running north and south; and both of these are so
far remote from Chefoo and Tengchow that in the itineration of the
missionaries from these places they were of little use. As a consequence
they had to adopt the other methods of travel customary in that region.
Even to-day, though a railway runs from the coast at Kiaochou, across
Shantung to Tsinan fu, and another across the west end of the province
and passing through Tsinan fu is almost completed, much of the territory
is no more accessible than half a century ago. The traveler can hire a
mule, or more probably a donkey, and—throwing his bedding across the
packsaddle—make his way, with the owner of the animal running along as
driver, to the place where, if he proceeds farther, he must hire a second
mule or donkey; and so on to the end of his journey. One can also travel
by wheelbarrow. These conveyances are considered to be quite genteel,
and are much patronized by Chinese women. The wheels are big and clumsy,
and, being innocent of oil, creak fearfully, and as the wheelbarrows
are without springs the passenger is jolted excruciatingly. They are
propelled by a man pushing by the handles, and often with the aid of
another, and sometimes a donkey in front, and it may be with a sail
to catch the wind. In the hilly regions the shentza, or mule litter,
is common. In describing this conveyance Mateer said in one of his
Sunday-school letters:

    The motion is various and peculiar. Sometimes the mules step
    together, and sometimes they don’t. Now you have a plunging
    motion like the shaking of a pepper box, then comes a waving
    motion like the shaking of a sieve; and then a rolling motion
    like the rocking of a cradle, and then by turns these various
    motions mix up and modify each other in endless variety. I
    have often thought that if a man had a stiff joint, one of
    these shentzas would be a good thing to shake it loose. You
    are completely at the mercy of these two mules. If you are
    sitting up you think that you would be more comfortable lying
    down, and if you are lying down you think that you would be
    more comfortable sitting up. There is no relief from incessant
    shaking but to get out and walk.

The most genteel mode of travel is a two-wheeled cart, provided always
that the track called a road is wide and level enough to permit it to be
used. I fall back on the Sunday-school letter for a description of it:

    A Chinese cart is heavy and clumsy to the last degree. It has
    no springs, no seat, no cushions, and is only wide enough for
    one to sit in it. The only way to keep your arms and head from
    being broken by the top, is to wedge yourself in with quilts
    and pillows. Passenger carts are usually drawn by two mules,
    one in the shafts and the other directly in front, hitched by
    two long ropes to the axle—one passing on each side of the
    shaft mule. The driver either walks, or rides on the back part
    of the shafts.... I took one ride in one of these big carts,
    which I shall remember while I live. We had all gone to a
    country station, one hundred and twenty miles from Tengchow, to
    a meeting of Presbytery. After Presbytery we wished to go on
    to another station forty miles distant. There had been a great
    rain, and the ground was soft, and we could get no conveyance.
    At length we got a big cart to carry our luggage and Dr. Mills
    and myself. For it they rigged up a top made of sticks and
    pieces of matting. The team consisted of a mule, a horse, and
    two oxen, with two drivers. Mrs. Mateer had a donkey to ride,
    and Mrs. Capp had a sedan chair. Dr. Mills and myself took
    turns in walking with the native elder and assistant. When we
    got all our effects, bedding, cooking utensils and so forth, in
    the cart there was only room for one to sit, and the other had
    to lie down. The first day we dragged through the soft earth
    fifteen miles, but in order to do it we had to travel an hour
    after night. It was pitch dark and we had no lantern. We came
    very near losing our way, and finally had no small trouble in
    reaching an inn, and when we did reach it what a fuss there
    was before we got stowed in and got our suppers! We obtained
    a small room for the ladies, but Dr. Mills and I did not fare
    so well. We had to sleep on the ground in a sort of shed which
    had no doors. The next day we got an early start, and found
    the roads a little better, and managed to make the other
    twenty-five miles. During the day we crossed a sandy river
    which was swollen by the rains, and there was some danger that
    we might stick fast in the sand. The native assistant crowded
    into the cart. The elder put one foot on the end of the axle,
    which in a Chinese cart projects several inches beyond the hub,
    and supported himself by holding on to the side of the cart.
    The second driver perched himself in the same way on the other
    end of the axle. The chief driver stood erect on the shafts,
    astride of the shaft mule. He flourished his whip with one hand
    and gesticulated with the other, and both drivers hurrahed at
    the top of their voices. The team got excited, and with heads
    and tails erect,—with a splash and a dash,—we went safely
    through.

There is one other mode of travel, and perhaps then still the most common
of all, even with missionaries when itinerating, and that is to walk.
When the traveler on foot comes to a river if he has long patience he
may be ferried across; but if the stream is not very deep he may have to
wade. Mateer, however, had a good strong physique and simple tastes, and
was entirely free from any disposition to fret over small annoyances.
In those earlier itinerating days he cheerfully took his full share in
roughing it with other missionaries out in the province. He repeatedly
took trips when all the provision he made for eating was a spoon and a
saltcellar; the food he ate was such as he got at the inns and from place
to place. His experiences in this line of evangelistic efforts had an
important influence on his work in the school and the college. Certainly
it was a great help toward that remarkable acquaintance with colloquial
Chinese which is shown in his literary labors.

His first trip to the country was made on October 14, 1864, and therefore
before he had learned the language sufficiently to enable him to do much
missionary work. In reality it was just a visit by the entire foreign
force stationed by both the Baptists and Presbyterians at Tengchow out
to a Chinese Christian residing ten miles away. In a measure, however,
it was a typical journey. The roads were execrably bad, and Mateer and
another missionary had one mule between them, so that each walked half
the way. On August 22 of the ensuing year he, and Corbett,—who had come
up for the purpose,—started on a genuine itinerating tour. It was in
one particular an unfavorable time. A Chinese inn at any season is apt
to be uncomfortable enough to a person who has been accustomed to the
conveniences and comforts of western civilization. In the Sunday-school
letter already quoted Mateer said:

    The inns in China are various in size, but similar in style.
    You enter through a wide doorway which is in fact the middle
    of a long, low house fronting on the street. On the one side
    of this door, or passageway, is the kitchen, which is usually
    furnished with one or two kettles, a large water jar, and a few
    dishes, with a meat-chopper and chopping block. Usually there
    is a little room partitioned off at the far end, which serves
    for office and storeroom. On the other side is a wide, raised
    platform about two feet high, made of mud brick. It answers
    for the muleteers and humbler guests, to sleep on. Inside of
    this front building is a court or yard with a long shed at
    one or both sides, and troughs for feeding mules and donkeys.
    At the further end of this court, and sometimes at one side,
    are rooms for guests. These rooms contain no furniture but a
    table and a bench or two, and sometimes a chair, with a rough
    board bedstead, or a raised brick platform to take the place
    of a bedstead. No towel, soap, or other toilet necessaries are
    furnished. They usually have one washbasin, which is passed
    round, and is used besides for washing the sore backs of mules,
    and for such other necessary uses. There are no stoves or other
    means of warming the rooms. Sometimes they build a fire of
    straw under those brick bedsteads, which invariably fills the
    room with smoke. Or, you can order a pan of charcoal, which
    will fill the room with gas. The houses are all one story and
    have no ceiling. The rafters are smoked as black as ink, and
    are always festooned with cobwebs. The rooms never have wooden
    floors. In the more stylish inns the floors are paved with
    brick, but in ordinary inns the floors are simply the ground.
    In the summer fleas and mosquitoes are superabundant, and they
    attack all comers without respect of persons. Every night
    there is in the courtyard a musical concert which continues at
    intervals till morning, and is free to all the guests. The
    tune is carried by the mules and donkeys, and the scolding and
    swearing of the muleteers make up the accompaniment. Voices
    of great excellence are often heard in America, but for real
    pathos and soul-stirring effect there is nothing like a dozen
    or two Chinese donkeys, when they strike in together and vie
    with each other for the preëminence. No common table is set,
    but meals are prepared to order and served to guests in their
    rooms. They are generally charged for by the dish.

Unfortunately Mateer and Corbett had selected for their first itineration
a time of year when the mosquitoes and fleas and other vermin are at
their worst, and they suffered accordingly.

They were gone just four weeks; and during that period they traveled two
hundred and twenty-five miles. Much of the time it rained. At Laichow
fu for this cause they were detained a week; and they had to lodge in a
room whose roof leaked so badly that they had to protect themselves with
oilcloths and umbrellas. The water was three feet deep on the floor.
One day they crossed twenty-two streams, none of them large, and yet
often of such a character as to render passage very troublesome. For a
while they had a shentza borne by a couple of crowbait mules, one of
which was blind and had the trick of suddenly lying down for a rest, and
occasionally fell flat into a mudhole, or tumbled its rider over a steep
bank. They met with a variety of treatment from the people, but mostly
it was not unfavorable to the prosecution of their work. Foreigners were
still a curiosity in the region, and that often attracted a crowd to
see them, and to ascertain by hearing and by reading what might be the
nature of the Christian doctrine. Once it became necessary for Mateer to
use force to repel a man who persistently tried to seize a book. Each of
the missionaries preached about forty times, and at all sorts of places.
Their largest evident success was in disposing of books; these for the
most part by sale, the total of pages distributed amounting to two
hundred and seventy-seven thousand. The details of the tour are given in
Mateer’s Journal. If preserved, they will one day be of extreme interest
to the Christians of China, as records of the very beginnings of the
teaching of the gospel in Shantung.

Again, the next spring Mateer and Corbett, accompanied by Chinese
assistants, went on another tour of preaching and of book-selling. Mateer
left Tengchow on April 5, and reached home on May 19. They started with
twenty-eight boxes of books, each weighing about seventy pounds; and,
because they had exhausted the supply, they had to turn back before
reaching the place to which they had originally intended to go. One of
the noteworthy things in their itinerary is that it brought them for
the first time to Wei Hsien, now one of the largest of the Presbyterian
mission stations in north China, and the site of the College of Arts of
the Shantung University; and to Tsingchow fu, the site of the Theological
College. In both towns the Presbyterians and the Baptists are united.
All that Mateer said in his Journal concerning Wei Hsien is:

    We did not go through the city, except the suburbs. The streets
    were full of people, and they were not sparing in their
    expressions of enmity and contempt. We saw a great number of
    elegant memorial arches near Wei Hsien and learned that it is
    a very wealthy place. This was indicated by the many elegant
    burying grounds around it, and by the good condition of the
    walls. The country all around, and indeed most we passed
    through to-day, was very rich. A man on the road who appeared
    to know told us that one individual, the richest in the city,
    was worth three million taels [then more than as many million
    dollars].

Tsingchow fu receives from him a much more extended notice. He speaks
of the city—although very much smaller than evidently it once had
been—as still large and filled with business. The surrounding country
wins from him great admiration. Indeed, at several places he was much
attracted by the prospect which spread itself out before his eyes; and
some of it reminded him even of the natural scenery of his “Old Home” in
Pennsylvania. Of course, it must not be supposed that all the region they
traversed was the equal of this; much of it was far less attractive in
almost every particular.

On this journey they had a great variety of experiences, some of them far
enough from pleasant. Nearly everywhere they went, curiosity attracted
crowds of adults and of children. This seems to have been especially true
in the neighborhood of Wei Hsien and Tsingchow fu. At the inns where
they stopped, privacy was almost impossible; the people peering in at
the windows and bolting into the room they occupied. Sometimes they were
compelled to expel the intruders with a dash of water or with an uplifted
cane. Harder to bear were the opprobrious epithets applied to them.
Mateer said:

    Every village I come to, the term, “devil!” “devil!” comes
    ringing in my ears. Not that they always called it at me,
    but to one another, to come and see. Frequently, however, it
    was called out most spitefully, for me to hear. I think that
    within the last two days I have heard it from at least ten
    thousand mouths. It is strange how such a term could have
    gotten such universal currency. It expresses not so much hatred
    to the gospel as it does the national enmity of the Chinese to
    foreigners.

Happily at the present time foreigners are seldom saluted by this
epithet. At Chang Tsau they had two serious disturbances. The first
was caused by some sort of soothsayer, in whom the people had much
confidence. While Mateer was surrounded by a crowd of men to whom he was
selling books, in rushed this man, brandishing an ugly looking spear;
and, using the Chinese expression of rage, “Ah! Ah! I’ll kill you!” he
drove the spear straight at Mateer’s breast. In those early days of his
missionary work Mateer carried a revolver for self-defense when going to
places where he might be attacked, believing that he had a moral right to
protect himself from assault by evil-minded persons. On this occasion
the revolver was drawn instantly. As the man came closer Mateer seized
the spear, and warned the intruder of the consequences if he advanced a
step farther. The risk was too great for the courage of the soothsayer,
and he went away crestfallen, but cursing the missionary, threatening
to return and kill him, and launching his anathemas against anybody who
bought the books. After the disturbance the people were not so eager to
buy, and an official tried to induce Mateer to cease his efforts, but,
partly to show the futility of such interruptions, he continued, until at
length weariness compelled him to stop.

The other incident occurred in connection with the selling of books
at a market. A man took advantage of a moment when the missionary
was receiving pay from a purchaser, and snatched away a book, but
Mateer seized and held him until the book was restored. This led to an
altercation between the Chinese assistant and the thief, and blows were
struck. The disturbance began to spread, and several of the crowd seemed
disposed to lay hands on Mateer, when a significant reference to the
revolver brought the movement to a prompt termination. In order to show
the people that the missionaries were doing only what is lawful under the
treaty, and that they would not put up with insult or wrong, they sought
satisfaction through the official having jurisdiction, and warned him
that the case would be brought to the notice of the American consul at
Chefoo.

There is no record of any itineration again until the latter part of
February, 1869. That trip was not long in duration or very extensive in
its territory. Julia and her sister Maggie accompanied Dr. Mateer and
were able to reach large numbers of women with the gospel. July 21 of
the same year he and Julia went on a tour of twelve weeks, their main
objective being Chow Yuen, where Miao, a zealous young convert, was
opening a chapel. The story as to him can most appropriately be told in
another chapter.

On November 10 of the same year Dr. Mateer and Julia began a journey
which lasted twenty-four days, during which they traveled about two
hundred and fifty miles, some of the road being very hilly and rough, and
the weather cold. Their course was directed to certain localities where
there were converts, and where a beginning had been made by these native
Christians to give the gospel to their neighbors. One of these places was
Laichow fu, at which two of these had been spreading the light around
them, one of them having given a commodious chapel, with a guest room
attached, in which the Mateers lodged. During a stay of three days they
preached to large numbers; and especially on the last day all opposition
was swept away, and men and women came in crowds. In a village in the
district of Ping Tu they conducted service in a little chapel on the
Sabbath. In a letter to one of the secretaries of the Board he said:

    The chapel was so crowded that we were barely able to have any
    regular service for the benefit of the native Christians. We
    had finally to postpone our principal service till after night.
    I baptized five, the four who had previously been accepted,
    and one other who, though not very well instructed, was so
    earnest in his profession of faith that we did not feel that
    it would be right to refuse him. After this the Lord’s Supper
    was administered. The circumstances made it one of the most
    interesting services of the kind I have ever been privileged
    to conduct. At the farthest point at which the gospel has yet
    got a foothold, in a house set apart by a native Christian for
    the worship of the true God, the majority of the company having
    never before participated in such a service, the circumstances
    were altogether such as to make the occasion one long to be
    remembered.

On February 13, 1873, he and Crossett began a tour that lasted about
three months and carried them far into the interior of Shantung. They
traveled in all about a thousand miles, and preached and sold books in
over a hundred cities and towns. Once a man threatened Mateer with a
manure fork, and once he was struck by a stone thrown in a crowd by some
unknown miscreant. The usual epithet for foreigners saluted them; but,
on the whole, they escaped any serious molestation. On this trip they
visited Tai An, the great temple, and the sacred mountain, and ascended
the steps to its summit. For a week they remained preaching in the
temple to the crowds. They also went to the tomb of Confucius, and to
the magnificent temple dedicated to the sage, in that neighborhood. At
that date not many foreigners had seen these Chinese shrines; but now
they have been so often described that it would scarcely be justifiable
to cite the full and interesting record made by Mateer in his Journal as
to what he saw and did at these places. Thence they proceeded as far as
the capital, Tsinan fu, where Mateer remained for eighteen days, while
Crossett went on a journey still a couple of hundred miles farther to the
north and west, in company with an agent of the Scottish Bible Society,
which had been canvassing the province for six or eight years. At the
close of this tour they regarded the work of book-selling for most of
Shantung as so far completed as henceforth to deserve a more subordinate
place. During part of his stay at the capital Mateer preached and sold
books, and part of the time he remained in his hired lodgings to receive
visitors, of whom he had not a few. To him one of the interesting sights
was the Yellow River. On their return journey they took in Tsingchow fu,
and also Ping Tu, where the Christians then were terrified by persecution.

After this he made only one more exclusively evangelistic itineration.
The care of the infant churches and other duties called him to continue
to go longer and shorter distances from home; and in connection with
this he did a great deal of preaching here and there by the way. For
instance, in 1881 he attended a meeting of the Mission at Tsinan fu,
and incidentally he preached in a hundred and sixty-three villages. It
was travel for the specific purpose of carrying the gospel into wholly
unevangelized regions that he ceased to perform. In a friendly letter
written to his cousin, Mrs. Gilchrist, as early as June 28, 1875, he said:

    The first years I was in China I traveled a good deal, and
    preached and sold books in the streets. I have not done so much
    of it the last two or three years, having been more closely
    engaged in my school. The younger men in the mission have been
    doing it chiefly. I am preparing a number of books for the
    press, and this has taken a good deal of time, and will take
    time in the future.

That final evangelistic itineration was made in 1878, and lasted from
the middle of October to the middle of November. It was out toward the
general region of Ping Tu and Laichow fu. The party consisted of Mateer
and Mills, Mrs. Mateer and Mrs. Shaw, and a couple of Chinese assistants.
Mrs. Mateer and Mrs. Shaw visited the native Christians while the men
went to districts where there were no churches. In a letter to the Board
Mateer said:

    We each hired a donkey to carry our bedding and books, while we
    walked from village to village, and preached in the streets. I
    preached in this way in one hundred and ninety villages, and
    Mr. Mills in about as many. We went aside from the great roads
    into villages never before visited by any foreign missionary.
    We had audiences of from eight or ten, up to two or three
    hundred. In many cases we had a goodly proportion of women as
    hearers. Our reception was very various, for which in most
    cases we have no means of accounting. In some cases many came
    out to see and hear us. In other cases no one seemed inclined
    to pay any attention to us, and a considerable time would
    elapse before we would succeed in drawing a company to preach
    to. In one village I failed entirely to get anyone to listen. A
    goodly number saw us, but they passed by without stopping. One
    boy ventured to ask where we came from, when instantly a man
    near by at work reproved him for speaking to us. My assistant
    and I sat and waited about half an hour, and then went on to
    the next village. We carried a few books in our hands as a
    sort of advertisement of our business, and to give to such as
    would accept them. Sometimes the books were readily accepted,
    and we could have given away any number; but frequently not
    a soul would accept a book. No doubt some would have liked
    very well to have a book, but they were ashamed to accept it
    from the hated foreigner in the presence of so many of their
    neighbors and acquaintances. Only in two or three cases was any
    open hostility shown us, and in these it was confined to two
    or three individuals who failed to carry the crowd with them,
    so that in spite of their attempts to scatter our audience we
    still had plenty of hearers.

Then as to the value of this kind of missionary effort he added an
estimate from which he never deviated, and which in substance he
continued to repeat:

    This method of work is very excellent, and at the same time
    very laborious. It reaches obscure places, and a class of
    people—those who stay at home—not otherwise reached. To be
    successful it must be pursued at a time of year when the people
    are somewhat at leisure.




VIII

THE TENGCHOW SCHOOL

    “The object of mission schools I take to be the education of
    native pupils, mentally, morally, and religiously, not only
    that they may be converted, but that, being converted, they may
    become effective agents in the hand of God for defending the
    cause of truth. Schools also which give a knowledge of western
    science and civilization cannot fail to do great good both
    physically and socially.”—THE RELATION OF PROTESTANT MISSIONS
    TO EDUCATION; a paper read before the Shanghai Missionary
    Conference of 1877.


The Tengchow School in 1884 was authorized by the Board of Missions
to call itself a college. For several years previous to that date it
deserved the name because of the work which it was doing in its advanced
department. On the other hand, it did not cease at that time to maintain
instruction of an elementary and intermediate grade. In the present
chapter we will for convenience confine our attention mainly to the
twenty years lying between the opening of the school and the formal
assumption of the name of a college. Beyond the end of that period lies
the story of the institution under the title of the Shantung College, for
another twenty years at Tengchow; and since then, of the Shantung Union
College, at Wei Hsien.

Under date of April 2, 1864,—less than three months after the Mateers
arrived at Tengchow,—Dr. Mateer made this entry in his Journal, “We
have it in prospect to establish a school.” Their plan at that time was
to leave the Mills family in possession of the old Kwan Yin temple,
and to find for themselves another house where they could reside and
carry on this new enterprise. But when, during the latter part of that
summer, they were left in sole possession of the temple, they proceeded
at once so to fit up some of the smaller buildings in the court as to
make it possible to accommodate the little school. In September the
first term opened, with six little heathen boys, not one of whom had
ever been to school before; and with quarters consisting of two sleeping
rooms, a kitchen, and a small room for teaching. Chang, who was Mateer’s
instructor in Chinese, was set to work also to teach these boys; and a
native woman was put in charge of the cooking department. To Julia he
always attributed the initiation of this entire work. For the first ten
years the school was almost entirely hers, he being otherwise at work. In
a conversation with Mrs. Fitch, of Shanghai, many years later he said:

    When Julia began the boarding school for boys in Tengchow I
    thought it a comparatively small work; but as it enlarged, and
    also deepened, in its influence, I saw it was too much for her
    strength alone. I knew that we must put our own characters into
    those boys, and I could do nothing less than give myself to the
    work she had so begun.

Almost half a century ago, when the school was started, and for some
time afterward, mission boards and missionaries had not settled down
into their present attitude toward education, lower or higher, as an
agency in the evangelization of the non-Christian world. There were some
very earnest and intelligent workers who insisted that for an ordained
minister to engage in teaching a school was for him to be untrue to the
calling for which he had been set apart. To sustain their position they
appealed to apostolic example, and pointed to the small results as to
conversions in the instances in which this method had been tried. Among
the advocates of schools also there was a lack of agreement as to the
immediate object to be sought by the use of this agency. Ought it to be
so much the conversion of the pupils, and through this the raising up of
a native ministry, that all other results should be regarded as of small
importance? Or, ought the school to be looked upon as an efficient means
of preparing the soil for the good seed of Christian truth to be sown
later by preaching the gospel? In the paper from which the quotation at
the head of this chapter is taken Mateer ably and fully discussed all
of these questions, bringing out fairly both sides of them, and then
presented his own convictions as he held them from the beginning of his
missionary career, and as he unswervingly adhered to them all the rest of
his life. He disclaimed any intention to exalt education as a missionary
agency above other instrumentalities, and especially not above preaching
the gospel; and claimed for it only its legitimate place. As to this he
laid down and elaborated certain great principles involved in the nature
of the case and verified by experience. Education, he said, is important
in order to provide an effective and reliable ministry; to furnish
teachers for Christian schools, and through them to introduce into China
the superior education of the West; to prepare men to take the lead in
introducing into China the science and arts of western civilization,
as the best means of gaining access to the higher classes in China, of
giving to the native church self-reliance, and of fortifying her against
the encroachments of superstition from within and the attacks of educated
skepticism from without. On the last of these propositions he enlarged
with wise foresight:

    So long as all the Christian literature of China is the
    work of foreigners, so long will the Chinese church be weak
    and dependent. She needs as rapidly as possible a class of
    ministers with well-trained and well-furnished minds, who will
    be able to write books, defending and enforcing the doctrines
    of Christianity, and applying them to the circumstances of
    the church in China.... Again, as native Christians increase
    in numbers, and spread into the interior, they will pass
    more and more from under the direct teaching and control of
    foreigners. Then will arise danger from the encroachment of
    heathen superstition, and from the baneful influence of the
    Chinese classics. Superstitions of all kinds find a congenial
    soil in the human heart, and they often change their forms
    without changing their nature. The multiform superstitions
    of China will not die easily; and unless they are constantly
    resisted and ferreted out and exposed, they will commingle
    with Christianity and defile it.... The day is not distant
    when the skepticism of the West will find its way into China.
    The day when it shall be rampant is not so distant as might be
    supposed. Error is generally as fleet-footed as truth. To repel
    these attacks, and vindicate the truth in the face of heathen
    unbelief, will require a high order of education. An uneducated
    Christianity may hold its own against an uneducated heathenism,
    but it cannot against an educated heathenism. We want, in a
    word, to do more than introduce naked Christianity into China,
    we want to introduce it in such a form, and with such weapons
    and supports, as will enable it to go forward alone, maintain
    its own purity, and defend itself from all foes.

In view of these ideals with regard to the object of such schools, he
concluded his paper by urging that they should be of an advanced grade
rather than primary, though not excluding the primary; that the natural
sciences should be made prominent in the instruction; and that the pupils
should be of Christian parentage, rather than of heathen. His prophecy as
to skeptical books from the West is already in process of fulfillment.

It needs to be recognized that the substance of all this was in his
mind when he opened that little elementary school. But he had to begin
with something that fell almost pitifully short of his ideal. The first
thing that was necessary was to secure a few pupils under conditions
that made it worth while, in view of his object, to teach them. One of
these conditions was that the parents of the boys should formally bind
themselves to leave them in the school six or seven years, so that they
might finish the studies prescribed. Otherwise they would stay only as
long as suited them or their parents, and they would all the while be
exposed to heathen influences that likely would nullify the Christian
instruction received. On the other hand, this arrangement made it
necessary for the school to furnish gratuitously not only the buildings
and the teachers, but the food and lodging and clothes of the pupils.
Gradually this was so far modified that the parents provided their
clothes and bedding and books. To meet the running expenses of the school
the average cost of each pupil was ascertained, and an effort was made
to secure from Sabbath schools in the United Stales a contribution of
that amount. The plan of designating a particular boy for support by a
particular Sabbath school was suggested from home for consideration, but
was discouraged, on the ground that it might often prove disappointing,
through the uncertainties as to the conduct of the boy; and it was
rarely, if at all, practiced. In order to secure these contributions each
year a letter had to be carefully prepared, and then duplicated, at first
by hand, and later by lithographing process, and sent to the Sabbath
schools that shared in giving for this purpose. These letters were of a
very high order, taking for the theme of each some important phase of
Chinese life and manners or of mission work. They might to advantage
have been gathered into a volume; and if this had been done, it would
be entitled to rank with books of the very best kind on the same general
subject. The preparation of these letters and their multiplication and
distribution cost very considerable time and labor; to lighten this for
her husband, Julia rendered valuable assistance, even to the extent
eventually of taking upon herself the entire work, except the printing.

The average expense of a boy was at first estimated at forty dollars, but
with the rise of prices as the years went by, this estimate had to be
raised. The scheme worked well enough to enable the school not only to go
on, but gradually to increase its numbers as other events opened the way.
Nor was there any difficulty in obtaining all the pupils that could be
accommodated. At the beginning all were from families who were too poor
to educate their boys in native schools, and to whom the fact that in
addition to the good education received, their boy was also clothed and
fed, proved inducement sufficient to overcome the opprobrium of allowing
him to fall under the influence of the hated foreigner. It really meant
no little in those early days, and, in fact, in all ante-Boxer times,
for parents, even though Christians, to send their boys to the Tengchow
school. An honored native pastor who was at one time a pupil there wrote:

    When my parents first sent me to school, there was a great
    protest from all the village. They tried to scare my mother
    by saying that the foreigners were vampires who could extract
    the blood of children by magic arts. Nevertheless I was sent;
    though I must own that I was a little scared myself. When I
    came home at Chinese New Year vacation, I was most carefully
    examined by all these prophets of evil; and when they found
    that not only my pulse was still a-going, but that I was even
    rosier and in better flesh than before, they said that the
    three months I had been there were not enough to show the
    baneful results; only wait! After the Germans took Kiaochow
    and began the railroad, the rumors in that region became
    worse. Under each sleeper a Chinese child must be buried. To
    furnish axle grease for the “fire-cart” human fat must be
    tried out—anyone could see the great boilers they had for the
    purpose; and under those great heaps of fresh-turned earth they
    buried the bones.

At the time of the Tientsin massacre it was currently reported that
Mateer was fattening boys for the purpose of killing them, and then
taking their eyes and hearts to make medicine with which to bewitch the
people.

Nevertheless the numbers were always full, except at brief intervals,
when reduced by popular disturbances, epidemics or such causes. The
school in its second year had twelve pupils, just double the number with
which it began its work. It will be remembered that in 1867 the Mateers
built and occupied their new home. This vacated the old Kwan Yin temple
premises. In the application to the Board to erect the new home Mateer
said:

    We do not propose to vacate the old premises, but to
    appropriate them to the school, for which they would be
    admirably adapted. We look forward with confidence to an
    increase of the school. Our present number of scholars,
    however, occupy all the room we can possibly spare; if we
    increase we must build not only sleeping rooms, but a large
    schoolroom. This would not, it is true, cost as much money as
    a foreign house, but it would not come as far below as perhaps
    you might suppose. The main building would make one or two most
    admirable schoolrooms, which will accommodate any school we
    will likely ever have. One of the side buildings would make a
    very convenient dining room and kitchen, and the other, with
    additional buildings made vacant, would with a very little
    refitting furnish at least ten new rooms besides what we now
    have. It will probably be many years before we will have more
    than these.

With all his largeness of vision he did not yet foresee the coming
Tengchow college; though he was planning for greater things for the
mission as well as for the health and comfort of himself and wife.

Because the language employed was solely Chinese, at the beginning
neither Mateer nor his wife could take part in the instruction; all had
to be done by the Chinese assistant, who was a professing Christian. It
was not long, however, until both the Mateers were able to help; though
at no time did he give himself exclusively to teaching. The boys were
taught to read and write in their own language, so that for themselves
they might be able to study the Bible and other books which they were
expected to use. Arithmetic was a part of this course in the elementary
department with which the school began, and it was one of the very
first of the branches of which Mateer took charge. Mrs. Mateer had a
class in geography, and widened their vision of the world by informing
them of other lands besides China. Three times a week she undertook
the peculiarly difficult task of instructing them to sing. Of course,
there was morning worship. This was held in the schoolroom. The service
consisted of a hymn, of a chapter in the New Testament read verse about,
and a prayer. There was also evening worship. On Sabbath morning all
attended the little native chapel. In the afternoon a sort of Sunday
school was held, and in it Mateer taught the bigger boys, and Mrs.
Mateer the smaller, in the Scriptures. At worship on Sabbath evening he
questioned them all in turn about the sermon in the morning. Such was
the very humble way in which the school was nurtured in its infancy, and
started on the road to become what has been pronounced to be the very
best of all the colleges in China.

Three months after the first opening the six pupils admitted were reduced
to three, because the fathers of the other boys were unwilling to sign
the obligation to leave them in the school the required number of years.
A decade after the school was begun Mateer said in a Sunday-school letter:

    Our boys are from nine or ten to eighteen or twenty years, and
    a number of them have been in school seven or eight years.
    If they have never been to school, we require them to come
    for twelve years, but take them for a less time if they have
    already been several years in a native school. We try to get
    those who have already been to school, as it is a saving both
    of labor and of money.

At the end of a quarter of a century after the school was begun he said:

    During these years we took many boys into the school who came
    to nothing. Some were too stupid, and we had to send them away
    after they had learned to read and knew something of the Bible.
    Others were bad boys, and we had to dismiss them; and some got
    tired and ran away, or were taken away by their parents because
    they wanted them at home to work. We sifted out some good ones,
    who were bright and promised to make good men.

The pupils they retained at the end of the first ten years were culled
out of more than twice their number. Of the routine of the school he
wrote:

    The boys go to school at six o’clock in the morning, and
    study till eight. Then all meet in the large schoolroom for
    prayers. After this there is a recess of an hour for breakfast.
    At half-past nine they go to school again, and remain till
    half-past twelve. In the afternoon they have another session
    of four hours. During the shortest days of winter they have an
    evening session instead of a morning session. These are the
    ordinary hours of study in the native schools. At first we
    thought so many hours in school too much for either health or
    profit, but after trying our plan for several years, we were
    convinced that for Chinese children and Chinese methods of
    study the native plan is best. The great business in Chinese
    schools is committing the classics, which they do by chanting
    them over rhythmically at the top of their voices, each one
    singing a tune of his own, and apparently trying to “hollow”
    louder than the others. The din they make would be distracting
    to one of us, but the Chinese teacher seems to enjoy it. The
    exercise it gives the lungs compensates, perhaps, for the
    want of more play hours. When Mrs. Mateer or I go into the
    school to hear classes, we, of course, make them stop their
    uproarious studying, and study to themselves. About half the
    day our boys devote to Christian and to scientific books. They
    learn a catechism of Christian doctrine, “The Peep of Day,”
    Old Testament history, “Pilgrim’s Progress,” “Evidences of
    Christianity,” and memorize portions of Scripture. They study
    also geography, ancient history, arithmetic, algebra, geometry,
    trigonometry, natural philosophy, and chemistry. They are
    trained in singing, writing essays, and debating. The native
    books which they study are composed mostly of the maxims and
    wise sayings of Confucius and Mencius, together with a large
    number of poems. These books teach people to be honest and
    upright. They teach children to obey their parents and elder
    brothers. They also contain a great deal about the duties of
    the people to their rulers, and of the rulers to the people.
    They praise all good and virtuous men, and exhort all to lead
    virtuous lives; but they offer no motives higher than the
    praise of men. They teach nothing about God or future life.
    They are all written in what is called the classical style,
    which is to a Chinese boy what Latin is to an American boy.
    These books the boys commit to memory, and recite to their
    teacher, but without understanding them. When a book has been
    memorized and a boy can repeat it from beginning to end, the
    teacher commences to explain it to him. He has neither grammar
    nor dictionary to help him, but must learn all from the
    teacher’s lips. When a young man can repeat all these books and
    give the explanation, and can write an essay in the same style,
    the Chinese consider him a scholar, and when he can do this,
    and in addition has mastered all the other branches of study
    mentioned above, we consider his education finished, and he
    graduates from our school. A boy must have a good mind, and be
    very diligent if he gets through in twelve years.

The clothes of the boys, of course, were entirely Chinese as to material
and style. Their food was of like character. The dormitories were low
rooms with earthen floors and the bedsteads were of dry mud. The letter
continues:

    Teaching the boys their regular lessons is but a small part of
    the work to be done in such a school as ours. Ways and means
    have to be provided to have their food bought and properly
    cooked. The cook must be prevented from stealing it, and the
    boys from wasting it. Their clothes have to be made in proper
    season, and mended and washed, and the boys watched that they
    do not destroy them. Then each boy’s grievances have to be
    heard and his quarrels examined into and settled. Bad boys have
    to be exhorted or reproved, and perhaps punished and every
    possible means used, and that constantly, to make the boys
    obedient and truthful and honest. We also strive to train them
    to habits of industry, perseverance, and self-reliance, without
    which their education will do them no good. Thus you see that
    to train up these boys so that they shall become good and
    useful men requires a great deal of labor, patience, and faith,
    and prayer.

[Illustration:

  Large College Building        End of Chapel            College Bell
                         (formerly Kwan Yin Temple)    Small Schoolroom]

These are homely details, but we cannot overlook them, and understand the
life of the Mateers in its connection with this work.

Discipline in any school composed of so many boys and of such varied
age could not be an easy task; in this Chinese school it was peculiarly
perplexing. There were some unusual incidents. Falsehood, stealing,
quarreling, gluttony, and even sodomy were offenses that had to be dealt
with according to the circumstances attending each case. One instance of
discipline was so distinctively Chinese that the description of it by
Mateer in his Journal deserves a place here. Under date of April 9, 1869,
he wrote:

    One very distressing thing has happened within a month. Leon
    Chin Chi was being persecuted by his father in relation to the
    matter of his marriage engagement with Shang Yuin, when in a
    fit of desperation he went and bought opium, and took it to
    kill himself. Some of the boys suspected him, and went to see.
    They found him lying on his bed evidently in great distress of
    mind, and refusing to answer any questions save to say that
    his affairs were all over with. I inferred from this, as also
    from his saying to one of the boys that he would never see him
    again, that he had taken poison—most likely opium. I went and
    got a strong emetic, and mixed it up, but he refused to take
    it. I then got a stick and used it to such good purpose that
    in a very short time he was glad to take the medicine. It had
    the desired effect, and in a very short time he vomited up the
    opium. He seemed to lay the beating to heart very much. It was
    evidently a new idea to him to be put through in such a style.
    After a day or two, when he had gone to school again, I gave
    him a formal and severe whipping in the presence of the school.
    I thought very seriously over the matter of whipping him, and
    concluded that it was my duty to do it. I believe now that it
    did the boy good. He was called before the session last week,
    when he manifested a good deal of sorrow and penitence. He was
    publicly reproved and admonished on Sabbath morning. I am sorry
    that he had such a weakness; it greatly decreases my reliance
    on him, and my belief in his genuine Christian character. It
    must be allowed that there is some little excuse, in the way
    in which the Chinese all regard suicide. He had not got those
    ideas all educated out of him.

While Mateer differed in opinion from those missionaries who favored
schools simply as effective agents for the conversion of the pupils, he
regarded this as one of the leading results to be sought and expected.
It was almost two years after the opening of his school when he had the
great joy of baptizing one of the pupils. In describing the event to a
secretary of the Board, he said:

    He is the oldest boy in the school, and is in fact a man in
    years, though his education is not yet nearly finished. He
    has been for two or three months feeling that it was his
    duty to profess Christ, but, as he is naturally modest and
    retiring, he did not make his wish known. His mother, to whom
    he was uncommonly attached, died recently, and this brought
    him to a full decision. His examination before the session
    was most satisfactory, showing that he has improved well his
    opportunities of learning the truth. I have great hopes of his
    future usefulness. He has a good mind, and is a most diligent
    student, and if he is spared, and is taught of God’s Spirit he
    may be a great treasure to us in preaching to the heathen.

Three months later he wrote again of this young man as exemplary in
conduct and as growing in grace, and added:

    I am thankful that I can now say that another has since been
    baptized. He is the most advanced boy in the school, and is
    in fact very nearly a man. His conversion was not sudden, but
    gradual, after the manner of almost all the Chinese. We trust,
    however, that he is a true child of God, and we have strong
    hope that if he is spared he will make a very useful man.

The next year three more of the largest boys were received into the
church. The session examined two others, but thought it best for them to
wait a few weeks; and a number more were hoping to be received, but were
advised to defer the matter. Thus the conversion of the boys gradually
progressed, until at the time when the school formally became a college,
all who had graduated, and nearly all the pupils still enrolled who were
sufficiently mature, were professing Christians.

Julia’s sister, Maggie Brown, came out to join the station at Tengchow
early enough to render valuable help in the initial stages of the
school. In 1871 she married Mr. Capp. One of the necessities which
Mateer recognized was that of a girls’ school, his reason being the
vital importance of providing suitable wives for the young men whom
he was training. After her marriage Mrs. Capp took charge of such a
school, and she and her brother-in-law, Mateer, continued to coöperate in
that important enterprise. For use in teaching she translated a mental
arithmetic, and in this she had his assistance. Dr. Corbett wrote:
“In spite of all discouragements in the way of securing permanent and
efficient heads, and of the paucity of results, he never wavered in his
support of the girls’ school, and always planned for its welfare, because
he saw in it an element necessary to the final success of the Christian
Church.” When Mrs. Capp died, she left her little all for the erection of
buildings to be used by the school which he had encouraged, and to which
she had consecrated the maturity of her powers.

Thirteen years went by before any of the young men graduated. The first
class consisted of three men who had completed the course, which by that
time had been enlarged beyond the curriculum already described so as to
include astronomy, the text-book used being a good, stiff one,—no other
than a translation of Herschell’s work. Of that first class Mateer said:
“They will probably teach for a time at least. There is more call for
teachers than for preachers at present.” Under date of May 2, 1877, he
wrote as to this first commencement:

    We had a communion on the occasion. The speeches made by the
    young men at graduation were excellent, and the whole effect on
    the school was most happy. The boys saw distinctly that there
    is a definite goal before them and their ambition was stirred
    to reach it.

The report for that year speaks as follows:

    All of the graduates are men of excellent talents. They are
    really fine scholars both in their own language and literature
    and in western science. One of them goes to Hangchow to
    take charge of the mission school there,—a school which had
    flourished well-nigh twenty years before the school in Tengchow
    was born. Another of them goes to Chefoo, to teach a school for
    the Scottish Presbyterian mission. The third goes to assist Dr.
    Nevius in his extensive country work, where I am sure he will
    render the most valuable service. One of our former pupils,
    who has been teaching in the school during the last year, also
    goes to assist Dr. Nevius in the same way. This he does of his
    own free will, knowing that he will have harder work and less
    pay. We expect a large number of new pupils next year. More are
    anxious to come than we can take. We will try to do the best we
    can.

From May, 1879, to January, 1881, the Mateers were absent from China, on
their first furlough home. During this period the school was in charge
of other missionaries, and a part of the time was without a regular
superintendent; yet it continued its work fairly well. The return of
the Mateers was made the occasion of a reception that must have been
exceedingly pleasant to them. In the Sunday-school letter for 1881 he
described it:

    From Chefoo to Tengchow we traveled in a shentza. The weather
    was cold and the ground covered with snow. We got along
    comfortably, however, and reached Tengchow in safety. The
    schoolboys had heard of our coming, and were all on the lookout
    to meet us. It was Saturday afternoon, and they had no school;
    so they all came out of the city to meet us on the road.
    They met us in companies, and their beaming faces and hearty
    expressions of delight made us feel that we were indeed welcome
    back to Tengchow. Their faces looked very familiar, though some
    of the smaller boys had grown very much during our absence. The
    next week the school closed for the year.

Late in 1881 they were gladdened by the arrival of Robert Mateer and
Lillian as reënforcements to the mission. Robert has been one of the
most efficient of the Presbyterian missionaries in Shantung, especially
in evangelism, and is still doing most excellent work. Lillian was
attractive in person and proved herself an accomplished and successful
teacher. In the course of time she married Mr. Samuel Walker. The failure
of his health compelled their return home.

The year 1882 seems to have been marked by a distinct advance all along
the line. The average attendance rose to sixty-five. The new students
were selected out of the possible admissions, and consisted of such as
gave most promise as to work and character, some of them being already
well advanced in their studies, and full-grown men. The secret of this
was the enlargement of the constituency of the institution, through
the reputation it had already won for itself among the Chinese in
general, and through the increase of native Christians. Perhaps the
most remarkable improvement was in the prosecution of their work by
the students; a state of things due to such causes as the presence of a
larger number of select and advanced pupils, with a fuller and higher and
prescribed curriculum, with formal public graduation at its completion.

So straitened had their quarters become that in the following year
another building was obtained, care being taken that its outfit should,
as heretofore, be of so plain a character as not to lift the men who went
out from the institution above their own people in their ideas and habits
of living. Of course, the growth of the school and its differentiation
according to the stages of the curriculum necessitated a considerable
increase in the force of teachers. After graduates began to go out,
several of these were employed. Lillian Mateer for a while helped in the
school, but it was not long until her marriage to Mr. Walker terminated
her connection with the Presbyterian work and her residence at Tengchow.
In the autumn of 1882 very substantial and permanent help came by the
arrival of Mr. and Mrs. W. M. Hayes, whose large services will require
further notice as this biography proceeds. Were it not that the story of
the life of Mrs. Julia Mateer is told fully in a suitable volume, much
would be said here as to her remarkable achievements, especially in the
school.

Mateer’s work in connection with the school lay only in part in the
classroom; but whatever shape it took, it was always of such a character
as to impress his own individuality in a remarkable degree. Both he and
Julia regarded personal influence as of such vital importance that they
were not quite prepared to welcome an increase of pupils so great as to
hazard this element of training. Dr. Corbett says: “As a teacher he was
enthusiastic and eminently successful. He was always wide-awake and never
dull; so he was able to keep the attention of every student. Any attempt
to deceive him was useless, and students found no comfort in going to
a recitation unless they had been faithful in their preparation.” The
truth is that, helpful as he gladly made himself to everybody who tried
to conduct himself as he ought, he was a terror to all triflers and
evildoers, old or young. Dr. Mateer’s surname in Chinese was Ti. The
tiger is called Lao Hu. It is significant that among themselves his
students sometimes spoke of him as Ti Lao Hu. One thing he believed with
his whole heart, and endeavored to impress in every legitimate way on his
pupils. This is that the highest office to which a Christian man can be
called is the ministry of the gospel. In all his conduct of the school
his dominating desire was to raise up faithful, able, well-educated men,
filled with the Spirit, to go forth as ambassadors of Christ to win China
for Him. As Dr. Corbett adds: “For this purpose he gave wise counsel,
intellectual effort, unceasing toil and daily prayer. He gave of his own
money freely to help the destitute, and make it possible for youths of
promise to fit themselves for usefulness.”

Such, briefly told, is the story of the Tengchow school. In the two
decades of its existence it had fully justified the consecrated wisdom
of its founder and head. From the little elementary department with
which it had opened, it had advanced so as to become also a high school,
and at length to do work of full collegiate rank. At the time when it
formally took the name of a college, there was an average attendance
of seventy-five, including three day scholars. It had educated more or
less completely perhaps two hundred pupils, who had come up from Chinese
families, some of them Christian and many of them heathen. Of those who
remained long enough to be molded by the influences of the institution
and were mature enough, all made a public profession of their faith in
Christ. They had been trained to live upright, godly, Christian lives;
and they had seen one of their number die in peace through his faith in
Christ. The character and the work of those who had gone out to do their
part in the activities of the world were such as to command respect and
confidence and influence. For the graduates who were beginning to be sent
forth there was a demand to fill positions of high importance, much in
excess of the supply, and by no means limited to Shantung. Besides all
that had been achieved, the prospect of far greater things in the future
was assured.




IX

THE PRESS; LITERARY LABORS

    “Making books is a very important branch of missionary effort,
    which I would by no means depreciate; but he who would
    undertake it should be sure of his call, and should not begin
    too soon. There is a temptation to forego active evangelistic
    work for the less laborious and perhaps more congenial work
    of sitting in a study, translating or studying the literature
    of the language. Much precious time is sometimes wasted in
    this way, especially in the earlier stages of a man’s life,
    before he is quite able to weigh himself against his work.
    It is a rare thing indeed that a missionary should undertake
    writing or translating a book inside of five years, and then
    he should be supported by the advice and approval of his older
    associates.”—MISSIONARIES AND THE LANGUAGE, 1902.


Mateer was at no time a very prolific contributor to the home newspapers
and periodicals. For about ten years, with some frequency, he wrote for
“The Presbyterian Banner” letters concerning the work of the mission
done by himself and others in China; but after that he was too busy to
continue such writing, except at long intervals. Once or twice he sent to
the United States more labored replies to what he considered misleading
articles that had appeared in such periodicals as “The Princeton Review,”
in regard to the condition of things in China. He greatly deprecated
laudation of matters Chinese and unwarranted hopefulness as to the
immediate future of their country. He was strongly inclined to question
the wisdom of the policy which the United States was pursuing in China
forty or fifty years ago, and he did not hesitate to express in print
here at home his views on that line of topics. Beyond these fugitive
contributions to the newspapers and periodicals he published little else
in this country, save a booklet or two, one or more of which he prepared
for the use of the Board at their request. Sometimes he questioned
whether his slight use of the home press might not leave the impression
there that he was not doing as much as others who were more frequent in
their contributions; but all the same he gave himself to the other work
which his hands found to do.

Most of his contributions to current literature appeared in China and
were written for “The Chinese Recorder.” His articles in this periodical
extend over almost his entire missionary life, some of them being brief,
but many of them being elaborate discussions of great subjects affecting
directly or indirectly the work of evangelization in non-Christian lands.
His book on the Chinese term for God was not published until 1902, and,
of course, was in English, though with copious extracts from Chinese
literature. His only other English book was a review of Dr. Nevius’
“Methods of Missions.”

His publications in Chinese, as we shall presently see, were very
considerable in number, and were of large importance to the work of
missions; for he at no time allowed himself to be diverted to the
production of any treatise that would not be helpful in the one service
to which he consecrated his life. But before he began to avail himself
of the press for his own books, he was somewhat unwillingly compelled
for a while to take the management of a printing establishment. Down
at Shanghai there was already a mission press, the funds for the
establishment of which had in large part been contributed for that
distinct purpose, and which had been left hitherto to the management
of the Presbyterian missionaries of that general region. The Synod of
China—by order of the General Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the
United States—was organized in the autumn of 1870, and the first meeting
was held at Shanghai. The condition of the mission press at that place
was brought before the synod, and was by that body handed over to the
foreign missionaries in attendance, as more properly belonging to their
control. A plan covering the entire operation of the plant, as drawn up
by Mateer in a committee and approved by the entire body, was sent home
to the Board for sanction, which in due time it received. One of the
things for which immediate provision was necessary was a man to take
charge of the establishment, and the choice, after repeated efforts to
secure some other suitable person, and after his own refusal to take
the place, returned to him in such a way that he felt that he could not
decline it, if limited to a period of a year, and with the privilege of
spending some time as necessary up at Tengchow. Of course, temporary
arrangements had to be made for the conduct of the school. For this
purpose Julia’s sister, Maggie, was called into service; and with such
assistance as she could command she gave excellent satisfaction. She was
also in possession of the Mateer home. As to the work to which he was
thus temporarily called at Shanghai, he said in his Journal:

    While it is a very great trial to me to come to Shanghai, it is
    not without some inducement. It will increase very largely my
    acquaintance, and will enlarge my knowledge of China and its
    affairs. Also I hope it may be the means of getting something
    of great benefit done for Julia’s health. I am very sorry that
    the doctor who treated her before is not here now. My great
    sorrow is that it will interfere with my Chinese studies, and
    prevent me accomplishing what I had designed.

It was not until August, 1872, that he finally went back to Tengchow to
resume his work there.

The details of his life while at Shanghai probably would not interest
most readers. He said of it in his Journal, under date of January 29,
1872:

    I neglected everything to do the work in the press, and I
    worked with an assiduity that I have rarely given to anything
    in my life. I had hoped when I went to Shanghai to have some
    time to study, but I found it utterly out of the question. The
    demands for the press were imperative, and I just gave myself
    to the work.

Two sides of his capabilities were there brought into special
requisition. One of these was his efficiency as a business manager,—a
characteristic due partly to his native qualities, and partly to his
habits of accuracy, of wise forethought, of careful oversight, and of
insistence on the faithful performance of duty by all employees. This
side of his character is brought out by his “letter books.” Separation
by the space of half a globe from the base of supplies made it necessary
to anticipate wants by eight or ten months. For convenient reference he
caused every business letter, and many others, to be copied. Especially
as the school and college at Tengchow grew on his hands he had to conduct
what was in reality a large miscellaneous business, under conditions that
were very exceptionally difficult. He had not only to provide for his
own wants in his family and in his work, but also to accommodate others
by acting as their agent. His orders had to go sometimes to Shanghai,
but more frequently to London, or to New York, or to some place in the
interior of the United States. Many are curiosities, owing to the nature
and the range of articles included—from a steam engine or a telescope or
costly chemical supplies to a paper of pins. Some of the lists cover more
than ten pages in the copy. Woe to the merchant or agent in London or New
York or Shanghai who by mistake or for other reason sent without adequate
explanation any article that was not quite in accordance with the order!
He might expect to get a sharp letter, and a demand to rectify the
mistake if that were practicable. Service as treasurer of the mission
also gave him drill. Shilly-shally workmen are one of the horrors which
sometimes call from him in his Journal groans of anguish. When he had
completed his charge of the press establishment, including as it did a
book department, a job department, a dwelling for the superintendent,
quarters for the workmen, all of whom were Chinese, a chapel for these
workmen, and other equipments, it was a well-organized business, running
regularly and smoothly, and doing its work about as efficiently as was
possible under the conditions.

The other side of his capabilities there especially called into exercise
was his mechanical gifts. As an illustration, the following from his
Journal, under the same date as that just given, will answer:

    I had to get a Japanese dictionary started, and it was a most
    embarrassing affair. My predecessor had made promises which
    he could not fulfill. The men were there to print, and yet we
    had to send to England for paper to do the job. Also all the
    pronunciation marks for Webster’s dictionary were to be put in,
    and we did not have the type or the matrices. I had to have the
    letters cut on wood, and matrices made; this was a world of
    trouble. Some of the letters were cut over half-a-dozen times
    or more, and after all they were far from perfect. I also had a
    set of shaped music types cut, and this took a deal of time and
    pains to get them all properly cut, as also to get the matrices
    made. I finally succeeded quite well in both respects.... I
    also experimented not a little in stereotyping, and succeeded
    in doing fair work. I trained one boy who stereotyped Matthew
    before I left. In order to carry it on effectually and rapidly
    I had a furnace and press made and fitted up, which after
    sundry changes worked very well.... I also had a new style
    of case for Chinese type made, which I think will be an
    improvement on the old. I also had a complete and thorough
    overhauling of the matrices, reassorted them all, and had new
    cases made. This was a serious job, but it will I am sure prove
    a very great help to the efficient working of the establishment.

He consented to manage the press only until a competent man could be
secured to take it off his hands. When casting about for such a person,
his mind had been directed to his brother John, nearly a year before he
was himself forced into this position. John had hoped to go to college,
and to prepare for the ministry, and to go out as a missionary, but,
on account of certain tendencies developed as to his health, he was
compelled to abandon his purpose. As to his mechanical gifts and his
ability to turn them into use in a great variety of ways, he resembled
Calvin; and the latter was so confident that John could soon fit himself
to be a competent superintendent of the press at Shanghai that he advised
the Board of Missions to make inquiry in regard to him. The result was
that eventually he was selected for the place, and he arrived in China
early in August, 1871. Before he could satisfactorily enter on his duties
it was necessary for him to acquire some knowledge of the language and
to acquaint himself with the business committed to his charge. This
detained Calvin until late in that year; and after a period of some three
months spent at Tengchow, he returned to Shanghai to assist John in
moving the press to new and much better premises that had been purchased.
The moving proper was a heavy job, requiring a week of hard, dirty labor.
The distance was about a mile, mostly by water, but by land a hundred or
more yards at either end. While thus engaged, although he was no longer
officially at the head of the business, he took the main charge, so as
to allow his brother to give his time chiefly to the acquisition of the
language and to other things that he needed to learn.

The new place is the same now occupied by the press in Peking Road. Under
the superintendency of Rev. G. F. Fitch, it has become the center not
only of the Presbyterian missions, but of the general missionary activity
all over China. In writing to his brother as early as November, 1869, he
said of this plant: “It is a very important place, and would give you
an extensive field for doing good. The establishment is not very large,
it is true, as compared with similar establishments in such cities as
New York or Philadelphia; yet it is the largest and best of the kind in
China. It not only does all the printing for all our missionaries, but
a great deal of job work for others; besides making and selling a large
amount of type.” After he had completed his term of the management,
and while helping John to get into the traces, he wrote to one of the
secretaries of the Board:

    I am not in favor of enlargement, but I would be very sorry to
    see the present efficiency of the press curtailed. It is doing
    a great and a good work not only for our missions, but for all
    China. It has exerted a prodigious collateral influence both
    in China and in Japan, affording facilities for the production
    of all kinds of scientific books, dictionaries, and so forth.
    Aside from any general interest in the missionary work, having
    at no small sacrifice left my proper work and given more than a
    year to the press, and also having a brother here in charge of
    it, I feel a lively interest in its future.

The last record that has come down to us concerning his work there is:
“We have just sold to the Chinese government a large font of Chinese
type. They are going to use movable metal type. This is a large step for
them to take, and it will do good. China yields slowly, but she is bound
to yield to Christianity and Christian civilization.”

At no subsequent period of his life had he any part in the management of
a printing establishment, but indirectly he continued to have much to
do with the press. He was a member of a joint committee of the Shantung
and the Peking mission, in charge of publications, and as such he had
to acquaint himself with what was needed, and with what was offered,
so as to pass intelligent judgment. Unofficially and as a friend whose
aid was solicited, he revised one or more of the books which his
associates submitted to him for criticism. At the General Conference
of Missionaries, held at Shanghai in 1877, a committee, of which he
was a member, was appointed to take steps to secure the preparation of
a series of schoolbooks for use in mission schools. Not long afterward
he published an elaborate paper on the subject, discussing in it the
character which such publications should have, and especially calling
attention to the need of peculiar care as to the Chinese words which
ought to be employed in the treatises on the sciences. That committee
diligently set itself to work, and initiated measures for a rather
comprehensive set of books by various missionaries to meet the want
recognized in this general field. He was himself called upon to prepare
several books, some of which he was willing to undertake; others he
put aside as not properly falling to him. In one or two instances he
claimed for himself precedence as to treatises suggested for others to
write. Some friction occurred, and when the Conference met again in
1890 that committee was discharged, and an Educational Association,
composed of missionaries familiar with the needs of schools, and
confining its functions more exclusively to the publication of books
for teaching—largely under his leadership—was formed. He was its first
chairman. This change he had warmly favored, and he was an active member
of the Association. In it he was chairman of a committee on scientific
terms in Chinese, a subject of great difficulty, and of prime importance
in the preparation of text-books. In the subsequent years he was so
much occupied with the revision of the Mandarin Bible, and with other
duties, that he could give to the technical terms only a secondary place
in his activities. Still, six years after he accepted this chairmanship
he says: “I have collected a large number of lists of subjects for terms
in chemistry, physics, mathematics, astronomy, geology, metallurgy,
photography, watch-making, machinery, printing, music, mental and moral
philosophy, political economy, theology, and so forth.” Subsequently he
continued this work.

The first literary production of his own pen in Chinese was a tract on
infant baptism; this was called forth by local conditions at Tengchow. A
small sheet tract, entitled “A Prayer in Mandarin,” also followed early.
As chairman of the committee appointed by the Educational Association, he
made a report on chemical terms, and recommended a new and distinctively
Chinese method for the symbols in that science. This was printed.

In a preliminary report of the Shanghai press, made in September, 1871,
he, in a list of books in course of preparation, mentions under his own
name as author the following: “1. Catechism on Genesis, with answers
to the more difficult questions,—_finished_, needing only a slight
revision. 2. An explanation of the moral law as contained in the ten
commandments,—_half-finished_. 3. Scripture Text-Book and Treasury,
being Scripture references by subjects, supplying in great part the
place of a concordance,—_one-third finished_.” All of these had been
under way for several years, but had been frequently shunted off the
track by other imperative work. Very soon after that date the catechism
was published. He had a good deal to do with Julia’s “Music Book,”
especially in coining appropriate terminology, though he never claimed
joint authorship in it. Along with Dr. Nevius, he published a hymn
book for use in Chinese services; and down to the close of his life,
especially on a Sabbath when he did not preach, he now and then made an
additional Chinese version of a hymn. In fact, whenever he heard a new
hymn that especially moved him he wished to enrich the native collection
by a translation of it into their speech. One which the Chinese came
greatly to like was his rendering of the Huguenot song, “My Lord and I.”
A subject that was always dominant in his mind and heart was the call to
the ministry, and it was significant that one of the last things on which
he worked was a translation of the hymn which has the refrain, “Here am
I, send me.” It was not quite finished when his illness compelled him
to lay down his pen; but recently at a meeting of the Chinese student
volunteers, constituting a company rising well toward one hundred and
fifty, that hymn was printed on cards, and a copy was given to each of
these candidates for the ministry. In 1907 he had carried a theological
class through the Westminster Shorter Catechism, and as an outcome his
translation was published. This is the last religious book he made in
Chinese. During his long service as a missionary he taught a number of
theological classes in various studies, and his lectures were regarded
as very superior, but he published none of them.

His schoolbooks all originated in the necessities of his own work as
a teacher. The first thus to force itself upon his attention was an
arithmetic. He was already at work on it in 1868, and it went to press
while his brother John was superintending the plant at Shanghai. The
preparation of such a book, to one unacquainted with the conditions
under which this one was made, may seem to have been a rather easy
undertaking, and to have required little more than a sufficient mastery
of the Chinese language and of English; yet there were some perplexing
questions that arose in connection with it. For instance, the method of
writing numbers horizontally was wholly unknown to the Chinese. Should
the new arithmetic use the western, or should it retain the Chinese
method? To retain the Chinese would be to train the pupils in a usage
that would be confusing in subsequent reading of western mathematics; to
abandon it would be equally confusing in printing the text of the book,
which, according to Chinese usage, must be arranged perpendicularly. The
difficulty was gotten over by duplicating each pattern example, giving it
once horizontally and once perpendicularly. Pupils using the book were
permitted to take their choice in performing their work, but in the text
proper all numbers appeared vertically. Such lines as those dividing the
numerator and denominator of a fraction stood perpendicularly, with the
figures to the right and the left. Until he published his arithmetic,
the Chinese numerals had been employed; he introduced the Arabic. At the
dawn of the new era subsequent to the Boxer outbreak, almost the first
book in demand by Chinese teachers and pupils outside the mission schools
was a western arithmetic; and among others put upon the market were many
“pirated” editions of Mateer’s book, printed on cheap paper and with
wooden blocks. The publishers had not yet learned the significance of
“copyright.” The circulation of the book, however brought about, had at
least the effect of immediately increasing the reputation of its author
among the scholarly classes outside the church. Of the editions issued
by the press at Shanghai tens of thousands of copies have been sold. Dr.
Fitch writes that “it is impossible to state the total number,” and that
“the book has gone into all parts of the empire.”

In October, 1884, he submitted to the schoolbook committee of the
Educational Association the manuscript of his geometry, and in doing so
he said of it:

    It is the result of much pains and labor.... The book is
    written in plain Wen-li, and much pains has been taken to
    make it smooth in style and accurate in meaning. In the few
    equations used I have introduced the mathematical signs
    employed in the West, of which I have given a full explanation
    in the beginning of the book.... Mathematical signs and
    symbols are a species of universal language, used alike by all
    civilized nations, and it is unwise to change them until it
    is absolutely necessary. The young men who have given most
    effective assistance in the preparation of this geometry are
    decided in their opinion that we should not change or garble
    the mathematical symbolism of the West, but give it to them in
    its integrity. The only change made is in writing equations
    perpendicularly instead of horizontally,—a change which is
    necessitated by the form of Chinese writing.

The book was published the following year. To the same committee he
reports in March, 1882, that his algebra was then all in manuscript,
and only needing revision and some rearrangement before printing. The
geometry was followed by his algebra, first part. These have had a large
sale, though, because fewer studied this branch, not the equal of the
arithmetic.

On January 14, 1908, he sent to the manager of the press the preface to
the second volume of his algebra, which covers the same ground as the
“University” edition in the United States. Of this Dr. Hayes says: “Over
twenty years ago he began the preparation of Part II of his algebra, and
the draft then made was used in manuscript for many years. Other duties
pressed upon him, and he was compelled to lay it away unfinished. Yet
he had not forgotten it, but from time to time he would make a step in
advance. It was only a few months before his death that the work was
completed and published.”

There were a number of other books which he planned, on some of which
he did considerable work, but none of which he completed. One of these
was so colossal in its projected scope and scholarship that it deserves
special notice because indicative of the large things to which early
in his missionary career he was already eager to give his time and
abilities. This was a Mandarin dictionary. In its preparation he sought
to associate with himself Rev. Chauncey Goodrich, of Peking; and in
writing to him under date of June 6, 1874, he thus stated his conception
of the work:

    My idea of the book is a dictionary of the spoken language of
    north China, in all its length and breadth, including on the
    one hand all the colloquialisms that the people use in everyday
    life,—all they use in Chi-li and in Shantung, and in all the
    Mandarin-speaking provinces, so far as we can get it, noting,
    of course, as such, the words and phrases we know to be local.
    Further, let it include as a prominent feature all sorts of
    ready-made idiomatic phrases, and in general all combinations
    of two or more characters in which the meaning coalesces, or
    varies from the simple rendering of the separate characters.

Considerable preliminary work had already been done, when the death of
Mrs. Goodrich compelled her husband to withdraw from the partnership; and
the project was abandoned by Mateer, though with a hope that it might be
resumed. In 1900, however, as the fruit of this and kindred studies he
published an analysis of two thousand one hundred and eighteen Chinese
characters. This little book was designed to help children in dictation
exercises to write characters, and is still largely used for this
purpose by mission schools. The huge dictionary, though never completed,
had three direct descendants. With Dr. Goodrich it produced first a
Chinese phrase book, and then a pocket Chinese-English dictionary,
which for brevity and comprehensiveness is a marvel, and which is
regarded by almost every student of Chinese as a necessity. In marked
contrast with these two volumes is an immense dictionary left behind
in manuscript by Dr. Mateer. It is wholly in Chinese; and as it lies
unfinished it occupies more than a cubic foot of space, and consists of
a set of volumes. No comprehensive dictionary of the Chinese language
has been published for two hundred and fifty years, and the last issued
had been mainly classical. The object of this was to supply the evident
need of a great new work of that sort. One insurmountable difficulty
encountered was a phonetic arrangement commanding common usage. None had
the requisite approval. Fortunately, on this undertaking Dr. Mateer did
not spend his own time, except so far as that was necessary to direct the
preparation of it by his scribes when they were not otherwise employed.

In his letter to his college classmates in 1897 he says that he has
“well in hand a work on electricity, and one on homiletics prepared when
teaching theology.” Neither of these was finished and published. To his
college classmate, S. C. T. Dodd, Esq., he wrote in 1898 that he was
trying also to finish a work on moral philosophy. In March, 1878, he
wrote to Dr. W. A. P. Martin, of Peking: “You will remember probably
that when you were here I spoke of my intention to make a natural
philosophy by and by. You said, ‘Go ahead,’ and that you would retire
in my favor by the time mine was ready, say, ten years hence. If I am
spared I hope to have the book ready within the time, if not sooner.
As you know, natural philosophy is my hobby, and I have taught it more
thoroughly probably than has been done in any other school in China. I
intend when I visit America to prepare myself with the material and the
facilities for such work.” He was not able to find time for this work;
and when later Dr. Martin invited him to write for the revised edition of
his treatise the chapter on electricity, this privilege had for the same
reason to be put aside. He had also advanced far toward the completion of
a translation of “Pilgrim’s Progress” into Mandarin.

His “Mandarin Lessons” was published early in 1892, and immediately
commanded a success even larger than its author may have anticipated.
Ever since, it has gone on toward a more general use by foreigners
wishing to master the language, and has now far outstripped every other
work of its kind. He was a quarter of a century in making the book. June
28, 1873, he made the following entry in his Journal concerning it:

    Most of last week and this I have spent in making lessons and
    planning a much larger number than I have made. Mr. Mills urged
    me to work at them for Dr. ⸺’s benefit, as he did not seem to
    take hold of Wade. I did not think of what a job I was sliding
    into when I made three lessons for Maggie a few years ago. I
    have now laid out quite an extensive plan, and if I am spared
    I trust I shall be able to finish it, though it will take a
    deal of work. I believe that I can produce a far better book
    than any that has yet been brought forth. I was not intending
    to do this work now, and cannot work much more at it, as other
    matters imperatively demand attention.

Guided by the hint in this quotation, we are able to trace the book
still farther back to its very beginning. June 20, 1867, he said in his
Journal: “Maggie Brown [Julia’s sister] has been pushing on pretty lively
with the Chinese. I made her lessons for a good while, which she studies,
and now she is reading ‘The Peep of Day.’ I tried to make her lessons
with a view to bringing out the peculiarities of Chinese idiom. It led
me to a good deal of thinking and investigating. I have a mind to review
and complete the work, and may some day give it to the world. My great
difficulty is in classifying the results attained.”

As the years went by his ideas of the plan for the work took definite
shape. In one of his letters concerning it he wrote:

    Each lesson illustrates an idiom, the word idiom being taken
    with some latitude. The sentences, as you will see, are
    gathered from all quarters, and introduce every variety of
    subjects. I have also introduced every variety of style that
    can be called Mandarin, the higher style being found chiefly
    in the second hundred lessons. The prevailing object, however,
    is to help people to learn Mandarin as it is spoken. I have
    tried to avoid distinct localisms, but not colloquialisms.
    A large acquaintance with these is important, not to say
    essential, to every really good speaker of Mandarin. It is,
    of course, possible to avoid the most of them, and to learn
    to use a narrow range of general Mandarin which never leaves
    the dead level of commonplace expressions, except to introduce
    some stilted book phrase. This, however, is not what the
    Chinese themselves do, nor is it what foreigners should seek
    to acquire. Many colloquialisms are very widely used, and they
    serve to give force and variety to the language, expressing in
    many instances what cannot be expressed in any other way. I
    have tried to represent all quarters, and in order to do so I
    have in many cases given two or more forms.

In the pursuit of his plan he sought the aid of competent scholars in
the north and in central China, so as to learn the colloquialisms and
the usage of words; also in the preparation of a syllabary of the sounds
of characters as heard in each of the large centers where foreigners are
resident. To accomplish this he also traveled widely. Late in 1889, after
a summer spent in studying the dialects of China, he, in company with
Julia, made a three months’ trip to the region of the Yangtse, going down
on the Grand Canal, spending a month on the great river, and remaining a
month at Nanking; always with the main purpose of informing himself as to
the current Mandarin, so as to perfect his book. This tour enabled him
to give it the final revision; and in his opinion it “more than doubled
the value” of the “Lessons.” As finished, they were a huge quarto of six
hundred pages, which with the help of Mrs. Julia Mateer he saw through
the press down at Shanghai. In 1901, assisted by Mrs. Ada Mateer, he
issued a more elementary work of the same general nature.

The protracted study and care which he put upon the “Lessons” were
characteristic of him in all his literary productions. Upon this subject
no one is better qualified to bear testimony than is Dr. George F. Fitch,
Superintendent of the Presbyterian Mission Press, at Shanghai, who speaks
from direct personal observation. He says:

    One very marked characteristic of Dr. Mateer was the almost
    extreme painstaking with which he went over any work which he
    was getting ready for publication; revising and re-revising,
    seeking the judgment of others, and then waiting to see if
    possibly new light might dawn upon the subject. I remember
    reading shortly after I came to China the manuscript of a paper
    which he had prepared with great labor, upon the much-mooted
    “term question”; and in which he had collected, with infinite
    pains, seemingly a great number of quotations from the Chinese
    classics and other native works, bearing on the use of Shen as
    the proper word for God in Chinese. I urged him to publish at
    once, as I thought it might be useful in helping settle that
    question. But he stoutly refused, saying that it was not yet
    complete. Nor did it finally see the light, in print, until
    nearly twenty years afterward.

None of his books at all reveal the protracted and toilsome process
of the preparation. We see only the result of years of research. For
instance, in his library there was a long row of Chinese books each one
of which showed a large number of little white slips at the top. Each one
of this multitude of marks had been placed there by some student whom he
had employed respectively to read works in Chinese likely to use the word
Shen, in order to indicate the passages at which he needed to look. All
these were canvassed, and the different shades of meaning were classified.

From the “Mandarin Lessons,” and recently from the arithmetic, he
received substantial pecuniary returns, though not at all sufficient to
entitle him to be regarded as wealthy. In his manner of living he would
have been untrue to his training and impulses if he had not practiced
frugality, economy, and simplicity. As the means came into his possession
he used them generously both for personal friends and for the promotion
of the cause to which he had consecrated his life. Of his outlays for the
school and college we shall presently need to speak. The expenses of the
Yangtse trip came out of his own pocket. March 9, 1895, he wrote to one
of the secretaries of the Board:

    The mission minutes spoke, if you remember, of my intention
    to erect a building for a museum and public lecture room,
    and present it to the Board. This I intend to do at once. It
    will cost about twelve hundred dollars, possibly more. I may
    say in the same connection also that my “Mandarin Lessons”
    has fully paid all the cost of printing, and so forth, and I
    expect during the next year to pay into the treasury of the
    Board one thousand dollars, Mexican. This I do in view of the
    liberality of the Board in giving me my time while editing
    and printing the book. When the second edition is printed I
    expect to pay over a larger amount. I need not say that I feel
    very much gratified that the book has proved such a success:
    especially do I feel that it has been, and is going to be, very
    widely useful in assisting missionaries to acquire the Chinese
    language. My scientific books are also paying for themselves,
    but as yet have left no margin of profits.

May 20, 1905, he wrote to a secretary: “I may say, however, that in view
of the great importance of the school both to the Tengchow station and as
a feeder to the college at Wei Hsien, I have set apart from the profit
of my ‘Mandarin Lessons’ enough to support the school for the present
year.” December 13, 1906, he wrote to a friend in the United States: “My
brother is now holding a large meeting of elders and leading men from all
the stations in this field. There are about three hundred of them. It is
no small expense to board and lodge so many for ten days. I am paying
the bill.” In one of his latest letters to me he mentions this ability
pecuniarily to help as affording him satisfaction.




X

THE CARE OF THE NATIVE CHRISTIANS

    “The need of the hour in China is not more new stations
    with expensive buildings and wide itinerating. It is rather
    teaching and training what we have, and giving it a proper
    development. Most of all we should raise up and prepare pastors
    and preachers and teachers, who are well grounded in the truth,
    so that the Chinese Church may have wise and safe leaders....
    There are already enough mission stations, or centers, in the
    province, if they were properly worked. The need of the hour is
    to consolidate and develop what we have, and by all means in
    our power develop native agency, and teach and locate native
    pastors,—men who are well grounded in the faith.”—LETTER TO
    SECRETARY FOX, of the American Bible Society, January 6, 1906.


Dr. Mateer believed that sooner than most missionaries anticipated the
Chinese Christians will join together and set up an independent church.
He meant by this not merely a union of the ministers and churches of
the various Presbyterian denominations at work in the country, such
as has already been effected, but an organization that would include
in its membership all the Protestant Christians, and that would leave
little or no place for the service of foreign missionaries. He regarded
this as inevitable; and for that reason he considered it to be of prime
importance that such an effective preliminary work should promptly
be done, that this coming ecclesiastical independence might not be
attended by unsoundness as to creed or laxity in life. At the same
time, in holding up the care and the training of the native Christians
as so important a part of the work of the foreign missionary in China,
in anticipation of what is ahead, he was only for an additional reason
urging what he had in all his long career recognized as second to no
other in importance. Of course, at the beginning of the effort to
give the gospel to a people it is indispensable to do “the work of an
evangelist”; that is, to seek by the spoken word and by the printed book
to acquaint them with elementary Christian truth, and to endeavor to win
them to Christ; and we have already seen how diligent Dr. Mateer was in
this service, especially in his earlier missionary years. But he was just
as diligent in caring for the converts when gained; and in the school
and college it was the preparation of men for pastors and teachers and
evangelists that was constantly his chief aim.

The first body of native Christians with whose oversight he had anything
to do was that very small band that had been gathered into the church
at Tengchow. Mills was the senior missionary, and as such he presided
over that little flock until his death. In 1867 he was installed as the
pastor, and he continued in this office nearly twenty years. During this
long period Dr. Mateer at times supplied the pulpit and cared for the
church in Mills’s absence or illness, but for most of the time it was
only as a sort of adviser that he could render help in that field. We
have no reason to think specially unfavorably of Chinese converts because
some of those with whom he then had to do at Tengchow, or elsewhere,
proved themselves, to him, to be a discouraging set of professing
Christians. Were not a good many of Paul’s converts very much of the
same grade when he traveled among the churches, and wrote his letters?
Did it not take much patience, and fidelity, and persistence on the part
of Christ to make anything worth while out of his select disciples? Yet
these constituted the membership of the primitive church from which even
the missionaries of our day have originated. At any rate some of the
earliest experiences of Dr. Mateer with the native Christians were of a
very depressing sort. In his Journal, under date of March 17, 1864, he
made this record:

    Since coming to Tengchow there have been great difficulties
    in the native church. Several of the members were accused
    by common fame of various immoral practices,—one of smoking
    opium, another of lying and conforming to idolatrous practices,
    and another of breaking the Sabbath. The second of these
    confessed his fault, and was publicly reproved; the third also
    confessed, and on his profession of penitence was restored to
    the confidence of the church. But though the first confessed to
    the use of the ashes of opium, he gave no certain assurance of
    amendment; and he was suspended, and so remains. These matters
    gave us all a great deal of anxiety and sorrow of heart. It is
    sad thus to find that even those who profess the name of Christ
    are so much under the power of sin. It is one of the great
    discouragements of the missionary work. Yet God is able to
    keep even such weak ones as these unto eternal life.

Under date of September 15, 1866, he told of a worse case of discipline:

    We had a hearing with the accused, and gave him notice that
    he would be tried, and of the charges and witnesses. We wrote
    to Mr. Corbett at Chefoo, to get depositions for us. He did
    so, and we met, and tried him. The evidence was sufficient
    to convict him of lying, and of forging an account, and of
    adultery; notwithstanding, he denied it all, endeavoring to
    explain away such evidence as he was forced to admit. We
    decided to excommunicate him, and it was done two weeks ago.

It must not be supposed that there was a great deal of such discouraging
work; as a rule, the native Christians tried to live correct lives; and
the worst that could be said of most of them at those early dates was
that they were “babes” in Christ. But we cannot appreciate what the
missionary needs to do as to the professed converts unless we look at
this depressing phase. Besides, incidentally we are thus shown one of
the methods by which the native Christians were trained in the conduct
of their own churches. Each case is dealt with just as is required by
the regulations of the denomination with which the church is associated.
The same formalities and processes are employed as if in the United
States; the same fairness and fullness of investigation, with witnesses
and hearing of the accused; and the same effort neither to fall below
nor to exceed what justice and charity combined demand for the good of
the individual and of the organization as a whole. As to this, in these
particular cases no exceptional credit can be claimed for Dr. Mateer; but
we can be perfectly sure that it commanded his hearty approbation. This
was a practical school also in which was called into exercise a quality
of which a young missionary, and especially a man of his type, seldom
has enough,—that of mingling a firm adherence to truth and righteousness
with a forbearing kindness that will not break a bruised reed or quench
the smoking flax. Gradually this became so characteristic of him that the
boys in his school and the Christians in the churches were accustomed to
come to him and unburden themselves not only of sorrows, but of faults,
with no expectation that he would condone wrong or shield them from its
just consequences, but confident that he would feel for them, and help
them if he could. Nor was it to these classes alone that his heart and
hands opened. As they came to know him better, the professor in the
imperial university sought his advice and the coolie turned to him in his
need; and never in vain.

But there was a brighter side to the experience of those early days.
Several of the boys in the school were converted. What joy this afforded,
we who live in Christian lands cannot appreciate. The little church at
Tengchow also steadily moved forward in those early days of its history.
In 1869 it had risen to about fifty members, and the attendance was such
that a building solely for its services became indispensable; and in due
time an appropriation was made by the Board of Missions, first for a lot,
and soon after for a house of worship. Pastor Mills was then absent, and
by appointment of presbytery Dr. Mateer acted as stated supply. As such,
having first bought the lot, he made an appeal to the Board for the new
edifice, saying:

    We hold our services in the boys’ schoolroom, which has been
    kept inconveniently large, for this very purpose. It is the
    only room that will seat all, and it will not do it sometimes.
    The desks have to be carried out every Sabbath; and all the
    benches, chairs, and so forth, about the establishment carried
    in, making a decidedly nondescript collection. Aside from the
    inconvenience, two serious drawbacks are felt. One is the
    want of sacred associations about the place. All heathen are
    wanting in reverence, and no small part of what they need is
    to have this idea instilled into their minds. We greatly need
    in this work a house especially devoted to the worship of God.
    The other drawback is the disorganizing effect the Sabbath and
    week-day services have on the school. The room being in the
    midst of the premises, it is impossible to prevent a large
    amount of lounging, gossiping, and so forth, in the boys’ room
    before the service begins. The superintendent feels that it is
    a very serious drawback to the school, as well as an injury to
    the native Christians.

Any American who is familiar with students and their habits will perceive
that in this matter Chinese young men and boys are very much like those
of our own land.

In that appeal there is another paragraph that deserves transcription
here:

    It has been said that the Christians in heathen lands ought to
    build their own churches, but this is impossible in the early
    stages of the work, especially at the center of operations,
    where the foreigner preaches and teaches in person, and where a
    large part of his hearers are often from a distance. The church
    at this place gives character to the whole work in the eyes
    of the people at large, and must of necessity differ in many
    respects from churches in small places presided over by native
    pastors. Concerning these last we have already taken a decided
    stand, requiring the natives to help themselves to a great
    extent.

Dr. Mateer was appointed by the presbytery to serve a second year as
stated supply of the Tengchow church; and had it not been that he was
called in 1870 to Shanghai to take charge of the mission press, he no
doubt would have given his personal supervision to the erection of the
new house of worship. It was built during his absence, and when he came
back he rejoiced in its completion. At the death of Mills in 1895, Dr.
Mateer was chosen pastor, and was installed as such,—a position he was
able to assume because he had found in Mr. Hayes a substitute for himself
in the presidency of the college. He remained pastor until he went with
the college to Wei Hsien. Dr. Hayes had already for years worked quietly
and efficiently in the school, under the presidency of Dr. Mateer,
and had shown himself to be a man of exceptional ability and energy—a
man after Dr. Mateer’s own heart. After he assumed the presidency Dr.
Mateer was still to assist in the college, but he was so often absent or
otherwise engaged that both the college and the preaching were largely in
the hands of Dr. Hayes.

According to the “Form of Government” of the Presbyterian Church in the
United States of America, when a “call” is made out for a pastor it must
be certified to have been voted by a majority of the people entitled
to exercise this right; and it must fill the blank in the following
clause: “And that you may be free from worldly cares and avocations,
we hereby promise and oblige ourselves to pay to you the sum of ... in
regular quarterly (or half-yearly, or yearly) payments during the time
of your being and continuing the regular pastor of this church.” In the
settling of native pastors over the Chinese churches scattered through
the country, the filling of that blank, and the actual subscription of
the funds needed for this and other expenses of the organization, usually
require the presence of a missionary and of his earnest stimulation
and guidance. Sometimes the pledges are very liberal, if estimated by
ability of the members; and sometimes it is with great difficulty that
they are brought up to the measure of their duty. The salaries, however,
are almost incredibly small, and even according to Chinese standards are
scarcely sufficient for a livelihood. We need to keep this state of
things in mind in order to appreciate the amount that was inserted in
the blank in Dr. Mateer’s call to the pastorate of the Tengchow church.
In reporting the entire procedure to the Board of Missions, he said:
“The church in Tengchow in calling me for their pastor promised a salary
of cash amounting to fifty dollars, which is to be used to employ an
evangelist whom I am to select and direct.” Of course, he continued to
receive his own pay as a missionary from the funds of the Board. The
fifty dollars was probably a creditable amount, as contributed by the
native members out of their narrow means; and as a salary for a native
evangelist it was at least a fair average.

When reporting this pastorate to the Board of Missions, Dr. Mateer said,
“This is work that I love to do, especially the preaching.” When doing
the work of an evangelist among the people at large, sermonizing could
have no place. Even formal addresses of any sort were rarely practicable.
The best that the missionary can do when itinerating is to get attention
by any legitimate means, and then to talk, and hear and answer questions,
and bear with all sorts of irrelevancies and interruptions. But when a
church is organized, a sermon, consisting of a passage of Scripture and
a discourse built upon it, is just as much in place as it is in one of
our home houses of worship on the Sabbath. It was to the opportunity for
that form of service that he refers when he expressed his pleasure in
the pastorate. In this also he greatly excelled. Some who knew him most
intimately, and who appreciated fully his great worth and efficiency,
did not regard him as a very eloquent preacher in an English pulpit. He
commanded the attention of his audience by his strong, clear, earnest
presentation of the great religious truths which he believed with all
his soul. The personality and consecration of the man were a tremendous
force when he stood in a pulpit in his own land; what he lacked was the
ability which some speakers possess of carrying his audience with him,
almost irrespective of the thoughts to which they give utterance. But in
preaching to the Chinese he took on an extraordinary effectiveness. There
was in the man, in the movement of his thought, in his mastery of the
language, in the intense earnestness of his delivery, in the substance of
his sermons and addresses, much that captivated the native Christians,
and made others bow before his power. Mr. Baller, who had heard him
frequently, says: “His sermons were logical, direct, a unit in thought
and enriched with a copious vocabulary and illustrations. His points were
usually put from the Chinese point of view, so that a foreign air was
conspicuously absent.” To this day some of his addresses are recalled as
triumphs of real eloquence of speech; perhaps the most notable of these
being an address which he delivered at the opening of the English Baptist
Institution at Tsinan fu, in 1907. It was an opportunity such as never
before had come to a missionary in Shantung,—all the highest officials
of the province, and half-a-hundred others of lesser degree, being
present. He took as his theme “The Importance of an Upright Character,”
and more than rose to the height of the occasion. One of his most
memorable sermons was delivered before a convention of some three hundred
women gathered at Wei Hsien from the native church members of that region.

His ministry at Tengchow was fruitful of great good in many ways. One of
these was the growth of the church by the conversion of the natives. Just
before he removed to Wei Hsien, he recorded the fact that during all his
pastorate there had not been one of the quarterly communions at which
there were no additions. The beginning of his pastorate was signalized
by the accession of eighteen,—eight being from the college and six from
the girls’ school. Its close was marked by an accession of twenty-six, of
whom twenty-one were baptized, the largest number up to that date ever
receiving that sacrament, at the same time, in the Tengchow church. Only
one was from the college, all the rest having come in through the labors
of two associates in the station, Miss Snodgrass and Dr. Seymour.

Just as soon as by evangelistic itineration and other means converts
were made in the neighboring region, outside of Tengchow, it became
necessary for the missionaries to look after these scattered sheep in the
wilderness; and for a good while a large share of that work fell to Dr.
Mateer and his wife. In fact, it had been partly through their labors,
direct or indirect, that these converts had been won, and therefore
they felt it especially a duty to care for their nurture. That, of
course, involved a large variety of efforts. In the earlier years these
frequently consisted in part of interposition, so far as it was wise and
practicable to shield native Christians from gross wrongs to which they
were exposed. The hatred of the rulers and of most of the people for
foreigners and the foreign religion was bitter. Even at Tengchow the very
tombstones in the little cemetery where the missionaries buried their
dead were repeatedly broken,—an act regarded by the Chinese as the most
gross and cowardly insult that can be offered to a living man; yet it was
slow work to secure from the officials protection, or justice as to the
criminals. The case of Miao, of Chow Yuen, a district capital situated
fifty miles to the southwest of Tengchow, is specially notable. Early
in 1869 the Mateers and Margaret Brown, with a Chinese assistant, went
to itinerate, and on the way they visited him. When converted out in
his native district of Tsi Hea, he immediately began to endeavor to win
others to Christ. So he sent word to his clansmen and friends that he had
important business with them, and invited them to come to his house. This
occurred while the missionaries were there, and they witnessed what took
place at the gathering. Miao made a reception speech, in which he said:
“I have sent for you, and you have come. I said nothing in my letter, but
for you to come, and that I had an important matter to tell you. It is
this: I have led you in serving the Devil. There was nothing I would not
dare to do, and nothing that you would not care to follow me in doing.
I have now found something better. We have often engaged in doubtful
enterprises. I have now found something that there is no doubt about: it
is thoroughly reliable, resting on the strongest possible proof. I have
left the service of the Devil, and I want you to leave it. As I have led
you in his service, I want now to lead you out of it. I want to show
you the way and to present you to the true God. Examine for yourselves;
search to the bottom; and know that I am not deceiving myself nor you.
This doctrine of Jesus is absolute and unmistakable truth.” In writing
of this, Dr. Mateer adds: “These words were spoken with a fervor and an
emphasis that brought tears to my eyes. I thanked God for them, while I
prayed that they might not be in vain. Rice was then brought, and this
young Christian sat down with his friends and asked a blessing,—the first
they had ever heard,—praying for them directly and specifically. The
whole village came to hear, with many from neighboring villages. Save
the time occupied in eating, we preached to them nearly all day, keeping
it up till far into the night. The ladies also had crowds to hear them
all the time.” It was not long until Miao, partly of himself and partly
at the instigation of other native Christians, came to Chow Yuen, with
the determination to establish himself there as a preacher of his new
faith. In August of the same year the Mateers again visited him, this
time at his new place of residence, and did what they could to help him
in his chosen work. His education and character were such as to promise
well. Following the usual custom of a Chinaman when about to start a new
enterprise, a feast was made; some eighteen guests responded favorably
to invitations to be present, and at the close of the entertainment a
sort of meeting was held, and Dr. Mateer made a brief statement of what
Christianity is, what was the nature of this enterprise, and what was
Miao’s relation to it. He told the audience that the mission would pay
the rental of a small chapel, but that Miao would work gratuitously,
except so far as he might be assisted by the voluntary contributions of
his friends. All the Chinese present, with the exception of two members
from the Tengchow church, were non-Christians, yet the guests subscribed
a sum sufficient to meet the expenses of the feast and to leave a surplus
to go toward the support of the preacher. Some of his friends had already
promised to help to support him, and had presented him with a fine
signboard to hang in front of the room he occupied as his chapel, and
another for the back of the stand where he stood when speaking. All this
was so exceptional and so hopeful that Dr. Mateer came away rejoicing in
this apparent readiness even of the unevangelized to welcome the gospel.
But here begins quite another turn of the story. Miao had continued but
a few days at this work when a couple of constables seized him and the
man from whom he had rented the room for a chapel, and hurried them to
the office of the magistrate. The owner was accused of having rented a
house to “foreign devils,” and was forthwith beaten most cruelly to the
extent of two hundred blows. Miao was then called, charged with evil
doctrines and practices, such as kneeling in prayer and calling on unseen
personages. In reply he rehearsed the chief truths of the gospel, and in
answer to a taunting question, whether Jesus could suffer for him, he
said that he so believed. The magistrate ordered him to be beaten fifty
blows with the large bamboo and sent him chained to prison. That evening
he had a second hearing, and the next morning he was marched off, with a
chain about his neck and his hands bound together, thirty miles away to
Tsi Hea, but comforting himself in his weariness and suffering by singing
Christian hymns. The morning after his arrival he was called before the
magistrate and confronted with charges forwarded from Chow Yuen—such as
being in league with foreign devils, using false pretense of preaching
religion, seducing the people by artful works, being possessed of secret
magical arts, taking forcible possession of a house, influencing the
people to form combinations dangerous to the state, and a whole rigmarole
of offenses, big and little. He was commanded to confess, and when he
would not, he was first beaten three hundred blows with the small bamboo,
and then he received a hundred more in the face. The second day he was
recalled, and when he still would not confess he was again beaten. The
magistrate being especially searching in his inquiry as to how Christians
prayed, and as to what they prayed for, Miao as the best explanation
he could give kneeled and prayed in his presence. At this stage of the
affair Dr. Mateer, having been informed of the situation, arrived, and
secured a promise from the officer that he would go no further until he
heard from his superiors; and on his return to Tengchow he reported the
case to the American consul at Chefoo, though with little hope that under
the prevalent policy of the American government anything would be done.
In an article in “The Presbyterian Banner” he said: “I shall not soon
forget my feelings when I saw this Christian brother with a chain round
his neck and his body disfigured with bruises for the gospel’s sake.
I could not restrain the tears as I looked him in the face. It is one
thing to talk of persecution a thousand miles away, and another to see it
face to face. I assured him of our sympathy and unceasing prayers in his
behalf, and that I would do my utmost to rescue him.... Numbers of the
native Christians have boldly visited Miao in prison, and some of them
even prayed with him. All have been stirred up to pray as never before,
and made to feel that their only hope is that God will interpose on their
behalf. This young Christian has been guilty of no offense against the
state. The charges preferred by the officers are pure fabrications, the
inventions of malice and hatred to the truth, and would never have been
entertained by the officer had he not been only too glad of a pretext to
get the Christians in his power.” So soon as possible Dr. Mateer went to
Chefoo to see the American consul, and on his return home he learned that
Miao had been released, under some restrictions as to his whereabouts;
but no amends were made for the gross injustice done.

There was still a long sequel to this affair. After the period which
has since intervened the story seems to be unworthy of the dignity of a
full recital here; though it might be interesting to some as an example
of obstacles encountered by the work of missions away from places where
foreign influences are commonly powerful enough to prevent them. A
condensed account must suffice. It should be remembered that it was in
August that the persecution of Miao occurred. The purpose of it, at least
in part, was to shut Christianity out of Chow Yuen. To allow this would
have been to inflict on that cause a blow that probably would encourage
opposition of a like kind in other localities; and therefore it evidently
was the duty of the missionaries to prevent it if practicable. Especially
was it true of Dr. Mateer that he was too resolute a spirit to yield to
such a violation of rights secured under treaty with foreign governments.
Consequently late in November he went again to Chow Yuen, in order to
secure a house that could be used as a chapel; for in the interval
between these visits the room previously occupied for this purpose had
gone into other hands and was no longer available. The magistrate also
had been promoted, and another filled his place. Dr. Mateer soon found
a house, rented it, and secured the approval of the magistrate. Then
followed a series of chicanery, brutality, deceit, low cunning, and petty
meanness running over several months, and compelling two more trips by
him in the dead of winter. Once he took with him two other missionaries,
and they went armed with pistols in order to defend themselves if
attacked. The old woman who rented the room to him, and who in so doing
had been animated by ill will to her relatives and by a desire for money,
was seized and beaten by members of her own family, and likewise by the
magistrate. The same gang beat the middleman who, according to Chinese
custom, had negotiated the bargain. The whole rental was only about ten
dollars. Petty and miserable as the affair was, it had its ludicrous
features; as, for instance, when Dr. Mateer, in his determination not
to be ousted from the house until some satisfactory arrangement was
made, picked up the old woman and set her down on the outside, where she
exhausted her strength in billingsgate. It was not until the beginning of
March that the trouble at Chow Yuen was finally ended. The issue was a
triumph in the main for the missionary; another acceptable room was, with
the official approval of the magistrate, secured for a chapel, and the
money that had been paid for the rental of the other house was refunded.
The best of all was the fate that overtook the man who had been the
ringleader in the long series of wrongdoings toward the representatives
of Christianity. The magistrate did his best to shield this fellow, but
at last he had to yield. He called the man into his presence, and this
is what was done, as related by Dr. Mateer: “He was required to knock
head to me; and then I took him in hand, and though he tried to evade,
I compelled him to own up to his sin, and to make a distinct promise of
amendment; and then the substance of what he said was put on record by
the clerk, and a copy was given me.” It all illustrates what a determined
man who has right on his side may accomplish even in an out-of-the-way
city in China. It is characteristic of Dr. Mateer that in one place in
his Journal during this wearisome affair he says that if it were not for
his school he would go to Chow Yuen, and stay there until a settlement is
reached. Perhaps in later years Dr. Mateer and his associates would have
regarded it as inexpedient to go so far in the defense of a convert; but
in those earlier days this was a battle for toleration of Christianity,
and not a mere struggle to right the wrongs of an individual convert.

Other incidents of the dark side to the work of caring for the native
Christians might be given, but I have thought it best to turn chiefly to
the brighter phases of the subject. Of these there were many, and they
were of many kinds; but they were of so unsensational a character as
not now to be likely to awaken much interest in the reader. They belong
to the day of small things for the gospel in China; but let them not be
despised; by and by they will be treasured, if the record of them is
preserved, as the beginnings of the evangelization of Shantung. When they
occurred they brought the joy of approaching harvest. For example, in
connection with that last trip out to Chow Yuen, Dr. Mateer wrote:

    As it was Saturday, however, I felt I must try if possible to
    get home, so that the Sabbath service should not be neglected,
    when so many inquirers were waiting to hear. I found not only
    the ten who had come from Ping Tu, but some seven or eight
    from other places. I had, of course, to commence teaching them
    at once. I gave the half of each day to them, and continued
    it without interruption for three weeks. They gave diligent
    attention to the business of learning. At the same time Mrs.
    Mateer had a class of women who were seeking admission to the
    church. Last week all who were considered ready were examined
    by the session and passed upon. Twenty were received,—fifteen
    men and five women. They were all baptized together yesterday.
    It was a new sight in Tengchow, to see such a number standing
    up at once to profess the Lord Jesus Christ. I hope that we are
    all grateful as we should be for such a signal token of God’s
    presence with us. Our hearts are enlarged to look for still
    greater things in the future. Our schoolroom was packed to its
    utmost capacity, so that when the twenty rose up to present
    themselves for baptism, it was with great difficulty that room
    could be made for them to stand. Let us hope that the day of
    small things is past in this part of China. Chinese officials
    may persecute us, and foreign governments ignore us, but they
    cannot restrain God’s Spirit. There are still a number of
    inquirers.

In the earlier part of his missionary life he frequently made trips
of greater or less length to various places in the province to help
the native Christians by organizing churches, assisting their pastors,
holding services, stimulating to work for the gospel, administering the
sacraments, and in every other available manner forwarding the cause of
Christianity. Hospitality was gladly extended by the people; and it was
as gladly accepted, though not infrequently it introduced to quarters
that were odd and even uncanny. Dr. Mateer described guest rooms in which
he was entertained, and which were a strange combination of granary,
receptacle for lumber, bedchamber and “parlor,” crammed with all sorts of
corresponding articles, not excepting a coffin conspicuously displayed in
a corner. However, in his own home he lived without ostentation; and on
his journeys he did not find it hard to adapt himself to the customs of
his native entertainers.

In later years, though for the most part he left itinerations to the
younger members of the mission, yet he did not entirely discontinue them.
In February, 1896, for instance, he wrote to the secretaries of the Board
of Missions:

    Three weeks ago Mrs. Mateer and I returned from a trip of
    seventeen days to the district of Lai Chow, eighty miles
    distant. Our friends protested against our taking such a trip
    in the winter and in our state of health. We acted on our
    own judgment, however, and went, and are benefited rather
    than otherwise. The trip was exceedingly profitable. We
    confined our visit to two stations, holding special services
    each day—morning, afternoon and night. I received eight to
    the church. At one station a new church was organized, with
    twenty-six members, a branch from the older station. At this
    older station there are many inquirers, and the work is in
    a very hopeful condition, very largely as the result of the
    influence of a young man, an undergraduate of the college, who
    has been there teaching a day school for three years.

One of his last journeys of this sort was made not long before his
seventieth birthday, and the following is his record concerning it:

    From Tengchow we came overland to Wei Hsien in shentzas. I made
    it a point to spend the Sabbath at Lai Chow fu, and went out
    and preached morning and afternoon to our little church at Ning
    Kie, which is three miles from the city. Dr. Mills and I were
    instrumental in founding the station some thirty-six years ago.
    It has grown very slowly. Mrs. Mateer had visited it frequently
    in subsequent years, and had taught the women, and there are
    now a goodly proportion of women in the church. In the earlier
    years evangelists were sent to labor in the region, and to
    preach to and teach the people. In those days opposition to the
    gospel was very great, and progress was very slow. In later
    years, owing to change of policy, evangelists were not sent,
    save on an occasional visit, and the church declined, though
    it still lived. A few years ago special efforts were made, and
    the church increased somewhat, and finally a native pastor was
    settled over this church, in connection with another about
    fifteen miles away. Before the expiration of the first year the
    Boxer uprising brought the arrest and beating of the pastor and
    much persecution to the church. The pastor did not return. The
    church was discouraged, and the pastor was called elsewhere. If
    we now had an available man, he could be located at Lai Chow
    fu; but there is no man.

His last country trip was made some time in December, 1907. This is the
record: “Two weeks ago I went down on the railroad to Kiaochow to assist
our native pastors in a meeting for the women. There were about seventy
there from various other stations, besides those in town. The meeting
was most interesting, and must do a great deal of good. It was projected
and managed by the native pastors on their own account. There were five
native pastors present, and helping in the meeting. Many women spoke and
some made set addresses.” There were approximately one hundred and fifty
present, many of whom walked miles to be there. His own speech was a plea
to the mothers to consecrate their sons to the ministry, and the tears
ran down his cheeks as, while making it, he spoke of his own mother.

The reader needs to bear in mind that Dr. Mateer did not operate as an
independent individual, but as the agent of a thoroughly organized
system, in conformity with the government of the Presbyterian Church
and the regulations of the Board of Missions. Of these agencies there
is one that lies wholly outside the constitutional provisions of the
denomination, but that is approved as a part of the machinery needed for
the foreign field. This is what is called the “mission.” Its members
are the missionaries sent out by the Board and residing near enough to
meet together for the transaction of business. To the mission belong
such duties as to locate members and appoint their work, to make annual
estimates of funds and reënforcements needed, to receive the money from
the Board, and to apply it, according to directions, general or specific.
Dr. Mateer had much to do with inaugurating the “executive committees”
now so widely adopted by the missions. Many questions affecting the
operations sustained through the Board, of necessity came before the
annual mission meeting for discussion and action. Lines of policy as to
conduct of the work out in the field, if involving important features,
are left for decision to the Board; but full and frank consideration
of them by the members of the missions, either when in session or as
individuals, is usually welcomed.

An important discussion in which Dr. Nevius and Dr. Mateer were
especially conspicuous arose on their field over a theory advanced by
Dr. Nevius in his “Methods of Missions.” It was no personal controversy,
though, of course, the respective personalities of two such strong,
positive, earnest men inevitably tinged it. The question at issue
mainly concerned the pecuniary support of native Christians as agents
in the evangelization of their own people. No attempt need here be made
to state with fullness the positions taken or the arguments employed.
Broadly, the policy advocated by Dr. Nevius was that the main work of
evangelization should be thrown on the native Christians, and that those
who could read and understand “the doctrine” should voluntarily and
without compensation instruct those who could not; while the foreign
missionaries, paid as heretofore by the Board, should give themselves
to a general superintendence and to periodical examinations of the
catechumens and scholars taught by the native church members. Dr.
Mateer was just as earnestly as Dr. Nevius in favor of utilizing native
Christians in the evangelization of their people, and was just as eager
to develop among them self-support, but he was thoroughly convinced that
conditions were not ripe in China for the radical policy of withholding
from native laborers, as a rule, all pay from the funds of the Board;
and that an attempt of this sort before the proper time would result in
serious disaster. This brief statement will suffice to show that it was
a question over which wise and good men might readily differ, and that
the fact that they discussed it earnestly and fully is a sign of healthy
life. It seems to me to be a problem that cannot be satisfactorily
solved by theoretical argument, or by votes in a mission, or by even
the decision of a board. The only crucial test is actual trial. All that
needs to be said further as to this discussion is, on the one hand, to
emphasize the fact that Dr. Mateer, in his care of the native Christians
and churches, often labored hard and long to bring up congregations, in
the support of their pastors and evangelists, to the measure of giving
for which they were able; and, on the other hand, that he thought he
saw in certain fields evidence of the bad consequences of the policy he
controverted.

Until it is desirable to organize the churches of a given foreign
missionary field, after the order prescribed by the Presbyterian form
of government, the mission must continue in the entire supervision;
but it is the practice, just as soon as the way is open, to set up
presbyteries and synods, and to commit to them those matters which
belong to their jurisdiction. In these bodies ruling elders, as the
official lay representatives of the native churches, and all the native
ordained ministers sit as the equals in authority with the ordained
foreign ministers. The Board, unless in exceptional cases, has not been
accustomed to turn over to them the administration of the funds forwarded
for use on the field, or such matters as concern the policy and plans
it adopts; but all that pertains to the organization of churches, the
settlement of pastors, the acceptance of candidates for the ministry and
their licensure and ordination, and the administration of discipline
for the ministers, with complaints and appeals from the churches, is
left to the presbytery. Of course, as converts and churches and native
ministers increase, the tendency is to put them, as the majority, in
control in these bodies. It is a system which opens the way for some
dangers; nevertheless it is, in the nature of the situation, the only
course to pursue, and unless abused, it has a most wholesome influence on
the native Christians. It brings home to them the fact that, equally with
the foreigners who have given them the gospel, they have privileges as
members of the church of Christ, and also their responsibility as such.
Dr. Mateer believed with all his heart in the setting up of these regular
ecclesiastical bodies so soon as possible. Late in November, 1865, he
was one of the little band who organized the Presbytery of Shantung, at
a meeting held at Chefoo, when as yet there were no native ministers to
take part. The next meeting was held the following October at Tengchow,
and he was elected moderator and stated clerk. It is evident that if a
presbytery is to be of any considerable value to a native member the
language used must be his own, not that of the foreign missionary. With
this understanding, the following from Dr. Mateer’s Journal concerning
that meeting can be better appreciated: “It was voted that hereafter all
the proceedings be in Chinese, and at it we went. It was very awkward at
first, making and putting motions, but after some practice we got along
better. We had a very pleasant meeting indeed. One of the chief items of
business was a call presented by the native church for Mr. Mills, which
he accepted, and we arranged for his installation.”

It was ten years before such progress had been made out in the province
that it was practicable to hold a presbytery in the rural regions. In
a letter to his mother, dated December 24, 1877, Dr. Mateer said: “The
meeting of the presbytery in the country marks an era in our progress in
Shantung. Many of the Christians from all the region were assembled, and
evidently got much good from what they saw and heard. Our presbytery is
getting to be an important event, and a power among the native churches.
Our desire is that it may be more and more felt.” Sometimes the meetings
were saddened by the cases of discipline, after a native ministry began
to be enrolled; but if the case demanded it, even deposition from the
sacred office and excommunication from the church were imposed, and the
native elders and ministers were sturdy supporters of adequate sentences.
In contrast with this was the joy of receiving candidates for the
ministry, and sending them out to preach the gospel as they seemed to be
ready for that work. Occasionally a man up in years, and without thorough
education, but apparently qualified to be effective as a preacher, is
authorized by the presbytery to “exercise his gifts”; but usually those
who offer themselves are young men who after long courses of study, and
careful examination, are sent on this errand. For instance, in his report
for 1874 as stated clerk, Dr. Mateer said:

    Considerable time was taken up in the presbytery by the
    examination of candidates for the ministry. These were
    thorough, and so far as they went were sustained with great
    credit. One candidate was licensed to preach. He is not young,
    as licentiates usually are, being about sixty. He is, however,
    full of zeal for God, and may yet do good service. One of our
    licentiates was ordained as an evangelist. This is the first
    native preacher who has been ordained by this presbytery. It
    marks a new step in our work, one for which we are devoutly
    thankful to God. We have no more important work to do than to
    raise up well-qualified natives to preach the gospel to their
    countrymen. We trust this one will soon be followed by others.

Dr. Mateer was careful to treat the native elders and ministers as the
equals of the foreign missionaries, in the ecclesiastical bodies and
elsewhere; and as a consequence he commanded their confidence, so that
he was able sometimes to render important services by healing threatened
dissensions. This, as might be supposed, was especially true of his own
“boys,” who had as students learned to revere both his judgment and his
fraternal spirit.

In writing to “The Presbyterian Banner” concerning the meeting of the
Presbytery of Shantung, in September, 1869, he said: “The matter of
the formation of a synod in China was discussed, and a circular letter
was prepared, and ordered to be sent to the other presbyteries urging
the propriety of such a step at once. It is now twenty years since the
General Assembly took action looking toward and opening the way for the
formation of this synod.” That body held its first meeting at Shanghai
in October of the following year. The synod in the Presbyterian system
is the next higher organization above the presbytery, and consists of
all the ordained ministers of a larger district already containing three
or more presbyteries, and of ruling elders representing the churches;
or it may be constituted from delegates appointed by the presbyteries
on a fixed basis. It has the right to review all presbyterial action,
and also has authority to originate measures within its constitutional
jurisdiction. Among the missionaries in China at that time there was a
considerable number who regarded the synod as a sort of fifth wheel to
the coach, and as not likely to be capable of rendering a service worth
its cost in money and time. Under indirect form this phase of the subject
came into warm and protracted debate in that first meeting, and may be
said to have been fought out to a settlement. Dr. Mateer was a strong
believer in the importance of the synod, and in debate, and in other
ways, he threw the whole weight of his influence avowedly on that side
of the issue, and helped to win. Other problems were of such a character
as also to arouse his interest to a high degree. Ought the language used
in the body to be limited to the Mandarin or ought it to include local
dialects? On this question, of course, he stood for the Mandarin. Ought
a theological institution to be established; and if so, where? As to
this, a sort of compromise was effected, and an appeal was sent home for
a share in the “Memorial Fund,” to establish in China one or more such
schools, but leaving location to be determined later. The synod consisted
of twenty-four members, ten of them being foreign missionaries, and
fourteen native pastors and elders. The proceedings had to be translated,
during the various sessions, into several different dialects, in order
to be made intelligible to all. The body sat for ten days, and then
adjourned to assemble the next year at Ningpo. It was in connection with
Dr. Mateer’s attendance at Shanghai that he was induced to take temporary
charge of the mission press.

The second meeting of the synod was held at Ningpo. Dr. Mateer was chosen
moderator. Writing in his Journal concerning that meeting, he said:

    The great difficulty of the synod was the language, and this
    was indeed no small embarrassment. As I was moderator, I felt
    it more than any other. It was all I could do to tell what
    was going on at times. If it had not been for the practice
    I had through the summer in Shanghai, I should have been
    quite lost. The most interesting discussion we had was on the
    qualifications of candidates for the ministry. The native
    members insisted that they must learn English, and the foreign
    members opposed. The native brethren finally carried their
    point. The discussion at some points of its progress was really
    exciting, and not a little amusing.

The next meeting was held at Chefoo, and as the retiring moderator he
preached the opening sermon. In his Journal he says: “I had prepared the
sermon quite carefully, having written it all out, and so had to read it.
It is the only sermon I ever wrote out fully in Chinese. I found reading
a Chinese sermon very awkward and embarrassing.” A committee of which
he was a member had been appointed by the preceding meeting at Ningpo
to prepare for deliberative bodies a compendium of technical terms,—for
the lack of which in Chinese they had been seriously hindered,—and also
to formulate rules of order. They made a report which was approved, and
authorized for use in the synod and in the presbyteries.

One other excerpt from the records of his pen must conclude the story
of his work in the synod, though it was continued down through his
subsequent years. He said:

    Delegates, officially deputed, were present from the mission
    of the Presbyterian Church South; also from the mission of
    the United Presbyterian Church in Scotland; and from the
    independent Presbytery of Amoy, composed of the missions of the
    American Dutch Reformed and the English Presbyterian Churches
    combined. They all expressed a desire for mutual coöperation,
    and for the ultimate union of all the Presbyterians in China
    into one Chinese Presbyterian Church. A committee was appointed
    to correspond with the various Presbyterian bodies or missions
    in China, and prepare the way for an ultimate union. This union
    may not be accomplished for many years, but that it should come
    as soon as practicable seems to be the almost unanimous opinion
    of all concerned.

In 1907 one long advance was made toward the realization of the desire
so earnestly expressed by that synod a third of a century before.
After preliminary consultations extending over a number of years,
representatives of eight distinct missions, operated by as many different
Presbyterian denominations of Europe and America, met together, and
constituted “The Presbyterian Church of China,” and also offered a
welcome to any other Chinese churches of like faith and practice to
unite with them. Dr. Mateer thought that on account of the size of China
and the consequent expense of travel and variety of speech, it would be
better to make two ecclesiastical bodies out of this material. Belonging
to the new organization, there were, besides the foreign missionaries,
about a hundred native ministers, and forty thousand communicants. Dr.
Mateer was not a member of the body which met to declare and organize
this union; but, being present, he was invited to sit as a corresponding
member. Under the regulations of his American denomination, the names of
ordained foreign missionaries entering such new churches on the foreign
field as that just mentioned are enrolled in the minutes of the home
General Assembly on a separate list; and these ministers are entitled to
be received by the presbyteries without the examination required of those
who come from other denominations in foreign countries. This was the
ecclesiastical status of Dr. Mateer when he died. He was a member of the
Presbyterian Church in China; but he was still enrolled by the church of
his fathers.

The highest of all the organizations within the Presbyterian system is
the General Assembly. Its supervision, within constitutional limits,
extends over synods, presbyteries, and individual ministers and churches,
and it has other distinct functions pertaining to the entire denomination
throughout the world. Dr. Mateer was a commissioner from his presbytery
in China to the Assembly which met in 1880 in New York; and again to
the Assembly which met in Los Angeles in 1903. In this last he was
nominated for moderator, but failed of election, for reasons not in any
way disparaging to him. It is well understood that an election to that
office is contingent on so many incidental things that the choice can
seldom be foreseen. Local influences at Los Angeles were strongly thrown
in favor of the successful candidate, meaning by these the representation
in the Assembly and the Presbyterian visitors from all the Rocky Mountain
country and from the Pacific coast. Besides, to many of the commissioners
Dr. Mateer was a man but slightly known. His work had been great, but
it had also been quiet. Nor when on his furloughs had he in speaking to
the churches won renown by bursts of missionary eloquence. He made a
very creditable run for the moderatorship, and was beaten by a man of
high standing in the church. He was appointed chairman of the Judicial
Committee.




XI

THE SHANTUNG COLLEGE

    “While I live I cannot cease to have a vital interest in the
    college.... I cannot bear to be wholly away from the college to
    which my life has been given.”—LETTER TO SECRETARY BROWN, April
    10, 1907.


The change of the name of the school which Dr. Mateer had founded and
nurtured for nearly two decades was made at the formal request of the
members of the Shantung Presbyterian Mission, sent to the Board under
date of February 14, 1881. It was accompanied by a “plan,” and that part
of the paper was as follows:

    I. That the Tengchow Boys’ High School be organized into and
    constituted a college, to be called “The College of Shantung.”

    II. That it be carried on and governed by a board of six
    trustees nominated by the Shantung Mission, and confirmed by
    the Board of Foreign Missions.

    III. That the college embrace a six years’ course of study
    in Chinese classics, general science, and Christian ethics;
    including particularly “The Four Books” and “Five Classics,”
    Chinese history, with Biblical and general history,
    mathematics, physical, mental and moral sciences, evidences of
    Christianity, and so forth.

    IV. That the aim of the college be to educate thoroughly both
    in Chinese and western learning; and to do this from the
    standpoint and under the influence of Christianity.

    V. That the Chinese language be the medium of instruction
    throughout the course, English being taught only as an extra in
    special cases.

    VI. That there be connected with the college a department to
    prepare pupils to enter it.

    VII. That it be the ultimate design to make the students
    attending the college self-supporting; and that in order to do
    this the style of living be strictly on the Chinese plane; and
    that natives be trained as fast as possible to man the college
    with efficient professors.

    VIII. That the college be located for the present at Tengchow,
    leaving open the question of its removal to a more central
    position at some future time.

For this request the main reasons were added _in extenso_. They are too
long to be given here; but they can be, in the main, compressed into two
general statements. One of these was the need of a high-grade institution
of this sort in northern China, and especially in the great province of
Shantung. It was conceded that Tengchow was not as central a location as
the college might ultimately require; but, being a literary city and a
treaty port, and as yet free from the special temptations and corrupting
influences of a mixed foreign population, it at least temporarily had
marked advantages. The other general statement is that the institution
was already in fact a college by reason of its curriculum, and was
equipped with buildings and outfit suitable for the advanced work which a
college ought to do. In order that it might retain the position it had
won, and in order to secure endowment and reputation, the new name was
very desirable.

In a letter dated April 4, 1885, the mission appealed to the Board for
a new house to be built for the accommodation of the chief foreign
assistant in the college, and incidentally gave a statement as to the
plant. They said: “At a remarkably small cost to the Board it has come
into possession of plain but extensive premises, which are very well
adapted to the purpose. With the small additions and changes proposed for
the current year it will have good boarding and dormitory accommodations
for eighty or ninety pupils, with roomy yards and courts. It has also
two large schoolrooms, three recitation rooms, one large lecture room,
a philosophical apparatus room, a chemical apparatus room with a shop
and storeroom. It has also a substantial stone observatory, costing one
hundred and sixty dollars.” In 1894, a grant for new buildings having
been made by the Board, steps looking to their erection were taken.
Writing of these, March 23, 1895, Dr. Mateer said, “We staked off the
ground to-day, and will make a start at once.” That year, however, on
account of his duties on the committee for the revision of the Mandarin
translation of the Scriptures, he laid down the presidency of the
college, though he did not cease to assist in the instruction and in
the management of it. February 8, 1896, he wrote to the Board: “The
headship of the college is now in Mr. Hayes’s hands, and with it the
major part of the work. I am especially thankful that the interests of
the college are in the hands of a capable man; nevertheless, when I am
in Tengchow a considerable share of the general responsibility still
clings to me, and no inconsiderable share of the work, and Mrs. Mateer’s
share is in nowise decreased. Our new buildings are finished, and are an
unspeakable convenience. The wonder is how we did without them so long.
They have served to raise our college in the estimate of the people of
the whole city.” These new buildings consisted of a main edifice of two
stories, dormitories, and chemical laboratory. The old temple structure
was converted into a chapel and various alterations were made as to uses
of the smaller houses. The original estimate of the outlay was eight
thousand dollars. Whether this sum was sufficient is not stated in any
of the records that have come into my hands; but inasmuch as nothing is
said about a deficit, it is probable that there was none, except such as
Dr. Mateer and others on the ground met out of their own pockets. The new
buildings were supplied with steam heat and electric light from a house
specially fitted for the purpose, with a tall chimney that seemed as if a
landmark for all the region; and some other additions were subsequently
made by means of special contributions. Taken altogether, the plant, into
the possession of which the Tengchow College eventually came, though
consisting largely of houses that were externally without architectural
pretension, and in part of the Chinese order and somewhat inadequate, was
extensive enough to indicate the magnitude of the work the institution
was doing.

One of the things on which the members of the mission laid stress in
their request for the elevation of the school to the rank and title of
a college was that it already had “a good collection of philosophical
and chemical apparatus, believed to be the largest and best-assorted
collection in China.” Dr. Mateer also was accustomed to speak of this
apparatus with a pride that was an expression, not of vanity, but of
satisfaction in a personal achievement, that was eminently worth while.
For instance, in his letter to his college classmates in 1897, he said:
“I have given some time and considerable thought and money to the making
of philosophical apparatus. I had a natural taste in this direction, and
I saw that in China the thing to push in education was physical science.
We now have as good an outfit of apparatus as the average college in
the United States,—more than twice as much as Jefferson had when we
graduated; two-thirds of it made on the ground at my own expense.” It
was a slow, long job to produce it. Early in his career as a teacher in
the Tengchow school he had little need of apparatus because the pupils
were not of a grade to receive instruction in physics; but it was not
very long until he recorded his difficulty, for instance, in teaching
pneumatics without an air pump. Some of his instruction at that general
period was given to a class of students for the ministry. He was always
careful to let it be known that his school was in no degree a theological
seminary; he held it to be vital to have it understood that it was an
institution for what we would call secular instruction, though saturated
through and through with Christianity. But again and again throughout his
life he took his share in teaching native candidates for the ministry;
and before the college proper afforded them opportunity to study western
science he was accustomed to initiate these young men into enough
knowledge of the workings of nature to fit them to be better leaders
among their own people. Thus, writing in his Journal, February, 1874,
concerning his work with the theological class that winter, he said:

    I heard them a lesson every day,—one day in philosophy
    [physics] and the next in chemistry. I went thus over optics
    and mechanics, and reviewed electricity, and went through the
    volume on chemistry. I practically gave all my time to the
    business of teaching and experimenting, and getting apparatus.
    I had carpenters and tinners at work a good part of the time.
    I got up most of the things needed for illustrating mechanics,
    and a number in optics; also completed my set of fixtures for
    frictional electricity, and added a good number of articles
    to my set of galvanic apparatus. With my new battery I showed
    the electrical light and the deflagration of metals very well.
    The Ruhmkorff coil performed very well indeed, and made a fine
    display. I had an exhibition of two nights with the magic
    lantern, using the oxyhydrogen light. In chemistry I made
    all the gases and more than are described in the book, and
    experimented on them fully. They gave me no small amount of
    trouble, but I succeeded with them all very well. I made both
    light and heavy carbureted hydrogen, and experimented with
    them. Then I made coal gas enough to light up the room through
    the whole evening. Altogether I have made for the students a
    fuller course of experiments in philosophy or chemistry than I
    saw myself. They studied well and appreciated very much what
    they saw. I trust the issue will prove that my time has not
    been misspent. I have learned a great deal myself, especially
    in the practical part of experiment-making. It may be that I
    may yet have occasion to turn this knowledge to good account. I
    have also gathered in all a very good set of apparatus, which I
    shall try to make further use of.

It was in this way that the collection was begun. As he added to it in
succeeding years, every piece had a history that lent it an individual
interest. Much of it continued to be produced by his own hand, or at
least under his own superintendence, and at the expense of himself, or
of his friends, who at his solicitation contributed money for this use.
Some of the larger and more costly articles were donated by people to
whom he appealed for help, and therefore peculiar personal associations
clustered about them. For instance, when home on his first furlough, he
met Cyrus W. Field, on a voyage to Europe, and interested him in the
Tengchow School. After reaching China again, he wrote a letter to Mr.
Field and solicited from him the gift of a dynamo. In the course of some
months a favorable response was received; and, eventually, that dynamo
rendered most valuable service in lighting the buildings. Two friends,
whose acquaintance he had made in the United States,—Mr. Stuart, of New
York, and Mrs. Baird, of Philadelphia,—gave him money to buy a ten-inch
reflecting telescope, with proper mountings and accompaniments; and when,
as so often happens in such matters, there was a considerable deficit,
his “Uncle John” came to the relief. In ordering through an acquaintance
a set of telegraph instruments he explained that the Board was not
furnishing the means to pay for it, but that it was purchased with his
own money, supplemented by the gifts of certain friends of missions and
education.

This must suffice as to the history of that collection of apparatus. It
is, however, enough to show why he had so much pride in it.

It was in 1895 that he laid down the headship of the college. He took
this step all the more readily because in his successor, Rev. W. M.
Hayes, now of Tsingchow fu, he had entire confidence as to both character
and ability. On his arrival in China Mr. Hayes was immediately associated
with Dr. Mateer in the school, and showed himself to be a thoroughly
kindred spirit. He continued at the head of the college until 1901,
when he resigned his position in order to start for the governor of the
province a new college at Tsinan fu. It may not be out of place to
add here that the governor at that time was Yuan Shih K’ai, a man of
large and liberal views, and that there was, as to the new college he
was founding, in the requirements nothing that made it improper for a
Christian and a minister of the gospel to be at the head of it. It is
due to Mr. Hayes to say that in accepting this position he was confident
that he had the approval of nearly all the missionaries associated
with him. However, it was not very long until Yuan was transferred to
the viceroyalty of the province of Chi-li, which dominates Peking, and
a successor took his place in Shantung, who was of a different mind,
and who introduced such usages into the new institution that Mr. Hayes
felt conscientiously bound to lay down his office. He is now one of the
instructors in the theological department of the Shantung Christian
University, into which the college at Tengchow has been merged.

In the request of the members of the mission for the elevation of the
Tengchow school to the rank and title of a college one of the articles
specifically left the ultimate location of the institution an open
question. The main objection to Tengchow was its isolation. It is away
up on the coast of the peninsula that constitutes the eastern end of
the province, and it is cut off from the interior by a range of rather
rugged hills in the rear. Though a treaty port, its commerce by sea has
long been inconsiderable, and gives no promise of increase. At the time
when that request was made, it is likely that some, though signing,
would have preferred that the college should be removed down to Chefoo.
To any project of that sort Dr. Mateer was inflexibly, and with good
reason, opposed; and it never assumed such strength as to give him much
apprehension. Along in the later “eighties” and in the early “nineties”
the question of location again arose in connection with the Anglo-Chinese
college which Dr. A. P. Happer, of the Presbyterian missions in China,
undertook to found. He progressed so far as to raise a considerable sum
of money for endowment and had a board appointed for the control. The
project at no stage received the hearty support of Dr. Mateer, though,
of course, so long as it did not threaten hurt to his own college or
the ideas which it represented he did not make any fight against it.
Dr. Happer had long been a missionary in southern China, and was beyond
question earnestly devoted to his work; his idea was that by means of
the Anglo-Chinese college he would raise up an efficient native ministry
for the churches. The conviction of Dr. Mateer was that, so far as this
result is concerned, the institution, by the very nature of the plan,
must be a comparative failure. English was to be given a large place
in the curriculum, and for students it was to draw especially on such
as could pay their own way. In a long letter dated March 18, 1887,
called out by the question of the location of the proposed college, and
signed by Dr. Mateer and Mr. Hayes, they frankly expressed to one of
the secretaries of the Board their reasons for believing so strongly
that an institution conducted on the plan proposed could not realize
the main object which its founder sought. They had found it necessary
years before, in the Tengchow College, to meet the question as to the
introduction of English, and the decision was in favor of using Chinese
alone in the curriculum; and so long as the school remained in charge of
Mateer and Hayes, they rigidly excluded their own native tongue. When the
Tengchow school was just emerging into the Tengchow College, Dr. Mateer
thus expressed his convictions on that subject:

    If we should teach English, and on this account seek the
    patronage of the officers and the rich, no doubt we could get
    some help and countenance. We would be compelled, however, to
    give up in good measure the distinctively religious character
    of the school. We would get a different class of pupils, and
    the religious tone of the school would soon be changed in spite
    of us. Another result would also be almost inevitable, namely,
    the standard of Chinese scholarship would fall. The study of
    English is fatal to high acquisition in the Chinese classics.
    We would doubtless have great trouble in keeping our pupils
    after they were able to talk English; they would at once go
    seeking employment where their English would bring them good
    wages. Tengchow, moreover, is not a port of foreign residents,
    but rather an isolated and inland city, and it would not be a
    good place to locate a school in which teaching English is made
    a prominent feature.

His observation since had served to confirm him in the conviction of
years before, and in the letter to a secretary of the Board, Hayes united
with him in stating clearly and forcibly their joint opinion on the
subject.

In casting about for a location for the Anglo-Chinese college, the choice
narrowed down so that it lay between Canton, Nanking, Shanghai, and
Tientsin. Chefoo was mentioned, but not seriously considered, yet even
the possibility of location there, although remote, was so important a
matter to the Shantung College that it compelled the men at the head
of that institution to be on the alert so long as the question was
undetermined. By and by Dr. Happer became disposed to turn over the
management of his projected college to some other person, and he wrote to
Dr. Mateer, sounding him as to the vacancy, should it occur. The scheme
at that time seemed to be to locate the new institution at Shanghai, and
to unite with it the Shantung College; and in a long letter in response,
written January 9, 1890, Dr. Mateer went very candidly over the entire
situation. Among other things he said:

    It will be necessary, however, to settle the policy of the
    college, and also its headship, before making any definite
    move. Whoever undertakes to make English and self-support
    prominent features, and then aims at a Christian college, has,
    as things are at present in China, a difficult contract on
    his hands. I for one do not feel called to embark in such an
    enterprise, and my name may as well be counted out.... Nor can
    the school at Tengchow be moved away from Shantung. We might
    go, and the apparatus might be moved; but not the pupils. It
    is futile to talk of them or any considerable number of them
    coming to Shanghai; nor will pupils go from central China north
    to be educated save in exceptional cases. The distance and the
    expense are both too great. Each section of China must have its
    own schools.

Not long afterward the situation was such that Dr. Mateer and Mr. Hayes
addressed to the trustees of the endowment a paper in which a suggestion
was made that under certain conditions the fund raised by Dr. Happer
should be turned over to the Shantung College. In that paper there was
a frank statement of their attitude as to English. They were entirely
willing to introduce that language, but only under such conditions that
it could not seriously alter the character and work of the institution.
The paper is too long for introduction here. It will suffice to quote
from a letter sent by Dr. Mateer at the same time to one of the
secretaries of the Board, and dated February 9, 1891:

    There are one or two things I want to say in a less formal way.
    One is that in case our proposition in regard to English is not
    satisfactory, you will take care that the proposed school is
    not located in Chefoo as a rival of the college in Tengchow. It
    would be nothing short of suicidal for the Board to allow such
    a proceeding, and would be a great wrong, both to myself and
    to Mr. Hayes. We do not propose to engage in such a contest,
    but would at once resign, and seek some other sphere of labor.
    Again, I wish to call your attention to what is the real
    inwardness of our plan for English; namely, to teach it in such
    a way, and to such parties only, as will insure its being used
    in literary and scientific lines. We will not teach English
    merely to anyone, nor teach it to anyone who wants merely
    English. We will teach it to men, not to boys. Lastly, Mr.
    Hayes and I have for several years had in mind the idea of a
    post-graduate course in applied science, and have been waiting
    for my visit home to push it forward; and even if the present
    endowment scheme fails, we will still feel like pushing it, and
    introducing some English as already indicated.

Nothing came of the suggestion that the money should be turned over to
the Shantung institution.

Dr. Mateer still continued to help in the college at Tengchow, as he had
time and opportunity. Early in the “nineties,” and after the movement
just considered had failed to materialize, he solicited from the Board
the privilege of seeking to raise an endowment fund, but at that time he
was unable to secure their consent. At the beginning of 1900 the Board
changed their attitude, and authorized an effort to be made to secure
contributions for this purpose. Of course, in order to be successful in
this undertaking, a satisfactory plan for the control of the college was
a necessity; and as to this Dr. Mateer was consulted, and he gave his
opinions freely. His preference was expressed for a charter giving the
endowment a separate legal status, but providing that the members of the
Board of Foreign Missions, acting in this distinct capacity, should be
the trustees. The general oversight of the institution he thought should
be assigned to a “Field Board of Directors,” composed of members of the
Shantung Mission. This was not a scheme that entirely satisfied him. The
specter, on the one hand, of a diversion of the college into a school for
teaching English, and, on the other, of making it a theological seminary,
would not altogether down; but in the ultimate appeal to the members of
the Board of Foreign Missions he recognized a safeguard that was not
likely to prove inadequate. When he was on furlough in 1903, he spent
a considerable part of his time in soliciting permanent funds for the
college, then already removed to its present location; but he was unable
to secure much aid. Ada was with him; and she says of his experience in
this work, “He was so accustomed to success in whatever he undertook that
it was hard for him to bear the indifference of the rich to what seemed
to him so important.”

The transfer of the college to another location was a question that
would not permanently rest. So long as it was whether it should go from
Tengchow to Chefoo, or be swallowed up in another more pretentious
institution at Shanghai, and not yet in existence, it was comparatively
easy to silence the guns of those who talked removal. But at the opening
of the twentieth century, even out there in north China, important
changes indirectly affecting this problem had occurred. The missions had
been strengthened by a number of new men, who came fresh from the rush of
affairs in the United States, and eager to put their force into the work
in China in such a way that it would tell the most. Even China itself
was beginning to awake from the torpor of ages. In Shantung the Germans
were building railroads, one of them right through the heart of the
province, on by way of Wei Hsien to the capital, and from that point to
be afterward connected with Tientsin and Peking. It is not strange that,
under the new conditions, the young members of the mission especially
should desire to place the college which loomed up so largely and
effectually in the work to which they had consecrated their lives where
it could be in closer touch with the swarming millions of the land and
with the movements of the new times. February 26, 1901, Dr. Mateer wrote
to the Board:

    At a meeting of the Shantung Mission it was voted to remove the
    Tengchow College to Wei Hsien, and then give up the Tengchow
    station. Being at Shanghai, engaged in the translation work,
    I was not able to be present at the mission meeting, and it
    seems incumbent on me to say something on a matter of so much
    importance, and that concerns me so much.... First, with
    reference to the college. The major part of my life has been
    given to building up the Tengchow College, and, of course, I
    feel a deep interest in its future. As you can easily imagine,
    I am naturally loath to see it moved from the place where
    Providence placed it; and to see all the toil and thought given
    to fitting up the buildings, with heating, lighting, and the
    other appliances go for nothing; as also the loss of the very
    considerable sums of money I have myself invested in it. The
    Providence which placed the college in Tengchow should not be
    lightly ignored, nor the natural advantages which Tengchow
    affords be counted for nothing. It is not difficult to make out
    a strong case for Wei Hsien, and I am not disposed to dispute
    its advantages, except it be to question the validity of the
    assumption that a busy commercial center is necessarily the
    best place to locate a college. In view of the whole question,
    it seems to me that unless an adequate endowment can be
    secured—one which will put the college on a new basis—it will
    not pay the Board to make the sacrifice involved in moving the
    college to Wei Hsien.... However, I would rather go to Wei
    Hsien than be opposed strongly at Tengchow.

On that part of his contention he lost; and it would be useless now to
try to ascertain the respective merits of the two sides to that question.
The second part of the letter just cited discussed the abandonment of
Tengchow as a mission station. The plan of those who took the affirmative
of this debate was to leave that city to the Southern Baptists, who
almost forty years before had preceded the Presbyterians a few weeks
in a feeble occupation, but who had been entirely overshadowed by the
development of the college. For the retention of the station Dr. Mateer
pleaded with his utmost fervor and eloquence. Though the decision
remained in uncertainty while he lived, and the uncertainty gave him
much anxiety, large gifts, coming since, from a consecrated layman, have
rendered the retention of the Tengchow station secure. The wisdom of the
decision is vindicated by present conditions. At the close of 1909 the
station reported a city church with three hundred members; a Sabbath
school which sometimes numbers five hundred pupils; thirty out-stations
with about five hundred members; twenty-four primary schools, giving
instruction to three hundred and sixteen boys and girls, and taught by
graduates of the higher schools of the station; a girls’ high school with
an average enrollment of forty-six pupils, and for the year then closing
having twelve graduates, nearly all of whom became teachers; a boys’ high
school with an attendance of forty, and sending up a number of graduates
to the college at Wei Hsien or to other advanced institutions, and having
a normal department with a model primary department; and also a helpers’
summer school; besides other machinery for reaching with the gospel the
three millions of people gathered in the neighborhood of Tengchow. Nor
has the work of the Presbyterians in the least hampered that of the
Southern Baptists.

The actual removal of the college was not effected until the autumn of
1904. In the interval between the time when it was determined to take
this step and when it was actually accomplished a number of important
things affecting the course of Dr. Mateer’s life occurred. Mr. Hayes, as
elsewhere stated, resigned the presidency; and Rev. Paul D. Bergen, who
had come out to the mission in 1883, was chosen in his place. Dr. Mateer
had been so closely associated with Mr. Hayes, and had such complete
confidence in him, that the resignation came almost like a personal
bereavement; but he rose nobly out of the depths, and wrote home to the
Board: “Mr. Bergen is clearly the best man that our missions in Shantung
afford for the place. He is very popular with the Chinese, which is much
in his favor. The time is as auspicious as it is important. Educational
affairs are taking a great boom, and it looks as if Shantung was going to
lead the van. If it is properly supported the college should do a great
work.” During the interval here covered Dr. Mateer came to the United
States on his third and last furlough, reaching China again in the autumn
of 1903, and bringing with him some substantial fruits of his efforts for
the college.

On his arrival he was confronted by another great problem as to the
institution. A combination had already been almost effected by the
American Presbyterians and the English Baptists in Shantung for a
union in the work of higher education in the province. The matter had
already gone so far that, although he feared that the scheme would
bring about such radical changes as to endanger the real usefulness
of the institution, yet he made no serious opposition, and it went
steadily forward to consummation. Under the plan adopted the Shantung
Christian University was established; and provision was made for a
joint maintenance of three distinct colleges in it, each at a different
location, chosen because of mission and other conditions—a college of
arts and science at Wei Hsien, a theological college at Tsingchow fu, and
a medical college at Tsinan fu. The plan also provides for a university
council, to which is committed the general control of the institution,
subject, of course, to certain fundamental regulations; and of this body
Dr. Mateer was one of the original members. The first meeting was held
at Tsingchow fu near the end of 1903. Writing to one of the secretaries
of the Board of Missions concerning this, he said: “All were present.
Our meeting was quite harmonious. We elected professors and discussed
and drew out some general principles relating to the curriculum and
the general management. Theoretically things seem quite promising; the
difficulty will come in practical administration. The buildings at Wei
Hsien are all up to the first floor. There should be no difficulty in
getting all ready by next autumn, at which time the college ought by all
means to be moved.” Early the next summer he wrote: “I started to Wei
Hsien about a month ago, overland. I spent over two weeks taking down
and packing my goods, and so forth, including workshop, boiler, engine,
dynamo, and so forth. I found it quite a serious undertaking to get
all my miscellaneous goods packed up, ready for shipment on boats to
Wei Hsien.... I remained in Wei Hsien twenty-four days, unpacking my
effects, getting my workshop in order, and planning for the heating and
lighting outfit.” In the same letter he expressed himself as follows
concerning the theological college at Tsingchow fu: “It was certainly
understood at the meeting of the directors last winter that it was to be
much more than a theological seminary in the strict sense of the word. It
was understood, in fact, that it would have two departments,—a training
school and a theological seminary proper. In this way only can the full
measure of our needs be supplied.... With this organization it is not
unlikely that the school at Tsingchow fu will be larger than the college
at Wei Hsien.”

This narrative as to Dr. Mateer and the Shantung College is now
approaching its close, and most readers probably will prefer that, so
far as practicable, the remainder of it shall be told in his own words.
December 21, 1904, he wrote to a friend: “The college is now fully moved
to Wei Hsien, and has in it about a hundred and twenty students. The new
buildings are quite fine,—much superior to those we had in Tengchow. Mrs.
Mateer and I have moved to Wei Hsien to live and will make this our home.
We are living in the same house with my brother Robert, making all one
family. This arrangement suits us very well. I am not teaching in the
college, but I would not feel at home if I were away from it. I hope it
has a great future.” In his report for himself and wife, for the year
1904-05, he says: “The greater part of the autumn was spent in overseeing
the building and fitting up of a workshop, and in superintending the
setting up of a new thirty-two horse-power steam boiler for heating and
lighting the college, together with a system of steam piping for the
same; also the setting up of engine and dynamo and wiring the college
for electric lights. I also set up a windmill and pump and tank, with
pipes for supplying the college and several dwelling houses with water.
I also built for myself and Mrs. Mateer a seven-kien house in Chinese
style, affording a study, bedroom, storeroom, box room, and coal room.”
This little, narrow, one-story house constituted their home during the
rest of his life in Wei Hsien, though they still look their meals with
the other family. They sometimes called this house “the Borderland,” for
only a narrow path separated them from the small foreign cemetery at the
extreme corner of the compound. In November, 1905, he wrote to one of the
secretaries of the Board: “The college is, of course, delighted at the
prospect of a Science Hall. I take some credit for having prepared the
way for this gift from Mr. Converse.” In his report for the year 1906 he
said: “During the early part of the winter I spent considerable time,
planning, estimating, and ordering supplies for the lighting, heating,
and water supply of the new Science Hall at Wei Hsien.”

We are at length face to face with the last stage in the active
connection of Dr. Mateer with the college. February 26, 1907, he wrote to
one of the secretaries of the Board of Missions:

    I returned three days ago from the meeting of the College
    Directors at Tsingchow fu. The meeting was prolonged and a very
    important one. A number of important and embarrassing questions
    were before us.... You will hear from others, of course, and
    from the minutes, that Dr. Bergen resigned the presidency of
    the college, and that in our inability to find a successor
    I was asked to take the position temporarily, until other
    arrangements could be made, and Dr. Bergen was asked to remain
    as a professor, which he agreed to do. This provided for the
    teaching, and makes it possible for me to take the presidency
    without doing much teaching, which I could not do under present
    conditions.

During the period of his service in this capacity the college not only
did well in its regular work; it also made some important advances. The
total attendance was one hundred and eighty-one, and a class of ten was
graduated at commencement. At Tengchow he had always valued the literary
societies very highly, and these now received a fresh impetus. Several
rooms of the new Science Hall were brought into use; two additional rows
of dormitories were built, one for college and personal teachers and
workmen, and one for students; not to mention lesser matters.

Nevertheless he found his official position in certain ways very
uncomfortable. Some of the reasons of this were casual to the internal
administration, and cannot now be appreciated by outsiders, and are not
worth airing here. Others were of a more permanent nature, and had to do
with the future conduct and character of the institution. The question
of English had been for a while hushed to sleep; but it was now awake
again, and asserted itself with new vigor. In a letter dated December 19,
1907, he said: “I am strongly in favor of an English School, preferably
at Tsinan fu, but I am opposed to English in the college. It would very
soon destroy the high grade of scholarship hitherto maintained, and
direct the whole output of the college into secular lines.” His fear was
that if English were introduced the graduates of the institution would
be diverted from the ministry and from the great work of evangelizing
the people to commercial pursuits, and that it would become a training
school of compradors and clerks. Later the intensity of his opposition
to the introduction of English was considerably modified, because of the
advantage which he perceived to be enjoyed in the large union meetings,
by such of the Chinese as knew this language in addition to their own.
He saw, too, that with the change of times a knowledge of English had
come to be recognized as an essential in the new learning, as a bond of
unity between different parts of China, and as a means of contact with
the outside world. Looking at the chief danger as past, he expressly
desired that the theologues should be taught English. At any rate he had
been contending for a cause that was evidently lost. At this writing the
curriculum of the college offers five hours in English as an optional
study for every term of the four required years; and also of the fifth
year. Dr. Mateer, besides, was not fully in sympathy with a movement that
was then making to secure a large gift from the “General Education Fund”
for the endowment of the institution. In the letter just quoted he says:
“The college should be so administered by its president and faculty as
to send some men into the ministry, or it fails of its chief object. I
am in favor of stimulating a natural growth, but not such a rapid and
abnormal growth as will dechristianize it. I do not believe in the sudden
and rapid enlargement of the plant beyond the need at the time. It would
rapidly secularize the college and divert it entirely from its proper
ideal and work.” These questions were too practical, and touched the
vitals of the institution too deeply, to be ignored by earnest friends
on either side. Some things as to the situation are so transparent that
they can be recognized by any person who looks at it from not too close
a point of view. The entire merits of the argument were in no case
wholly on one side; and as a consequence it is not surprising that wise
and good men differed as they did; and the only decisive test is actual
trial of the changes advocated by the younger men. It is also perfectly
plain that in this affair we have only another instance of a state of
things so often recurring; that is, of a man who has done a great work,
putting into it a long life of toil and self-sacrifice, and bringing it
at length to a point where he must decrease and it must increase; and
where in the very nature of the case it must be turned over to younger
hands, to be guided as they see its needs in the light of the dawning
day. He can scarcely any longer be the best judge of what ought to be
done; but even if he were, the management must be left for good or ill to
them. That evidently is the fight in which Dr. Mateer came ultimately to
see this matter. He courageously faced the inevitable. In this, as in all
other cases, no personal animosity was harbored by him toward anyone who
differed from him.

October 27, 1907, he wrote to an associate on the Mandarin Revision
Committee: “I have now dissolved myself from the management of the
college, and shall have very little to do with it in the future. It
has cost me a great deal to do it, but it is best it should be so. I
am now free from any cares or responsibility in educational matters.”
In a letter to Secretary Brown, dated December 21, 1907, he said: “In
view of the circumstances I thought it best to resign at once, and
unconditionally, both the presidency and my office as director. I have
no ambition to be president, and in fact was only there temporarily
until another man should be chosen. I did not wish to be a director
when I could not conscientiously carry out the ideas and policy of a
majority of the mission. It was no small trial, I assure you, to resign
all connection with the college, after spending the major part of my
missionary life working for it. It did, in fact, seriously affect my
health for several weeks. I cannot stand such strains as I once did.”

One of the striking incidents of his funeral service at Tsingtao was
the reading of the statistics of the graduates of the Tengchow College,
including the students who came with the college to Wei Hsien. These
have since been carefully revised and are as follows: Total receiving
diplomas, 205; teachers in government schools, 38; teachers in church
schools, 68; pastors, 17; evangelists, 16; literary work, 10; in
business, 9; physicians, 7; post-office service, 4; railroad service,
2; Y. M. C. A. service, 2; customs service, 1; business clerks, 2;
secretaries, 1; at their homes, 6; deceased, 22. These graduates are
scattered among thirteen denominations, and one hundred schools, and in
sixteen provinces of China. About two hundred more who were students at
Tengchow did not complete the course of studies.

The institution since its removal has continued steadily to go forward.
The large endowment that was both sought and feared has not yet been
realized, and consequently the effect of such a gift has not been tested
by experience; but other proposed changes have been made. A pamphlet
published in 1910 reports for the college of arts and sciences an
enrollment of three hundred and six students, and in the academy, eighty.
The class which graduates numbers seventeen, all of whom are Christians.
Down to that year there had been at Wei Hsien among the graduates no
candidates for the ministry, but during 1910, under the ministration of
a Chinese pastor, a quiet but mighty religious awakening pervaded the
institution, and one outcome has been a vast increase in the number of
candidates for the ministry or other evangelistic work. The pamphlet
already quoted speaks of more than one hundred of the college students
who have decided to offer themselves for this work. It is appropriately
added that “such a movement as this amongst our students inspires us with
almost a feeling of awe.... Our faith had never reached the conception
of such a number as the above simultaneously making a decision.” It has
recently been decided to bring all the departments of the university to
Tsinan fu, the provincial capital.

In the theological college at Tsingchow fu, according to the last report,
there were eleven students in the regular theological department and one
hundred and twenty-eight in the normal school. In the medical college
at Tsinan fu there were thirteen young men. The aggregate for the whole
university rises to five hundred and thirty-eight. On the Presbyterian
side this all began with those six little boys, in the old Kwan Yin
temple, in the autumn of 1864, at Tengchow. To-day it is a university,
and is second to no higher institution of learning in China.

It is said that Dr. Mateer never led in prayer, either public or private,
that he did not most earnestly ask that the Lord would raise up Chinese
Christian men, who as leaders would bring many to Christ. His prayers
during the forty-five years of his missionary life are receiving a
wonderful answer at Wei Hsien and at Tsingchow fu.




XII

WITH APPARATUS AND MACHINERY

    “The things most likely to be needed in China, are first,
    electrical engineering, especially telegraphy, and second,
    civil engineering, especially surveying and laying out of
    railroads. Special preparation in one or both of these
    things would be very valuable. But what is more necessary
    for immediate use, and as a preliminary to these things, is
    a practical knowledge of scientific apparatus,—how to make
    and how to use it. I have myself picked it up from books,
    without any instructor, but only at a great expense of time and
    labor.”—LETTER TO A PROSPECTIVE TEACHER, October 29, 1888.


Whenever a group of the early acquaintances of Dr. Mateer talked together
about him, one thing certain to be mentioned was his achievements with
apparatus and machinery, both with the making and with the using of
them. Out in China his reputation for this was so great that it at
times came near to being a burden to him. We have already seen that
the temporary superintendence of the mission press at Shanghai was
thrust upon him, contrary to his own preference, and because, as he
expressed it in a letter at that time, the men in control considered
him a “Jack-of-all-trades,” able to do anything at which he might be
put. If they then did really think of him as no more than a man who
with machinery could do a great many things without performing any of
them thoroughly well, they did him a great injustice, which their
subsequent knowledge amply corrected. As the years went by, and in this
sphere of his multifarious activity he rose to larger and more difficult
achievements, his fame as to this spread far and wide among both natives
and foreigners. At no time, however, did he permit his efficiency in this
line to loom up in such a form or in such a degree as to seem even to
others to put his distinctively missionary labors into the background.
It is a significant fact that in the eulogiums pronounced on him at his
death this feature of his character and work is seldom even mentioned. He
was—first, last, and all the time—a man whose life and whose abilities
were so completely and so manifestly consecrated to the evangelization
of the Chinese that when those who knew him best looked back over the
finished whole, his remarkable achievements with apparatus and machinery
scarcely arrested their attention.

Dr. Mateer himself regarded his efficiency in this sphere as due in
some measure to native endowment. He had an inborn taste and ability
for that sort of work; and stories have come down concerning certain
very early manifestations of this characteristic. It is related that
when he was a little boy he was suffering loss through the raids made by
the woodpeckers on a cherry tree laden with luscious fruit. He pondered
the situation carefully, and then set up a pole, close by, with a nice
lodging place for a bird at the top, and armed himself with a mallet down
at the foot. The woodpecker would grab a cherry, and immediately fly
to the pole in order to eat it; but a sharp blow with the mallet would
bring him from his perch to the ground. So the boy saved his cherries.
It is also related of him that when a mere boy he had a friendly
dispute with his father over the question whether a sucking pig had the
homing instinct. He maintained that it would return to its mother under
conditions that proved the affirmative; and in order to satisfy himself,
he placed a pig in a sack, and took it a long way from its familiar
haunts, and turned it loose. It had been agreed that the result was to
decide the ownership. To his delight, immediately the pig started on a
bee line for home, and never gave up the race until it was back in its
old place.

For the development and application of this natural gift he received
almost no help from others. Probably if that old workbench in the barn
at the “Hermitage” could speak, it might tell something as to oversight
and guidance of the boy by his father, in making and repairing traps
and tools for use in recreation and in work; but beyond this he had no
instruction. In his day at college a chemical or physical laboratory was
supposed to be exclusively for the professor to prepare his experiments;
the student was expected only to be a spectator in the classroom when
the experiments were shown. The man who occupied the chair of natural
philosophy at Jefferson when we were there had a gift for supplementing
his scanty outfit of apparatus with the products of his own skill and
labor, and if the student Mateer had found his way down into the
subterranean regions where these were wrought, he and Professor Jones
would have rejoiced together in sympathetic collaboration; but no such
unheard-of violation of ancient custom occurred. In the academy at Beaver
he first turned his hand to making a few pieces of apparatus which he
craved as helps in teaching. But it was not until he reached China that
this field for his talent opened before him, and continued to enlarge
all the rest of his life. In fact, even when he was absent from China,
on his furloughs, he did not get away from his work with apparatus and
machinery. During one of his earlier furloughs, while he was looking up
everything that could be helpful to his Chinese boys, he spent some time
in the Baldwin Locomotive Works, by special permission, in studying the
construction of locomotives, so that he might be able to make a model of
one on his return to China. In connection with this he showed such an
acquaintance with the structure of these engines that he could scarcely
convince some of the skilled mechanics that he had not been trained to
the business. Dr. Corbett wrote concerning him, after his death: “It was
my privilege to meet him at the World’s Fair at Chicago in 1893. He had
spent nearly a month there examining minutely many things of special
interest to him. As my time was limited he kindly became my guide for
a while, and gave me the benefit of his observations. We first visited
the department of electricity, which he had carefully studied in all its
various applications. We next went to Machinery Hall, where he had spent
days making drawings, measurements, and so forth, of the most complex
machinery. He seemed to understand everything as though this had been
the work of his life.” Dr. Hayes says: “Dr. Mateer’s ability to meet
exigencies was well shown a few years ago in Wei Hsien, when suddenly the
large dynamo failed to produce a current. He unwound the machine until he
located the fault, reinsulated the wire and rewound the coil; after which
the machine furnished its current as usual.... Electrotyping was hardly
in general use in the west until he secured an outfit of tools and taught
a class of native artisans. When electric fans came in vogue he purchased
a small one as a model and proceeded to make another.”

The time came when Dr. Mateer had a shop equipped to do a great variety
of work; and though not on a large scale, yet big enough to meet his
needs. Already in 1886 in a letter to his brother William he said: “In
order to repair apparatus, and in order to make many simpler articles,
I have fitted up quite a complete workshop, entirely at my own expense.
I have invested in the shop, in tools and materials quite one thousand
dollars. I keep a workman at my own cost, whom I have trained so that he
can do most ordinary kinds of work. There are a great many small articles
we can make here more cheaply than we can buy them. There are, however,
many articles we cannot make, especially those that involve glass or the
use of special machinery, or special skill.” That shop continued to
grow, and the variety of its output increased. Writing of this, Mrs. Ada
Mateer says:

    So soon as possible in addition to the room used for carpenter
    work, a side house was devoted to the purposes of a shop, which
    grew in completeness as time went on. An upper story was used
    for storing finished apparatus, for a painting, varnishing,
    and drying room. The lower story was the shop proper, with
    well, smithy, a long workroom, private room for chemicals and
    so forth. Every conceivable amount of space in the shop—above,
    around, and below—was occupied with materials, on boards hung
    from above, in cases made of old boxes lining the walls, and
    on the floor. The shop contained not only materials for things
    that are to be, but became also a tomb of things that were, but
    are not, as well as a hospital for things disabled. What old
    histories were unearthed when, after forty years, this shop had
    to be moved to Wei Hsien!

Up there it was perpetuated, the main difference consisting in larger and
better quarters, with some improved conveniences. His wife continues:

    For every machine bought, the market was canvassed by
    correspondence, and the best selected. Especially was this
    true with reference to any tools or machinery used in
    the construction of apparatus,—as machines for turning,
    blacksmithing, plumbing, screw-cutting, burnishing,
    electroplating, casting, and so forth. His shop was thoroughly
    fitted with all appliances for the making of apparatus, or
    electric or steam outfitting, so that he was ready to do
    anything, from setting up a windmill or water system, or
    installing an engine and dynamo, to brazing broken spectacle
    frames or repairing a bicycle.

So far as it was practicable he turned over the actual mechanical labor
to Chinese workmen,—a skilled foreman and apprentices under the foreman’s
direction.

Why, though a missionary, did he employ so considerable a part of his
time in this way? Especially at the outset of his missionary career
stern necessity to meet his own needs and those of his associates drove
him to this line of work. Had he been set down in China at some such
place as Shanghai, where foreign articles could be purchased, very
likely his mechanical gifts would have remained largely dormant. But at
Tengchow he helped to make a stove out of odds and ends, because one
was indispensable in order to keep warm. For the same sort of reason he
extracted teeth and made false sets, cobbled shoes, and acted as master
workman of all the building trades in the erection of the “new home.”
Sometimes he was thus compelled to do things which seemed strange even to
him. When, in 1865, little Katie Mills died, he had to act the part of
undertaker. He said:

    It fell to me to make the coffin, which I did as well as I
    could from memory. I could not tell the carpenter, and I
    had to do the work myself. He did the rough work, and I did
    the cutting and fitting. I had to go entirely by my eye,
    and I found it no easy matter to get it in every respect in
    proportion. We covered it with black velvet outside, and
    inside with white linen. It looked very well when finished,
    and pleased Mr. and Mrs. Mills very much. It is a work I never
    thought of doing.

At one point on the way through Siberia when homeward bound on his
last furlough the train was halted by some defect in the working of
the mechanism of the locomotive. Dr. Mateer, on account of the delay,
got out of his compartment and went to see what was the matter. He saw
that the locomotive was a huge Baldwin, with whose construction he had
familiarized himself when in the United States on a previous furlough,
and he quickly discovered the cause of the trouble. He could speak no
Russian, and the men in charge of the engine could speak no English,
but he managed to show them the cause of the defective working of the
mechanism, and how to remedy it; and soon the train was again speeding on
its way.

The time never came during his long residence in China when a necessity
did not occasionally force itself on him to utilize his mechanical gifts,
and not infrequently on the common utensils of life. In Wei Hsien he
often spent hours directing in such repairs as were needed for furnaces
and the like.

Few of his later and larger achievements in this field could be fairly
regarded as works of necessity, strictly speaking; they rather were meant
to be aids in the great enterprise of evangelizing the Chinese Empire.
He was thoroughly convinced that one of the most powerful agencies that
could be employed for this purpose was the school and the college.
He was equally sure that of all the studies that could be introduced
into the curricula of these institutions, none could be so effective
in opening the way for the gospel as that of the natural sciences, and
especially physics, inclusive of modern mechanical appliances of its
principles. He believed that if bright young men were educated in that
kind of knowledge, and sent out under Christian influences among their
own people, if they were also converted to Christianity, the outcome must
be the dissipation of the existing blind adherence to the superstitions
and ideas of centuries long remote in the past; and that with this must
come the opening wide of the door for the entrance of Christianity. That
was his forecast; and the present situation in China goes far toward
vindicating the wisdom of it. But to teach effectively the natural
sciences he must have apparatus. The only way he could secure this was by
buying what he could, and by utilizing his own ability to set this up,
and to add as much as possible for the outfit yet needed. Such was the
prime object not only of what in a more limited sense constituted the
apparatus of the school and college, but also of such larger appliances
as the plant for heating and lighting the premises. These were far more
than conveniences that helped to better work; they were themselves
constant exhibitions to the students and to the people at large of the
principles of natural science, and of their value in the affairs of
actual life.

Dr. Mateer utilized his outfit of apparatus and machinery as a means of
reaching others besides the students in his own institution, with the
influence of modern science, thus opening a way into their minds for the
gospel. As to one of his methods of accomplishing this object Ada gives a
graphic account:

    At the time when the official examinations were held in
    Tengchow, a large number of scholars came to town, hoping
    to secure a degree, which should be the first step toward
    official preferment. So many of these, having heard the fame
    of the foreign machine, came to see and to hear, that Dr.
    Mateer used to give up his time to them during the days they
    were at leisure. Finally the opportunity to do good in this
    way proved so great that a place was provided for the purpose,
    which was also much used at the Chinese New Year, when all the
    town and countryside give themselves up to recreation. After
    the “Mandarin Lessons” began to bring in money, he devoted the
    profits to the building of a large museum, with an entrance on
    the street. One half was a big audience room, so arranged that
    it could be darkened down for stereopticon or cinematograph
    exhibitions. But it usually served as an audience room, where
    the crowds could sit and listen to preaching, while the
    detachment that preceded them was shown through the inner room
    by expert assistants. What a chamber of wonders that inner room
    proved to them! Here was a man, using a single hand to turn
    a small crank, grinding corn as fast as a woman or a donkey
    could do it on the millstones with much more labor. Here in
    cases were birds stuffed, and on the walls pictures of strange
    animals. Here was a man turning a large crank that in some
    mysterious way made a little iron car overhead first send
    out sparks, and then run all around the room on a circular
    railroad. They wondered if it would not have been easier for
    the man to drag the car around on the ground! There was an oil
    engine at the end of the room, that was a wonder, no mistake;
    and a “shocking” machine that shocked them indeed; and untold
    other wonders. When the tour of the room was finished, the
    crowd was let out by another door, their almond eyes quite
    round, while a signal given by a steam siren showed it was time
    for the next group to go in, and “open-open-eyes,” as they call
    sight-seeing.

Occasionally a mandarin of high order came to witness the marvels. The
report of the Shantung Mission for 1909 says that through the agency of
the chapel and museum twelve thousand people were brought into touch with
the gospel during the year; so the work still continues.

Another good account to which Dr. Mateer turned this peculiar gift
was that of starting industries for native Christians and promoting
self-help among the needy. Now it was a loom for weaving coarse Chinese
linsey or bagging, or a spinning or a knitting machine, that he ordered;
again, he inquired for a roller press to be used for drying and pressing
cotton cloth after dyeing; and more than once he sent for a lathe for
a Chinese blacksmith. In 1896 he interested himself in procuring an
outfit for a flouring mill. He said: “The enterprise of starting the
mill was conceived by Chinese Christians, and they are going to form a
company to raise the money. I do not think that there is a roller mill
in China,—certainly not in north China.... We personally will not make
a cent out of it; but we are interested to get the Chinese Christians
started in an enterprise by which they can make a living, and introduce
improvements into their country.”

His apprentices went out in many instances master blacksmiths,
machinists, and electricians, and had no difficulty in finding places. A
Chinese general temporarily at Tengchow employed one of these men as a
blacksmith, and his order was so evidently filled according to western
methods that he paid a visit to the wonderful shop of this wonderful
master. The very last man for whom he obtained a place was his most
skilled electrician and his latest foreman. This man started a shop up at
the capital of the province, and for its outfit Dr. Mateer carried on an
extensive correspondence and procured large invoices of goods. Because
of the provincial university established there under the new educational
régime there was imperative need of such an establishment, and the
outlook for success was excellent. Unfortunately for the proprietor,
however, the Chinese officials were equally alive to the opportunity
and were jealous of a rival. So they managed to compel him to sell out,
though they broke the fall a little for him by retaining him as foreman.
It is said that the thought of this workman’s troubles lay heavy on the
heart of Dr. Mateer in his last illness. It was usually for the poor
that he interested himself after this practical fashion; yet he did not
refuse to lend aid to others in promoting enterprises that would be of
general advantage. For a wealthy Chinaman who owned a coal mine that had
been flooded with water he went to a great deal of trouble in order to
put him in the way of securing a suitable pump. But whether it was for
rich or poor that the opportunity came to render such services, he put
aside all thought of his own ease or name or profit, and did the best in
his power.

He had special satisfaction in the manufacture of electrical machines,
though it was no easy matter to cut and bore the large glass wheels
without breaking them, and to adjust all parts so that the greatest
efficiency was attained. Ada says:

    When a machine was perfected, giving an unusually long spark,
    he always liked to take me over at night to the shop to see it
    perform. I well remember the last time,—at Wei Hsien. At one
    end of the shop was the windmill. Here he stopped to show me
    a way of equalizing the stroke of the windmill pump piston,
    by hanging on an old kettle of scrap iron. Then he took me
    into an inner room, where on one end of a long table stood the
    newly finished machine,—a beauty, no mistake. Having forgotten
    some necessary key, he took the lantern and went to get it,
    leaving me in the dark. I noticed sounds, the dripping of water
    in the well; but what was the ticking I heard? On the return
    of the lantern I saw the cause,—a number of clock dials all
    hung on the wall, and all to be run by one clock by means of
    electricity. These were for the college recitation rooms when
    they should be finished. Then Calvin made the new machine
    do its work. Adjusting carefully the mechanism, and then
    measuring the spark, he exclaimed with boyish glee, “There,
    isn’t that a beauty!”

Dr. W. A. P. Martin, of Peking, related in the “Chinese Recorder” of
December, 1908, this incident as to Dr. Mateer: “It was once my privilege
to spend part of a vacation in his hospitable home at Tengchow. I found
him at work constructing scientific apparatus with his own hands and
wrestling with a mathematical problem which he had met in an American
magazine. When I solved the problem, he evinced a lively satisfaction, as
if it were the one thing required to cement our friendship.” The problem
was to find the diameter of an auger, which, passing through the center
of a sphere, will bore away just one half of its bulk. It is easy to see
that to a man of that sort his work and the scientific and practical
problems constantly arising in connection with the making of apparatus
and the adjustment of machinery must have been in themselves a rich
source of pleasure, though he never allowed himself to be so fascinated
by his shop as to break in on what he conceived to be his higher work.
Speaking of his last years, Ada says: “He would go out wearied with the
baffling search for a way of expressing clearly in Chinese a thought
none too clear in the original Greek, his forehead grooved with the
harrows of thought. He would come back from the shop an hour later, with
well-begrimed hands, a new spot on his long Chinese gown, a fresher pink
in his cheeks, a brighter sparkle in his eyes, and his lips parted with
a smile. Then, having washed, he would immediately set himself again to
the work of revision.”

He loved also to share this joy, so far as it could be done, with others.
At the Synod of China with his apparatus he gave several exhibitions
that were greatly appreciated. At Wei Hsien he rendered similar services
in the high schools, and at Chefoo in the school for the children of
missionaries. The Centennial Fourth of July, being quite an exceptional
occasion, he celebrated not with ordinary gunpowder, but by setting off
a considerable quantity of detonating chemicals. In the early days at
Tengchow a home-made electric fly whisk whirled above the dining table,
and a little pneumatic fountain playing in a bell glass rendered the room
and the meals additionally pleasant to the family and to the guests. Ada
writes:

    But the thing that most of us will remember longest is an
    illustrated lecture on electricity delivered to the college in
    Wei Hsien, and afterward to the foreigners there. As we sat
    in a darkened room in the college watching the long sparks
    of fire, the twisting circles of many-colored light, half
    illuminating a tall, white-bearded figure in a long black gown,
    he seemed to us like some old magician, learned in the black
    arts, now become bright arts, invoking to his aid his attendant
    spirits. Nor was the enchantment diminished when afterward,
    more wonderful than a palmister, he showed us by the x-rays the
    bones of our hands. A few weeks later one of the ladies of the
    compound gave an evening entertainment in which each one in the
    station was hit off in some bright way, and we were to guess
    the name. One number of the programme was this: A black-robed
    figure with cotton beard appeared, leading a youth whom he
    seated in a chair. Then the venerable personage proceeds to
    examine the head of the stripling with a stereoscope covered
    with black cloth, supposed to be a fluoroscope, while an
    alarm clock in a tin pail near by supplies the crackling of
    electricity. He gives a careful examination, shakes his head,
    and pronounces the verdict in one word, “Empty.” In explanation
    of the tableau it only needs to be said that between the
    exhibition and the entertainment Dr. Mateer had given the young
    men of the station their examination in the language.




XIII

THE MANDARIN VERSION

    “I am mortgaged to the Bible revision work.... It cost me a
    great effort to engage in it, but it will probably be the most
    important work of my life.”—LETTER TO SECRETARY BROWN, June 13,
    1896.


To tell this part of the story of Dr. Mateer’s life satisfactorily, I
must begin with the first general missionary conference, held at Shanghai
in May, 1877. For two years previous he had served on a committee to
prepare the way for the meeting, and in this capacity he had rendered
much valuable assistance. At that conference he read a paper in which he
elaborately discussed the subject of “The Relation of Protestant Missions
to Education.” The meeting was regarded as successful, and a second was
called, to assemble at Shanghai, in May, 1890. It was at this conference
that the movement for a revision of the Bible in Chinese took actual
measures toward realization.

For the sake of any readers not well informed as to the Chinese language,
a few preliminary statements concerning it may be desirable here. In a
very broad and general sense it may be said that as to elements, one
tongue prevails throughout China proper; but that there is also much
important variation in this general tongue. First of all, it needs lo
be noted that the language takes on two principal forms,—the classic, or
Wen-li, and the spoken, or Mandarin. The classic has come down through
the centuries from the times of Confucius and Mencius, and remains
comparatively the same as it is found in the writings of those sages.
This is accepted as the model for all writing; and for that reason
Chinese students have been required to spend the greater part of their
time in memorizing those ancient books, so that they might not only
absorb their teaching, but also especially that they might be able to
reproduce their style. The classic Chinese is stilted and so condensed
that in comparison with it a telegram would seem diffuse; and though
many of the characters are the same as those used in writing the spoken
language, yet the meaning and often the sound of characters is so
different that an illiterate person would not understand it on hearing
it read. The spoken language, on the other hand, may be compared with
English as to its use. Good English is very much the same throughout
the countries where it is the vernacular, and though it takes on local
dialects, it remains everywhere intelligible. So, broadly speaking, is
it also as to the spoken Chinese in a large part of the empire. From the
Yangtse up into Manchuria, though the pronunciations differ very much,
the colloquial if put into writing is understood. In other words, with
differences of dialect and pronunciation it is the speech of perhaps
three hundred millions of people. The regions excepted lie along the
coast from Shanghai down, and inland south of the Yangtse, where the
distinct tongues are numerous and are largely unintelligible except in
their own localities.

It has been the rule in China that a mandarin must not be a native of
the province where he holds office; and, of course, it is essential that
he should be acquainted with the speech which constitutes the _lingua
franca_. Perhaps for this reason it is called Mandarin. But down to the
time when missionary publications rendered it common in print, it was
not employed in that mode. All books, business or government documents,
the one newspaper of the country, which was the court gazette, and all
letters were in the higher or, as it is called, the Wen-li form, the only
exception being some novels, and even these were streaked with Wen-li.
This, however, ran through gradations,—from the highest, which is so
condensed and so bristles with erudite allusions that only a trained
scholar can understand it, down to a modification which is so easy that
with a slight alteration of particles it is almost the same as the
Mandarin.

During the long period of the nineteenth century preceding the meeting
of the second general missionary conference, a number of translations of
the Scriptures, some of them of the whole, and some of parts, had been
made, and had come more or less into use. The men who did this pioneer
work deserve to be held in perpetual esteem, especially in view of the
difficulties under which they labored. Among the missionaries who sat
in that conference there was no disposition to withhold this honor, or
to disparage the value of these early translations; but there was so
widely prevalent among them and their associates at that time on the
field a conviction that no existing version was satisfactory, that they
recognized it as a duty to take up the subject, and to initiate steps
looking to the production of a better. An informal consultation as to
this was held by a few men, a couple of days before the conference
assembled; but inasmuch as Dr. Mateer had not been invited, he did not
attend. Another consultation was held the following day, and because
of his great interest in the subject of a Bible revision, he attended
without an invitation. The views expressed clearly indicated that there
was a general agreement that a revision was desirable, but it also was
made very plain that beyond this there was a wide divergence of opinion.
We will allow one of his letters to a representative of the American
Bible Society, under date of May 26, 1890, to tell the next step in this
great undertaking:

    As I walked home from the meeting, and revolved in my mind
    the difficulty of the situation, the idea of an executive
    committee, to whom the whole work should be intrusted, came
    across my mind. When I reached my room I sat down, and in a few
    minutes and without consultation with anyone, wrote out the
    plan, which without essential modification was subsequently
    adopted. It seemed to strike all parties very favorably. On
    the second day of the conference two large, representative
    committees were appointed by the conference, one on Mandarin
    and one on Wen-li. I was a member of both these committees.
    Each committee had a number of meetings, in which the subject
    was freely and fully discussed in all its bearings. It was
    evident that there was a general desire for a version in simple
    Wen-li, and, the difficulties being less in regard to the work
    already done, a conclusion was first reached in regard to this
    version. In Mandarin the difficulties were greater.

An agreement, however, was reached. The version in the higher classic
style then gave the most trouble, but a satisfactory basis for this also
was agreed upon; and the reports as to all three versions were adopted
unanimously by the conference. In the same letter he says: “I worked
hard for these results, and felt no small satisfaction in seeing such
perfect unanimity in the adoption of the plan proposed. I have never done
anything in which I felt more the guiding hand of God than in drawing up
and carrying through this plan.”

The selection of translators for each of the projected new versions was
handed over respectively to executive committees; and Dr. Mateer was
appointed on that having charge of the Mandarin, and made chairman of it.
He heard that he was talked of as one of the revisers for that version,
but as yet he had not decided what was his duty, if chosen. It will
again be best here to take up from one of his letters the thread of the
narrative. Under date of December 13, 1890, he writes to Dr. Nevius:

    I can truly say that before I went to the conference I never
    even dreamed of what has come to pass. It never occurred to me,
    before the conference, that I should take any prominent part in
    the matter of Bible translation. I felt that education was the
    only field in which I should come to the front. I was never in
    my life so providentially led as I was in this matter. I was
    selected chairman of the Mandarin Executive Committee and have
    been pushing the getting of translators. The first few months
    were spent in corresponding and comparing notes as to men.
    We took a ballot recently, which resulted in the election of
    five, ... I being the only one who received a unanimous vote.
    We are now voting for the others, to make up the seven.... My
    book of “Mandarin Lessons” has no doubt brought me forward,
    and its preparation has in a measure fitted me for the work.
    My personal preferences are against the work of translation,
    and I would fain decline it, but I don’t see how I can in view
    of the circumstances. I feel my incompetency, especially in
    Greek and Hebrew, and you may be sure I am very loath to give
    up the educational and literary work on my hands. Much of it
    is half finished. But if the Mandarin Bible is to be made,
    some one must do it; moreover, the men who do it must have
    the confidence of the missionary body; otherwise it will be a
    failure. As it is, circumstances have led me to the position,
    and the strong opinion of the men on the committee, and of
    others, leads me to feel that I cannot lightly refuse.

In November, 1891, the revisers met at Shanghai. Dr. Mateer, in a letter
written in the following January, said:

    The scheme for the revision of the Chinese Bible set on foot
    by the conference is now fairly organized, and approved by
    the three great Bible societies. The work of pushing the
    organization has fallen largely on me, and I feel no small
    sense of relief now that it is successfully accomplished.
    Contrary to my own desire, I am compelled to lake a share as
    one of the revisers in Mandarin; not that I do not relish the
    work, but because it will of necessity interfere with many
    of my cherished plans. We had a meeting of all the revisers
    of the three versions, and it was a fairly harmonious and an
    altogether successful meeting. A great work is before us which
    I trust we may, in the good providence of God, be enabled to
    accomplish.

The interval of about a year and a half between the general conference
and the organization just mentioned was required because of the
difficulty of selecting and securing the translators. These for the
Mandarin version, as that body was originally constituted, consisted
of Henry Blodgett, George Owen, Chauncey Goodrich, J. R. Hykes, Thomas
Bramfitt, J. L. Nevius and C. W. Mateer. During the years in which this
work was continued there were in the membership so many changes caused by
death, removal and other causes, that Dr. Goodrich and Dr. Mateer alone
continued from the beginning until the translation of the New Testament,
the part of the Bible first revised, was tentatively completed. Mr.
Baller of the China Inland Mission stands next in length of service,
having joined the committee in 1900. Dr. Mateer in the work of revision
had the assistance of two Chinese Christians whose services were so large
and valuable that they deserve more than a passing mention here. In a
recent letter Dr. Goodrich pays them the following just tribute:

    Dr. Mateer, in the work of rendering the Scriptures into a
    universal Mandarin colloquial, had two exceptionally fine
    teachers. The first was Mr. Tsou Li Wen, an ordained pastor,
    who left his parish to engage in this work. Mr. Tsou was
    trained by Dr. Mateer in his college, receiving his theological
    training under Drs. Nevius, Mateer and others. He was a man
    of beautiful spirit, discriminating mind, and a fine sense of
    language. He was also a man of indomitable perseverance. After
    a strenuous day’s work of eight hours or more, he would often
    toil by himself far into the night, seeking for some phrase
    or phrases which expressed more exactly or more beautifully
    the meaning of the original. And before the final review, both
    he and my own lamented teacher (Chang Hsi Hsin) would bestow
    the greatest pains, in the hours when they should have been
    sleeping, in a careful inspection of the work. Thus did Mr.
    Tsou toil, while separated from his family for long periods of
    time; his work on Bible revision being as truly a labor of love
    as that of any member of the committee.

    But alas! Mr. Tsou’s life burned out all too soon in his
    exhausting labors. But how I should like to see his crown, and
    his shining face!

    Happily for the work, Dr. Mateer had another scholar, trained
    also in his school, Mr. Wang Yuan Teh, a young man of keen,
    incisive, logical mind, who had read all the best books in the
    Mandarin colloquial. Mr. Wang was quick to see any fault in
    the structure of a sentence, and insistent on its being put
    right. He also worked most faithfully in this translation,
    refusing offers which came to him of a salary several times the
    amount he received. I think he was held, partly by Dr. Mateer’s
    personality, which drew him strongly, and partly by his own
    love for the work itself. When the chariot of fire came for Dr.
    Mateer, he left us, much to our regret and loss.

    The work of these two men has entered largely into the present
    translation of the New Testament, and the influence of their
    work, as of Dr. Mateer’s, abides, and will continue to be felt,
    till the great work of rendering the Bible into a universal
    Mandarin is finished.

Dr. Mateer himself, in the preface to his “Mandarin Lessons,” makes
acknowledgment of the valuable services rendered in the preparation of
that work by Tsou Li Wen, and also by his own wife.

The Mandarin Committee, at the meeting in 1891, after organization,
proceeded to divide up the books of the New Testament among themselves
for work, and adopted a plan of procedure. Each man was first carefully
to revise or translate his own portion; and then to send it around to
the others, who were to go over it, and write their suggestions of
emendations, each in a column parallel to the proposed text. Next, the
original translator was to take these emendations, and with their help
was to prepare a text in Mandarin for submission to the entire committee.
Broadly speaking, this was the method pursued to the end, though with
some modifications compelled or suggested by experience. It was hoped
that comparatively rapid progress would be made; but in reality the
committee did not come together again until September, 1898; and even
then, only the Acts of the Apostles was ready for general revision. For
this delay there were various causes, such as the death of Dr. Nevius
and the resignation of others, and the absence of Dr. Mateer on furlough
home; but the chief cause was that every member was burdened with so much
other work that only a fraction of his time could be given to this duty.
Dr. Mateer, for example, found himself loaded down with other literary
and missionary labors. At the meeting held at Tengchow, in 1898, he
was elected chairman of the committee. This was an honor, but it also
carried with it peculiar duties which materially added to his burden.
The committee could muster only five members for that sitting, but they
proceeded with their work, and at the end of two months and a half they
finished the book of Acts; and then they separated.

[Illustration: MANDARIN REVISION COMMITTEE AT WORK

DR. S. LEWIS (American Methodist Episcopal)

DR. GOODRICH (Congregational)

DR. MATEER (Presbyterian)

M. BALLER (China Inland Mission)]

That meeting by actual experience brought out distinctly not only the
difficulties of necessity arising from the translation of particular
books of the Bible, and indeed of every verse; but also others of a
more general character, some of which had previously been more or less
clearly seen. Should the new version take as its basis one or more of the
translations already in existence; or should it go back straight to the
original Greek, and use the existing translations merely as helps? In
any case, constant reference to the original was a necessity. For this,
which of the published texts should be accepted as the standard? The
meeting also disclosed a wide divergence of opinion as to the style of
Mandarin that ought to be employed. On that subject in 1900, Dr. Mateer
expressed himself fully and strongly, in an article published in the
“Chinese Recorder.” He said:

    The Mandarin Bible, in order to fulfill its purpose, should be
    such as can be readily understood by all when heard as read
    aloud by another. The fundamental distinction between Wen-li
    and Mandarin is that the former is addressed to the eye, the
    latter to the ear. In all Protestant churches the reading of
    the Scriptures has, from the first, constituted an important
    part of public worship. In order that this reading may serve
    the purpose intended, the Scripture must be so translated
    as to be intelligible to the common people. Only thus will
    they hear it, as they did its Author, “gladly.” It is not
    enough that those who know “characters” should be able to
    read it intelligently, but rather that those who do not know
    “characters,” and who in fact constitute by far the greater
    part of the Chinese people, should be able to understand it
    when it is read to them. Here then is the standard to be aimed
    at,—a version that represents the Chinese language as it is
    spoken, and addresses itself to the ear rather than to the eye.

He summarized the chief characteristics of the proper style thus: that
words should be employed which the people who commonly use Mandarin can
understand; that sentences should conform to the model of the spoken
language; and, concerning both of these requisites, that such care should
be taken as to brevity, the order of words and clauses, the connective
particles, and the evident movement of thought as expressed, that the
Chinese would recognize in it a people’s book; and yet one that is free
from undignified colloquialisms and localisms. All this he held up as an
ideal, not likely to be fully realized by any set of translators, but if
distinctly aimed at, more sure to be nearly approached. Toward the close
of the work on the Mandarin version still another question of a general
nature arose. Throughout most of their labors the committee had before
them the revised easy Wen-li translation, and for a part of the time
they also had the revised classic Wen-li Bible. Ought the three revised
Chinese versions to be harmonized, so as to eliminate all variations?
That, of course, would be ideal. On this question the report of the
Mandarin Committee, which was as to substance prepared by the chairman,
took the negative. It said:

    The differences are not great, and where they exist, the
    versions will serve Chinese students as a sort of commentary.
    There are a multitude of questions in Biblical interpretation
    which no translation can settle once for all. Moreover,
    ninety-nine out of a hundred of those who use the Mandarin
    will never look at any other translation. Two versions in
    perfect accord seem like a fine product, but it is difficult
    of realization. An attempt at reconciling the present versions
    would develop many difficulties. A Mandarin sentence
    especially is not easy to tamper with. The change of a single
    word would often dislocate a long sentence, and necessitate
    retranslation and adjustment to the context.

The Mandarin committee of translators continued their tentative revision
of the New Testament until late in 1906, a period of fifteen years,
counting from the date of their first meeting for organization and
assignment of specific duties. They held eight different sessions,
being almost one each year after they were ready with actual work;
and none of the sessions were shorter than two and a half months, and
one of them stretched out to six months. They assembled at Tengchow,
near Peking, at Shanghai, and most frequently at Chefoo. In the final
report is the record: “The chairman can say for himself that he has
given the equivalent of about seven years all-day labor to this work.
He was present at every meeting, and first and last missed but one
day’s session.” Each of the meetings took on distinctive incidental
associations. The third was held at Shanghai, and from December, 1900,
ran over some months into 1901. At that time, on account of the Boxer
uprising, missionaries were temporarily there as refugees from all the
provinces directly concerned in the version. The sittings were in a small
upper room in the Union Church, which came to be called “the Jerusalem
Chamber,” and visitors were many. They saw two rows of men, one on each
side of a long table, yellow faces being sandwiched alternately with
white, as each translator had, as usual in this work, his Chinese
assistant at his side. Often the discussions were carried on in Mandarin,
so that these assistants might be able to understand and pass their
opinion. Incidentally it may be noted that besides his work on the
revision, Dr. Mateer often met with the refugee missionaries during this
period and greatly gratified them by participating in the discussion of
practical problems.

After the Mateers returned from their furlough, the sessions were all
held at Chefoo, first in one of the rooms of the China Inland Mission
Sanitarium, and later in a large upper room in the Missionary Home,
overlooking the bay. Usually at the commencement of their meetings they
sat together for three hours in the morning, and reserved the rest
of the day for such private study as they wished to make; but as the
time wore on they would increase the sittings to as many hours also in
the afternoon, and crowd the private review into such odd moments as
were left. To anyone, these protracted labors on such a work must have
become exceedingly tedious and almost irksome; but to no one was it more
so than to Dr. Mateer. He knew Mandarin almost as if it had been his
native tongue; but the Mandarin which he knew had often to be modified
and expressions adjusted, so that a Scripture written in it would suit
other regions of China as well as those with which he was familiar. In
writing his “Mandarin Lessons” and in preparing his educational books
he had only to ascertain to the best of his ability how to express his
ideas in Chinese, and that was the end of the search; but here he had
to do his best, and then submit his product to the opinion of others,
and often with the result of changes which did not commend themselves to
his preference. Yet, on his return home from the sittings he would say:
“I ought not to complain. I get my way oftener than any other man does.
Only I cannot help thinking of the work I have laid aside unfinished in
order to do this.” After each meeting the year’s work was printed, marked
“Tentative Edition,” and with a slip inviting criticism was sent to the
missionaries in north China and Manchuria. These criticisms were all to
be canvassed before the edition could be printed that was to be presented
to the Centenary Conference, to which they were to report.

The final meeting for the tentative revision of the New Testament lasted
for more than five months, and the work was pushed with even more than
the usual vigor. The Centenary Missionary Conference for China was only a
year ahead when they began. After the conference the revision was to run
the gauntlet of criticisms, and these were to be canvassed; and thus at
last the revision was to take its permanent form. Mrs. Mateer gives the
following graphic account of one of the closing incidents of that session.

    Passage had already been engaged for the Goodrich family on a
    steamer sailing north. The baggage was all carried down, the
    family all waited on the upper veranda, with hats on, and the
    Doctor’s hat was ready for him to seize as soon as he should
    get out of the meeting. The “rickshaw” men were waiting, ready
    to run with their loads. But still no sound of approaching
    feet! Finally, as it got dangerously near the hour of sailing,
    Mrs. Goodrich said, “I must go and hurry them up.” So she
    marched boldly down the hall, listened a minute at the door,
    and came back with her fingers on her lips. “Those dear men
    are praying,” she whispered; and tears filled our eyes as our
    hearts silently joined in the prayer. Of course, every morning
    session was opened with prayer; but this was the consummation
    of all these years of toil, the offering of the finished work
    at the altar.

Although the committee completed their revision at that session, so
far as this was possible until the conference should meet and approve
or disapprove it, there was very considerable work of a tedious nature
left to Dr. Mateer to perform. The finishing touches yet to be put upon
portions of the version were not a few; but the thing that required of
him the most protracted and delicate attention was the punctuation.
For this he introduced a new system which seemed to him to be best
for the Chinese language, and which can be estimated fairly only by a
scholar in that tongue. To him also as chairman came the criticisms
which were invited from all quarters, most of which were welcomed,
but some of which touched him to the quick. At length, in the spring
of 1907, the conference assembled at Shanghai, and the report of the
Committee of Revisers was made to that body. He wrote to a friend in
the United States concerning it: “We had a grand missionary conference
in Shanghai, which, of course, I attended. There was more unanimity and
less discussion than in the former conference.” The report received a
hearty approval, and the version was started on its course of examination
by all concerned, as preparatory to its final completion. It was issued
from the press at Shanghai in 1910. It was called a revision, the aim
being to offer it, not so much as a rival to the older versions, as an
improvement upon them; but in reality it was an almost entirely new
translation, though in making it advantage had been taken of the valuable
pioneering done by the others. Writing to a friend after the conference
had adjourned, Dr. Mateer frankly said:

    Please note that we still have opportunity for final revision,
    in which many defects will be eliminated. There are places
    not a few with which I myself am dissatisfied, many of which
    I see can be improved. I refer especially to texts that are
    excessively literal, and where foreign idioms are used to
    the detriment of the style. It must also be remembered that
    many terms and expressions that seem strange and perhaps
    inexpressive at first will on further use seem good and even
    admirable. Every new translation must have a little time to win
    its way. That our version will appeal strongly to the great
    mass of the Chinese church I have no doubt.

During the long years he was engaged in this great undertaking he learned
some valuable lessons concerning the translation of the Scriptures.
He came to speak of it as an art, for which special training and
experience are needed. In an article which appeared after his death,
in the November issue of “The Chinese Recorder” for that year, he gave
at length a discussion of “Lessons Learned in Translating the Bible
into Mandarin.” He pointed out difficulties that hamper the making of
a version in the Mandarin as compared with the Wen-li in either of its
forms. To appreciate these, one needs to be a master in those tongues.
But he also indicated others that lie in the way of a translation of
the Scriptures into any sort of Chinese. Many of the very ideas of the
Bible on moral and spiritual subjects had never entered the Chinese
mind, and consequently there are no suitable words or phrases to express
them. Just as western science has to invent its own terms when it enters
China, so also within limits must the translator of the Bible introduce
a vocabulary suited for his purpose. He believed that in the China of
to-day prejudice had so far begun to yield that this could be effectively
and wisely done. In fact, each branch of modern thought that has been
grafted on the stem of the Chinese has already brought with it new words,
so that hundreds of these have recently been coined and are on the
tongues of the leaders. Along with the lack of an adequate vocabulary
goes another thing that adds to the difficulty. In the translation of
other books the main need is to express the thought, and in doing this
considerable freedom is usually tolerated; but accuracy of expression,
because of the very nature of the Bible, is of the first importance
in a version. Besides, the Chinese Christians seem especially disposed
to insist on this quality. The tendency of a translator is apt to be
toward adapting the Scripture to what is conceived to be the taste
of the Chinese, to write up to the style with which the educated are
familiar, or down to the level of the uneducated speech. Another defect
is to magnify or to minify peculiarities of expression originating in
the region where the Scriptures were written. Dr. Mateer thought that he
recognized very distinctly tendencies of this sort in the older versions,
though abating in more recent times. His article concluded as follows:

    The Bible does not need any doctoring at the hands of
    translators. The Chinese church is entitled to have the Bible
    just as it is, in a strictly faithful and accurate translation.
    This they demand of us who translate it for them. They do not
    want to know what the writers would have said if they had
    been Chinese, but what they actually did say. This is the
    manner in which the Chinese who have learned English are now
    translating foreign books into their own language, and this
    is very evidently the spirit of the times. The English Bible,
    especially the Revised Version, is a monument of careful and
    accurate translation. Translators into Chinese cannot do
    better than follow in the same line. I have a number of times
    heard students when using commentaries, or hearing lectures
    on various portions of Scripture, express their surprise and
    dissatisfaction that the Bible had not been more accurately
    translated. I have known Chinese preachers, when quoting a
    text which had a marginal reading saying that the original
    says so and so, to remark with strong disapproval, “If the
    original says so, why not translate it so, and be done with
    it?” On one occasion in our committee, when a question was
    raised about giving a metaphor straight or paraphrasing into
    a comparison, one of our literary helpers said with vigorous
    emphasis: “Do you suppose that we Chinese cannot understand and
    appreciate a metaphor? Our books are full of them, and new ones
    are welcome.” If we do not give the Chinese the Bible as it
    is, they will condemn us, and before long will do the work for
    themselves.

    In conclusion, it is worthy of remark that no one man can make
    a satisfactory translation of the Bible. There are limitations
    to every man’s knowledge of truth and of language. Every man’s
    vision is distorted in some of its aspects. This is a lesson we
    have been learning day by day, and are still learning. If any
    man wishes to find out his limitations in these respects, let
    him join a translating committee.

With regard to the difficulties in the way of this revision, Dr. Goodrich
thus expresses himself:

    No literary work of such peculiar difficulty has been
    undertaken in China since the first translation of the
    Scriptures by Morrison. To produce a Bible whose language shall
    run close to the original, simple enough to be understood by
    ordinary persons when read aloud in the church or in the home,
    and yet chaste in diction; this work to be done by a committee
    chosen from widely distant localities,—from Peking on the
    northeast, to Kneichow in the southwest,—might well frighten
    any body of men. For the first years together the work was
    almost the despair of the committee. Their efforts to make
    themselves mutually understood and to unite on a rendering
    were often immensely prolonged and exasperatingly amusing.

But they were trying to do for China what Wyclif did for the English
and what Luther did for the Germans,—to make a translation of the Bible
into a vernacular form of national speech which would be everywhere
intelligible; and they took courage and pressed forward slowly but surely
toward their goal. In doing this they not only have accomplished the end
immediately sought, but they also have put into the hands of the people
at large a model which will largely mold all their coming literature.

The conference at Shanghai in 1907 approved the report on the New
Testament and decided to proceed to the revision of the Old Testament,
and appointed an executive committee to select the men to do this work.
The members chosen were the same five who had served toward the close of
the revision of the New Testament, with the exception of a new translator
needed because one of the old committee had gone home. Dr. Mateer was
especially anxious that they might be saved from the necessity of
breaking in and training several inexperienced members. Of course, he
had foreseen that he would probably be selected, but when informed that
this had been done he reserved his decision until he knew of whom besides
himself the committee was to consist. To Dr. Goodrich of the American
Board, with whom he had been so intimately associated, he wrote several
times, urging him to accept; and in one of these letters he said: “There
is a variety of reasons why I am perhaps as loath as you are to do this
work. So far as money, reputation, or personal taste goes, I should
rather do other work. But then it seems as if duty calls to this. Neither
you nor I can ignore the fact that the experience and training of all
these years have fitted us in a special manner for this work. We can do
it better and faster than new men.” He was again made chairman, and as
such he proceeded to distribute the first of the revision work, for which
he selected Genesis and certain of the Psalms. He began his personal
labors at the opening of the year, and in the summer the committee
assembled at Chefoo to consider what had then been accomplished. The
Goodrich and the Mateer families went into residence during their
projected stay, and took for this purpose a house occupied usually as
headquarters for the school for the deaf, Mrs. Goodrich, because of the
condition of Mrs. Mateer’s health, having charge of the housekeeping. The
meetings were held in a little chapel of the China Inland Mission, in the
neighboring valley. It was while so situated that Dr. Mateer was stricken
with his fatal illness.

In a letter which he addressed “To the dear ones at home,” on the
occasion of his seventieth birthday, he said:

    God has also blessed me in enabling me to accomplish several
    of the leading purposes of my life. From my boyhood I longed
    for a liberal education. My next great desire was to give at
    least forty years to work in China. Soon after I came to China
    I began educational work on a very small scale, but aspired
    to raise up a college that might be a power for good. I early
    formed the purpose of becoming an adept in the spoken language,
    and in aiming at this saw the need of a text-book for learning
    the language, and set about making it. All these purposes I
    have been enabled, by the blessing of God, to accomplish. My
    great work for the last ten years has been to lead in the
    translation of the Bible into Mandarin. This has been a most
    trying and laborious task, which is not yet completed. The New
    Testament is nearly done, but whether the Old Testament will be
    completed, who can tell? My desire and hope is to complete it.
    To prepare a mature and approved translation of the Bible for
    the use of two hundred and eighty millions of people will be
    for the glory of God in China.




XIV

INCIDENTS BY THE WAY

    “There are many trials and self-denials in missionary
    life, but there are also not a few compensations and some
    advantages.”—LETTER “TO THE DEAR ONES AT HOME,” at his
    seventieth birthday.


The statement just quoted is general, and admits of application in the
case of every faithful foreign missionary; but Dr. Mateer meant it
especially as an expression of his own experience. In the story of his
life work as already here told we have seen it constantly exemplified.
There, however, still remain other instances that deserve permanent
record. In speaking of them as “incidents by the way,” and in gathering
them into a single chapter, I do not mean to indicate that they are
unimportant. Some of them concerned the depths of his life. But his work
after he reached China was chiefly along the lines that have been traced
in the preceding chapters, and those matters now to be related, however
important, were incidents by the way.

Of the trials that overtook him, none were so keenly felt as his
bereavements. Only two or three of these can be mentioned here,—such
as occurred within the circle of his own relatives out in China. The
first was the death of Mrs. Capp, the sister of Mrs. Julia Mateer.
This occurred on February 17, 1882, at Tengchow. She went down into the
shadows with the tender ministrations of her sister and of Dr. Mateer. In
writing to a brother of her deceased husband, he said:

    On Sabbath afternoon,—yesterday,—we buried her on the hill west
    of the city, with other missionary friends who have gone before
    her. She was greatly beloved by the Chinese, and there were few
    of the Christians here who did not weep to part with her. Mr.
    Mills conducted the funeral service in English, and made some
    excellent remarks, admirably adapted to the occasion. One of
    our native elders made a very effective address in Chinese. Her
    work is done, and it is well done. Her memory will not soon die
    amongst the Chinese in this city and neighborhood. We will miss
    her, oh, so much,—her help, her counsel, her genial society,
    her spiritual power! Her school will miss her the most: her
    place in it cannot be filled. She was ready to die, and strong
    in faith, yet she longed to live, not that she might enjoy
    life, but, as she several times said, that she might save some
    more souls. She repeatedly assured us of her joy that she had
    come to China, and declared that she had never counted it a
    sacrifice, but a privilege. I told the Chinese over her coffin
    to imitate her as she did Christ,—her zeal and earnestness in
    all duty, and her untiring endeavor and desire to save souls.

Sixteen years later, almost to a day,—February 16, 1898,—Julia finished
her earthly work and entered into the heavenly rest. I have already
mentioned that sorrowful event in the life of Dr. Mateer, and said
something of her character. Her biography is soon to be given to the
world in a distinct volume. Under these circumstances it would be
superfluous to make any extended record concerning her here. It is due,
however, to her husband to quote at least a part of one paragraph from a
brief memoir of her written by him shortly after her death. In telling of
her varied labors and achievements he said this, which so far as it was
known to her in life, must have been an immeasurable satisfaction:

    Before the end of her first year in China she look an active
    part in opening the little school which ultimately grew
    into the Shantung College. To this school she gave the best
    energies of her life, and to her in no small degree is due its
    continued success. She was an accomplished teacher, especially
    of young boys.... She did far more than teach, during the
    earlier years of the school; she did fully two thirds of the
    work involved, giving her time day and night to every detail.
    She kept the accounts, looked after food and clothing and a
    hundred nameless things. To the end she was the confidante
    and adviser of all, in their troubles, trials, and plans, in
    their marriage alliances, and in their spiritual exercises.
    The thoughtful care she gave to all her pupils when they were
    sick endeared her to the hearts of all who were in the college.
    She studied medicine on her own account, and had no mean skill
    as a physician. All the sick in the native church, and all
    the sick in her own neighborhood, heathen and Christian, came
    to her, and she never refused a call. There is no graduate
    of the Tengchow College who does not have a place for her
    in his heart, close by the side of that of his own mother.
    During her illness there is probably not one of these young
    men, scattered as they are over all north China, who did not
    pray earnestly for her, many of them in public as well as in
    private; and many of them have written her the most anxious and
    affectionate letters. On her sixtieth birthday, last July, the
    students of the college and graduates with their most imposing
    ceremony presented her with a decorated silk gown, and placed
    a large title, or sign, in gilt letters over the front door of
    the house, “_Character-nourishing aged mother_.” It was the
    proudest day of her life when these young men presented her
    with this most fitting token of their loving reverence and
    esteem.

In view of the hatred and prejudice which confronted her and her husband
when they arrived in Tengchow nearly thirty-five years before, it must
have almost seemed to her like the illusion of a dream.

We have previously seen that Dr. Mateer’s brother John became the
superintendent of the mission press at Shanghai in 1872. He continued in
that position until 1876, when he returned home. For a good many years
he was in business in the United States, and then he returned to China
and took charge of the mission press of the American Board at Peking. In
April, 1900, Dr. Mateer was called by telegraph to come to that city as
quickly as possible, on account of the dangerous illness of his brother;
but John died the day before his arrival. In a letter to the surviving
brothers and sisters Dr. Mateer, after describing the funeral services,
added:

    It is evident that his work here in the press was highly
    appreciated. He was also held in high esteem by the members of
    the other missions, and was well and favorably known in the
    American legation. Several of the speakers said that John’s
    life was a well-rounded and successful one, achieved in the
    face of great difficulties. From the standpoint of worldly
    wisdom his life could scarcely be called successful; but from
    the spiritual, it certainly was. In this regard he was probably
    superior to any member of the family. His mind was clear to
    the end and filled with confident hope. As his disease grew
    more serious he showed no fear, and to the last he faced death
    without a tremor. May God give unto each of us who remain grace
    to face the king of terrors with the same triumphant faith. We
    buried him in the foreign cemetery, just north of the city, in
    the most beautiful spot in that cemetery, and just by the side
    of Rev. Mr. Morrison of our mission.

It did not fall to the lot of Dr. Mateer to have any experience of
perilous adventure and of hairbreadth escapes such as have come into the
lives of missionaries in uncivilized lands, and even in China. Still he
by no means escaped serious risks. In his earlier itinerations he was
several times threatened with attacks from individuals or crowds, and
sometimes he armed himself in order to defend himself from assault. The
second year of his residence in Tengchow, because of negotiations going
forward for the renting of a house near the south gate, a meeting of as
many as a thousand people composing the most influential clan in the
city assembled in one of the temples, and demanded of the officials
permission to kill the man who controlled the house, and the foreigners;
but the excitement passed away without any open outbreak. In the summer
of 1867 there was a great scare at Tengchow over the approach of a body
of “rebels.” These were in reality robbers, consisting of the dregs left
behind at the suppression of the Tai-Ping rebellion, who burned and
laid waste large districts of country, and mercilessly slaughtered the
people. Their approach to Tengchow had so often been reported that nobody
knew what to anticipate; but at length they, sure enough, made their
appearance in the neighboring country. The inhabitants crowded into the
city by thousands, bringing with them donkeys, cattle, and everything
that could be hastily removed, so that not only the houses, but the
streets and vacant places were crammed with them, the mission premises
not being excepted. Julia found in the situation a fine opportunity to
give the gospel to the women; and her husband was equally diligent among
the men, though he was unfortunately hampered by the absence of his
Chinese assistant. A British war vessel called early in the scare and
offered to remove the missionaries to a place of safety; and later the
“Wyoming,” a United States naval vessel, anchored out in the bay, where
she could bring her guns to play, if necessary, for the protection of
American citizens. Happily, after five days of this state of things the
rebels again vanished, but not without leaving in their trail sickness
and desolation. The missionaries do not seem to have been much alarmed
at any time during the excitement, though no one could tell what might
happen.

In 1870 there was a cruel massacre of a large number of French Roman
Catholic missionaries and of some others at Tientsin, and much valuable
mission property was destroyed. The news of this spread rapidly over
north China and kindled the animosity of the natives against foreigners
to such a degree that the situation in many localities became very
dangerous. At Tengchow rumors of plots to wipe out the missionaries there
were frequent, and the native Christians and others who were friendly
communicated to them information that justified serious apprehension.
A meeting of all the members of both the Baptist and the Presbyterian
station was called, and then another the next day, and by an almost
unanimous vote it was declared that it was the duty of all to take refuge
in Chefoo or elsewhere until the danger was substantially ended. Dr.
Mateer in these meetings advocated brief delay and further inquiry, but
when he found himself in a minority of one, he yielded his judgment to
that of all the others. Just as soon as possible a message was sent to
Chefoo for a ship to come up and take the families to that place, and a
couple of British vessels promptly responded. All valuables that could
be quickly packed and easily removed were shipped; and the premises at
Tengchow were placed in charge of as trusty Chinese as could be obtained
for the purpose, and a promise was given by the chief official of
the city that he would see that constables watched the property. Dr.
Mateer did not go on the ship, but remained a day along with a Baptist
missionary in order to complete the arrangements required for the proper
keeping of the houses and goods, and then he followed on horseback down
to Chefoo. The prompt appearance of the ships in the harbor and the
removal of the missionaries seem to have made a most wholesome impression
on the people, and the excitement soon subsided, and a rather general
desire prevailed, even among the non-Christian Chinese, that they should
return. The American minister at Peking also greatly gratified the
refugees and their fellow-laborers from the United States by the to them
somewhat novel experience of his taking an earnest practical interest
in their welfare. He advised them to return to Tengchow, and solicited
the privilege of sending them back on an American warship. After an
absence of about a month Dr. Mateer went thither on a preliminary trip,
and was pleasantly surprised at the friendly altitude of the people. In
due time the other missionaries and their families followed; but at the
meeting of the synod which ensued a little later he was compelled, after
a brief sojourn at Tengchow, to go down to Shanghai and remain there for
a year and a half in charge of the mission press. Just how real was the
danger that caused this temporary flight to Chefoo, and how imminent,
is a secret that perhaps no man clearly knew, and which certainly the
missionaries never ascertained. Writing in his Journal, just after his
return, concerning his reluctant acquiescence in the vote of all except
himself in favor of going, he says:

    Nevertheless acquiescence was one of the hardest trials of my
    life. My mind was filled that night with a tumult of emotions;
    and I did not sleep a wink till the morning light dawned. I did
    not know how much I loved Tengchow, and perhaps I overrated the
    damage our leaving would do to our own cause here, especially
    to our schools. I am not sure, however, that I did. The future
    remains to be seen. God may, and I trust he will, turn it to be
    a blessing both to us and to the native Christians. Aside from
    the question of the actual amount of danger at that time I felt
    a strong aversion to going in any case, unless when my life was
    in such instant peril that there was no possible doubt.... I am
    not yet convinced, however, and though I do not wish to make
    any rash vows, yet I think that I will not fly from Tengchow
    again unless there is a great deal more imminent danger.

When, in 1894-95, the war between Japan and China raged, Tengchow being
a port on the sea, and not far from Japan, was of course likely to be a
place directly involved in the hostilities. The missionaries elected to
remain at their post, and asked the consular agent of the United States
at Chefoo to notify the proper military official of their presence,
number, calling, and nationality, and to say that in case of attack they
would hoist the American flag over the mission premises, and that if the
Chinese found themselves unable to defend the city they would exert
their influence to have it surrendered without loss of life. The Japanese
did come, and they, as a diversion from the seizure of Wei-hai-wei,
bombarded the place on three successive days. As to this, Dr. Mateer says
in his autobiographical sketch for his college classmates, “I watched
the progress of affairs from the lookout on top of my house, but escaped
untouched, though eight shells fell close around the house, and one went
over my head so close that the wind from it made me dodge.”

During the Boxer uprising of 1899-1900, though the movement originated
in Shantung, the missionaries and native Christians of that province
suffered less than in adjacent provinces. The reason for this is that
after the murder of Brooks in 1899, the anti-foreign governor, Yu Haien,
was at the solicitation of the missionaries and the Foreign Office
removed. Unfortunately he was not deposed, but was merely changed to
Shansi. This accounts for the terrible carnage there. The new governor
of Shantung, the since famous Yuan Shih K’ai, did his best to hold the
Boxers in check in his own province, and in the main was successful. The
prompt and efficient action of Consul Fowler, of Chefoo, in removing the
missionaries from the interior also helped to save life. Still it was
bad enough in the western parts even of Shantung. The native Christians
in many places were robbed, beaten, and so far as possible compelled by
threat of death to disown their faith. The story of the destruction of
the property of the mission at Wei Hsien, and the narrow escape of the
missionaries, through the courage of one of their number, is about as
thrilling as any that is told of that period of widespread burning and
carnage. In the eastern side of the province, beyond ominous excitement
at such places as Tengchow and Chefoo, there was no serious disturbance.
Probably this was due in part to the wholesome respect which the Chinese
living not too far from the sea had come to feel for foreign war vessels,
and for the troops which they could promptly disembark.

Just before the siege of Peking began Dr. Mateer had made his visit to
that city, to bury his brother John. The earlier part of 1900 he remained
at Tengchow quietly at his work, and sending his orders just as usual
for supplies needed by the college and personally. In July, by order
of the American consul, the missionaries were brought down to Chefoo
on a gunboat. Dr. Mateer and Mr. Mason Wells, however, lingered behind
for a while. It was vacation, and Dr. Mateer occupied his time with the
Mandarin version. Among the Chinese a wild rumor gained some currency
that he was leading an army of many thousand men to relieve Peking; and
the fact that his _fiancée_ was shut up there gave at least piquancy to
the report. Later he went on down to Shanghai, and there spent six months
on the Revision Committee; and so he did not get back to Tengchow until
June, 1901, when the Boxer uprising was at an end.

In a communication which he published in “The Herald and Presbyter” later
in 1900, he gave at considerable length his views as to the causes of
that dreadful outbreak. These do not differ essentially from the ideas
which have come to be generally accepted in the United Stales. The
missionary propaganda he frankly acknowledges to have, by the very nature
of its message, aroused the malignity of evil men; and this also to have
been much aggravated by the habit of Roman Catholics of standing between
their converts and the enforcement of Chinese laws; but he denied that
this was the main cause. He holds that the outbreak was chiefly due to
the traditional hatred of foreigners; to the territorial aggressions of
the western nations in China; to the ill treatment of Chinese abroad and
in their own ports by foreigners; and last, but by no means least, to the
German operations in Shantung, consisting of their revenge for the murder
of some German priests, the occupation of Kiao-chow, and the survey and
building of a railroad through the province. The high-handed encroachment
of Russia in Manchuria and the construction of a railroad through that
province, and the guarding of it by Russian troops, added fuel to the
flames. Summing up, he says: “The whole movement is anti-foreign,—against
all nationalities and occupations, ministers of governments, consuls,
merchants, missionaries, teachers, and engineers, railroads, telegraphs,
churches, schools, and Christian converts,—everything in short that is in
any way connected with the detested foreigner. It is the conservatism of
old China rising up and bracing itself for one last desperate struggle to
suppress the new China that is supplanting it.”

Another of the trials that touched deeply his heart was the contact into
which he was brought with the sufferings of the people through famine. In
1876, 1877, and 1878 there was great scarcity in the general region of
Tengchow, and consequently the prices for food rose so high that it was
impossible for the poor to obtain the necessaries of life. Dr. Mateer, as
also other missionaries, helped them to the extent of his ability, and
became the almoner of charitable people who sent money from western lands
to buy food for the famishing. But in 1889 he was brought face to face
as never before in his life with destitution in China. The inconstancy
of the Yellow River was one cause of the terrible disaster. Twice within
about a third of the nineteenth century it had changed its bed; and as a
consequence, finding its new channel too small to carry off the waters
in times of heavy and protracted rain, it had repeatedly flooded vast
districts, often to a depth of several feet, carrying destruction to
the mud walls of the buildings and desolation to the cultivated ground.
Drought also in a portion of northwestern Shantung had prevailed to such
an extent as to prevent the growth and maturing of grains and vegetables.
At last a climax was reached by these disasters; and it was recognized
by missionaries and others as so awful in its character and so vast in
its sweep that a Famine Relief Committee for Shantung was organized, and
an appeal was made for help from Great Britain and the United States,
and from the southern ports of China. At least two hundred thousand
dollars came in response, and it was especially in connection with the
distribution of this that Dr. Mateer was brought into direct personal
contact with the suffering. Districts were assigned to missionaries and
others, and a careful canvass with the aid of reliable helpers was made.
They ascertained that many tens of thousands of the people had wandered
away from their homes, either to seek food or at least to leave to the
more feeble and helpless such sustenance as might yet remain. No one
ever was able to form a definite idea of the number who had died from
starvation, either on their wanderings or at their places of residence.
The canvassers found multitudes trying to sustain life by eating the
husks of grain, the seeds and roots of grasses and weeds, the bark of
trees, and the blades of wheat. Some of those who had been considered
rich had provided themselves with poison, so as to take their own lives
when they must come to the point where to live would be to see their
children perish from starvation. The allowance furnished by the relief
fund to an individual was fixed at about a cent a day in all ordinary
cases, and it was ascertained that on this allowance at least a hundred
thousand lives were saved. On some old, faded Chinese sheets of paper,
closely written with his own hand, the record of a part of Dr. Mateer’s
experiences in the famine canvass, out in northwestern Shantung, has come
down to us. As it is all now a thing of the remote past, there probably
would be no good in recording the dreadful details here. It is a story
of children reduced to skeletons, eager to lick up every crumb as big
as a pinhead that fell from the bit of coarse bread given them; of men
and women falling down on their knees and begging for food for their
families, and bursting into tears at the prospect of relief; of the sale
of wives and daughters to procure something to eat; of unburied corpses,
and of graves just filled with those who have perished. He said under
date of April 9, 1889: “It is the hardest work I ever did in my life. To
look all day long on a continual succession of starving people, and to be
beset by their entreaties to enroll more names than you can, is very hard
on the nerves. There is no end to the starving people.” Again, May 17,
he said: “After seven weeks and two days I am at last about to leave for
Tsinan. We have now enrolled about thirty-three thousand, and the work of
enrollment in this place is finished.” What as to the religious outcome?
The impression made upon multitudes even in excess of those who received
aid was most favorable to Christianity. One of the leading Chinese
assistants in the work wrote to the people who furnished the aid: “This
must be the right religion. If not, why is it that the followers of other
religions do not do such things?” Thus they were willing to examine into
Christianity, and the more they examined, the more they believed, until
they were converted to Christ. As an ultimate outcome, several hundred
were received into the churches.

The controversies which he had with some of his fellow-missionaries in
China were a serious trial to him. He was not by inclination “a man of
war,” but in connection with the prosecution of the missionary work in
which he was engaged in common with his brethren, questions of great
practical and immediate importance arose, and as to some of these he
had strong convictions that were at variance with those of other wise
and able men on the field. It was best for the cause that these should
be thoroughly discussed, and there was much that could be fairly and
earnestly urged upon either side. All that could be rightly demanded was
that the “fighting” should be open and honorable, and that it should
be conducted in such a manner as not to hinder the missionary work or
to descend into personal controversy. Dr. Mateer, as to ability and
efficiency, stood in the front rank of those who were giving their lives
to the evangelization of China. It was his duty to express his views
on these questions, and to do this in such a way that no one could
misapprehend them. If any fault could be found with him in this matter,
perhaps it would be that he saw his own side so vividly that he was not
always able to recognize the entire force of that which was said in favor
of what ran counter to it. Those who knew him well and appreciated the
greatness and tenderness of his heart waived the sting which sometimes
seemed to be in his words; but perhaps some others who were not so well
acquainted with him occasionally winced under its pungency. Everyone who
was concerned in these discussions, long ago has come to recognize him in
these as an earnest, capable man, trying to do his duty as he saw it.

By far the most protracted of these controversies was over the word that
ought to be used in Chinese to express the idea of God. Under date of
November 4, 1865, he made this entry in his Journal: “This week I had a
note from Mr. Mills, saying that a proposition was current at Peking to
get out a Union New Testament in Mandarin, and to use in it _Tien Chu_
for God, and _Sheng Shen_ for Holy Spirit, and that all but Mr. ⸺ had
signed it. I cannot sign it at all; I am utterly opposed to any such
a proceeding. I cannot conscientiously use these words.” That was his
first gun in a battle that for him completely ended only with his life.
His contributions to the discussion were sufficient to be in substance,
as we have already seen, gathered into a separate volume. In 1907 his
“Letter Book” shows that he was still remonstrating against a request
to the Bible societies to employ for God and for spirit Chinese terms
that violated his convictions. His very last recorded utterance on the
subject was in a letter dated November 17, 1907. In it he expresses
his gratification that in an edition of the New Testament for China,
issued by an English Bible society, they were “to use the terms _Shen_
and _Sheng Ling_ for God and Spirit.” He added: “This suits me. These
and these only are the right terms, and despite all appearances will
ultimately win in the really orthodox and evangelistic church of China.”
It is not improbable that the drift of opinion for various reasons as to
this was against him; but it was in this faith that he died.

As to his part in the discussion concerning what came to be known as
“Methods of Missions,” no more need be said here than that the men who
took part in this were alike seeking the best solution of a difficult
problem, and never wavered in unbroken fellowship and confidence as
comrades in the larger work of giving the gospel to China. It was not
until 1905 that Dr. Mateer published his book on this subject, and then
only when urged by some of his associates.

In the battle as to English in the college, Dr. Mateer had to yield to
the majority who came into control after the removal to Wei Hsien. He
was great enough not to allow the new policy to chill his love for the
institution, or to stay his hands from such help as, in addition to his
occupation with the Mandarin version, it was possible for him to lend
either by influence or money, or even by physical toil. In his final
relations with the college he proved himself to be still its loyal and
generous supporter.

It has often been remarked that one never meets a foreign missionary who
has thrown himself or herself unreservedly into the work who is unhappy.
They are human, and feel their trials often keenly; but their faces shine
with an inward peace, and they rejoice over the one sheep, or the many,
whom they have found in the wilderness and won to Christ. When Dr. Mateer
advanced in age, and thought of what he had helped to accomplish for
the evangelization of China, he must have felt a satisfaction such as
seldom possesses a soul. In view of this supreme joy it almost seems out
of place here to tell of the “incidents by the way” which ministered to
his pleasure. One of these consisted of the signs of appreciation shown
him by men or bodies of men whose commendation meant something worth
while. We have seen how the missionaries on the field trusted and honored
him by calling him to leadership in several most important enterprises
looking toward large and permanent results. But others besides
missionaries recognized him as worthy of their honors and trust. Hanover
College in 1880 conferred on him the doctorate of divinity. In 1888 the
University of Wooster, for his “attainments, literary and scientific,
philosophical and theological, and for his success in his work as a
Christian missionary and teacher,” gave him the doctorate of laws. At
the centennial of his alma mater in 1902, Washington and Jefferson
College also conferred on him the doctorate of laws, in recognition of
his “distinguished ability and service as a scholar and minister of the
gospel.” In 1894, the British and Foreign Bible Society by making him
an honorary foreign member gave him an exceptional distinction. In
August, 1898, his lifelong friend, Rev. Dr. W. A. P. Martin, who had
been called to the headship of the new Imperial University planned for
Peking, wrote to him, asking whether he would accept the deanship of the
school of engineering; but in reply he declined, on the dual ground that
he was under obligation to continue in his missionary work and in the
translation of the Scriptures. In December of the same year he received
from the “superintendent” of the new Imperial University at Nanking an
invitation to become the “head master” of that nascent institution.
Coming as this did directly from that high Chinese dignitary, it was an
extraordinary mark of respect and confidence; but this also he declined,
and for the same reasons as in the preceding case. In writing of these
offers he said to one of the secretaries of the Board of Missions:

    Both these positions offered me a salary much greater than
    a missionary gets. Though not now doing much active work
    in teaching in the college, I yet feel that my work and
    influence here are very important. Having embarked in the
    work of Bible translation, I cannot turn my back upon it,
    unless the conditions of the work itself constrain me to do
    so. Also I am anxious to preach,—especially to work in revival
    meetings amongst the native churches. I also value highly the
    opportunity I have to preach to the students of the college.

One of the minor but notable honors that came to Dr. Mateer was the
celebration of his seventieth birthday at Wei Hsien. The Chinese have a
curious custom as to the birthday of the emperor, and perhaps of other
distinguished persons; they celebrate it a year, a month, and a day in
advance of the true date. This custom was followed on the occasion of
Dr. Mateer’s seventieth birthday. An eyewitness has given the following
graphic description of the affair:

    “The alumni and students of the college planned the “birthday
    party”; and a most elaborate affair it was. In the morning
    a long procession of hired rejoicers, with gay banners and
    doleful native bands, marched into the compound from the
    city and were reviewed at the great gate by Dr. Mateer and
    the college faculty. Wasn’t it a fortunate thing that the
    doctor-of-laws hood of Dr. Mateer agreed so well with the
    Chinese idea of crimson as the most appropriate color for any
    celebration? At the chapel, which was packed to the limit
    with natives and out-of-town guests, presentation speeches
    which none but Orientals would ever have sat through, and
    responses were made, world without end. The most successful
    native pastor in this part of China, who was once Dr. Mateer’s
    table boy, spoke first. The highest officials of the country
    were present in all their grandeur, looking properly haughty
    and impressive,—though I shall never cease feeling that the
    typical expression of dignity and authority in China resembles
    the lime-in-the-mouth look more closely than anything else.
    If a concrete argument for the existence of the college were
    necessary, I can think of none better than a look at the
    alumni. Such splendid, manly fellows they were, with keen,
    intelligent faces! Some have become wealthy business men, who
    show their appreciation; and many are native pastors and
    teachers. A double quartet of college students furnished the
    music; and it was remarkable how well they sang the complicated
    part tunes. They have had no regular training, but have kept at
    it by themselves, and have surprised us all by their progress.
    But for the music, the real, soul-uplifting music, give me the
    native band! Imagine several bagpipes and flutes, diminutive
    drums, and two or three toy trumpets which sound only one note;
    and then conceive of each player carrying on an independent
    enterprise, and you may know something about the Chinese native
    band. It is too rare for words. Large bunches of firecrackers
    fastened on tripods, and cannon crackers, were used all through
    the festivities, so that it seemed exactly like the Fourth of
    July. A Chinese feast was given to all the invited guests, and
    the rabble from the villages near by encamped on the compound
    and ate the lunches they had carried about with them all
    morning in their handkerchiefs. It was a great day for the
    college, and a great occasion for the village people; but most
    demoralizing to language study. The gold-embroidered, scarlet
    banners were so many and so immense that since that one day in
    the church no place has been found sufficiently large to hang
    them.”

In the general section of China where he lived he made many journeys.
Over that part of Shantung situated to the east of the Yellow River he
traveled often, and far and wide. Several times he visited Peking. Once,
as we have seen, he went down the Grand Canal, to Nanking, and the lower
Yangtse. Frequently he steamed up and down the coast to Shanghai, and
once as far south as Ningpo. But those immense and populous provinces
situated in the west and south of China he never visited, not because he
was not interested in them, or could not afford the expense, but because
he could not spare the time. In the spring of 1868 the “Shenandoah,”
an American war steamer, came to Tengchow on its way to Korea, where
search was to be made for any survivors that might remain from the
“General Sherman,” lost there two years before. The “Shenandoah” wanted
an interpreter, and by general consent the duty seemed to fall on Dr.
Mateer, so that he fell constrained to accept, though the health of his
wife and other affairs rendered this very inconvenient. The cruise lasted
about six weeks, and carried them to several places on the west coast
of Korea, and among these to the river Pyeng Yang, since so familiar to
readers of missionary journals, and to those who followed the Japanese
troops on their march against the Russians in the recent war. That was
then a “forbidden land” to foreigners, and the expedition found it
difficult to get into peaceable or forcible communication with officials
or other natives, and accomplished almost nothing. In the light of the
fuller present knowledge of that politically unhappy but religiously
hopeful country the observations of the interpreter or of any of the
other persons belonging to the expedition are now of little interest.

Dr. Mateer came back to the United States only three times on furlough
during the more than forty-five years that intervened between his
sailing for China in 1863 and his death. The first of these absences from
China began in May, 1879, and ended about the first of January, 1881.
Under the rule of the Board of Missions he was entitled to a furlough
home long before that time, but he felt that he could not sooner leave
his work. He also held the opinion that there is usually no sufficient
reason to justify this privilege to a young missionary so early as is
established custom. His wife, on account of health, had preceded him
some six months. He came by way of Japan, and brought with him two
Mills children, their mother having died. They crossed the Pacific on
a slow vessel, but the voyage was delightful, and in about as great a
contrast as is possible with his experience on the ship which originally
carried him to China. He was made more than comfortable and the captain
went out of his way in order to show him courtesies. On arrival in the
United States his time was spent in the main as by other home-coming
missionaries,—in family reunions, visiting here and there, preaching to
churches, addressing ecclesiastical meetings of various sorts, seeking
recruits among theological students, and other engagements,—the total of
which so completely fill up the time that little is left for real rest
and recuperation. To this customary list he added two other items,—a
period spent in attending medical lectures at Philadelphia, and a hasty
trip across the Atlantic to England and to Paris.

His second furlough extended from July, 1892, until October, 1893.
He went and came by the Pacific route, and was comfortable on these
voyages. Julia was with him. During that sojourn in the United States, in
addition to the occupations usually engrossing the time of a missionary
on furlough, he went to Chautauqua and studied Hebrew in order to fit
himself better for revision work. He also made at the World’s Fair at
Chicago that exhaustive examination of machinery, and especially of
electrical appliances, of which Dr. Corbett, in the quotation previously
given, has told us. One of the greatest pleasures that came to him on
this leave of absence was the privilege of once more seeing his mother,
then advanced in years. In the last of his letters to her that have come
down to us he mentions that he and Julia are at the writing just going
into the harbor at Chefoo, and he concludes by saying: “We are very glad
that we are at the end of our journey, and back again in China. This is
where our work lies, and this is where we ought to be.” It was on his
arrival at Tengchow that his students gave him that royal welcome already
described.

On September 25, 1900, he was married to Miss Ada Haven, who had been
for many years a missionary of the American Board at Peking, and as
such was recognized as an accomplished Chinese scholar and a successful
and highly esteemed teacher in the Bridgman School. Her engagement to
Dr. Mateer briefly antedated the siege of Peking, and she was one of
the company of foreigners of whose fate the western world waited with
bated breath to hear during the midsummer of 1900. In her book, “Siege
Days,” she has given an inside view of the experiences of herself and of
many others, and as such it has not only a passing but also a permanent
interest and value as a record of that remarkable episode of madness on
the part of the “old” China. After the relief of the city and a little
season of recuperation from the strain of the siege, Miss Haven came down
to Chefoo, and the marriage took place in the Presbyterian church at
Chefoo, Dr. Mateer’s old friend, Dr. Corbett, performing the ceremony.
As his wife, Ada rendered him valuable assistance, by taking part in the
preparation of the smaller book of “Mandarin Lessons.” She also greatly
helped the committee on the Mandarin version of the New Testament by
making a Greek and English concordance of their first revision. For eight
years they two walked together; and he had from her in his literary
labors, as well as in other ways, an inspiration and often a direct help
of which the world outside of their home can know very little.

His last furlough extended from June, 1902, to August, 1903. Dr. and Mrs.
Mateer came to the United States by way of the Siberian railroad and the
Atlantic, so that when he arrived in China on his return he had a second
time gone around the world. In a letter written to me in April, 1908,
he says, “We went home seven years ago by the Siberian railroad, and it
was exceedingly comfortable,—much more so than traveling in an ordinary
Pullman car.” Perhaps in the interval that had elapsed the recollection
of the discomforts that attended the first stage of that journey had
somewhat faded from his memory; or he may have had in mind only the part
that lay through Siberia proper and in European Russia. A Chinese naval
officer who had often come to his study to talk over various matters
had expressed a desire to take him and his wife over to Port Arthur
in a gunboat when they started on their homeward route. The officer
intended by this only one of those empty compliments which Orientals are
accustomed to pay, without any thought that the offer involved would be
accepted. Dr. Mateer was himself the soul of truth and honor, and, being
such, took what this officer said to him at its face value. So, in this
case, he sent word of acceptance of the offer, but an answer came back
that “after all, it would be inconvenient to take them just then, and
that orders had been left with a Chinese junk to take them.” The junk
could not come in to shore and they had to go out in a rowboat. When they
went aboard, they found that there was no cabin,—nothing, indeed, at
their command but a little hold about breast-high, stowed full of Chinese
baggage, some of it consisting of malodorous fish and onions. In order
to make room for them, the onions were piled in stacks just above on the
deck; but even this change left for human occupation merely about a cube
of five feet. The boat was crowded with Chinese passengers, and it poured
down rain, from which the Mateers could protect themselves only by
hoisting an umbrella over the hatchway which was at the same time their
only source of ventilation. It was not until the third day that they
reached Port Arthur.

It was characteristic of Dr. Mateer that under these conditions he spent
every moment of daylight in putting final touches on the manuscripts
of the “Technical Terms” and of the “Chemical Terms,” so that these
might be mailed immediately to the printer. They came very near missing
the train, and if this had happened they would have been compelled to
wait a week for another opportunity. The railroad had but recently been
completed at that end, and no regular schedule as to service had yet been
established; but with many delays and with various inconveniences, after
a week, they reached the point at which they overtook an express train
bound for Irkutsk. This was luxury indeed, compared with the beginning
of the journey. From Irkutsk onward the commendatory language of Dr.
Mateer was justified by the accommodations. The Mateers visited Moscow
and St. Petersburg; then came on to Berlin, and thence, successively,
to Düsseldorf, Cologne, Paris, and London, the latter place brilliant
with preparations for the belated coronation of King Edward, which took
place while they were there. From Liverpool they crossed the Atlantic to
Halifax, and then entered on their American vacation.

A part of the furlough he spent in efforts to secure endowment for the
Shantung College. In the prosecution of this work he visited various
churches, and in Pittsburg he remained for six weeks. It was during this
furlough that he sat as a commissioner from his presbytery in the General
Assembly at Los Angeles. Among other celebrated spots which they included
in their itinerary was the Yosemite Valley. But the part of the furlough
that probably afforded them both the most unalloyed pleasure was spent in
a visit to the region of the “old home.” His wife, in a letter, tells the
story thus:

    Ever since our marriage it had been the cherished plan of
    my husband to take me on a wedding journey when we got to
    America,—a carriage journey, to see all the spots familiar
    to his childhood. By planning with this in view we were able
    to spend the anniversary of our wedding in Mechanicsburg,
    with Calvin’s cousins. One of these made a feast for us. Many
    were the reminiscences exchanged,—a happy binding of past
    and present. In a day or two we started on the long-promised
    journey, in a “one-horse-shay,” a journey of several days,
    our stops at noon, and again overnight, always being with
    friends of his childhood. But the friend to which most of all
    he wished to introduce me was his beloved old Long Mountain;
    and as I looked first at that, and then at his glowing face, I
    saw whence, next to his Bible and catechism, he had drawn his
    sturdy love of truth and freedom. Either on that journey, or on
    subsequent trips from Mechanicsburg or Harrisburg, we visited
    all the localities familiar to his childhood,—his birthplace,
    where the wall that used to seem so high to him now appeared
    so low to the white-bearded six-footer,—the brook where the
    clover mill used to stand,—the Silver Spring church, where he
    was baptized, and its adjoining graveyard, where lie many of
    his old Scotch-Irish ancestors, under quaint inscriptions....
    It rained hard the day we visited the battle field of
    Gettysburg. This trip we took in company with an old friend of
    Calvin’s, a veteran of the war. Not less interesting were the
    surroundings of his second home, the “Hermitage.” Almost more
    noteworthy than the house was the big “bank-barn,”—the mows for
    hay, the bins for grain, the floor where he used to ride on
    horseback around and around over the grain in order to thresh
    it, the old workbench, and, above, the swallows’ nests. The
    rush of memory was so strong that the white-haired missionary
    could not keep back the tears. He showed me the little old
    schoolhouse, the stream near by, the old flour mill, within an
    inner room of which he and his boy companions used to meet on
    winter evenings around a “ten-plate” stove for debate. Another
    place of great interest was the old haunted churchyard, the
    fence of which he had mounted to fight his battle with the
    ghosts, and from which he got down a conqueror, never more to
    fear the face of man or devil.

But the most sacred of all the spots which they visited was the grave of
his mother, in the cemetery at Wooster, Ohio.

From Seattle they sailed to Japan, and thence after a short season of
fellowship with the venerable translator of the Old Testament, Bishop
Schereschewsky, and with other friends, they came back to Tengchow.




XV

FACING THE NEW CHINA

    “China is a great land, and has a great future before it. I am
    thankful that I have had the opportunity to do what I could to
    make it what it ought to be. The Church of God is bound to have
    a great triumph here, with great trials in the process.”—LETTER
    TO JAMES MOONEY, November 27, 1906.


When Dr. Mateer wrote that letter, the new China had not come. Nor has
it yet appeared. The utmost that can be said confidently is that there
are signs of a spring thaw in the vast sheet of ice that for so many
centuries has held that country in fetters. Some great rifts can be
seen in the surface and sounds that are indicative of movement can be
heard. People who stand on the shore, and some of those who are on the
ice, are shouting, “Off at last!” It seems scarcely possible that the
apparent thaw shall not continue until the streams are cleared and the
land is warmed into new life by the ascending sun. But how long it will
be before this is accomplished it is almost useless for the best-informed
men to attempt to forecast. When the ice does really go, will it be with
a sudden rush that will carry with it great injury to much that is well
worth preserving? Or will the change come so quietly and gradually that
the ice will sink without a tremor, and the frost will gently melt away
into waters that only freshen the soil? Probably the new China is not far
away; as sure as progress is the law of civilization and enlightenment
in the world, it cannot be postponed much longer. Dr. Mateer lived long
enough to recognize the signs of its approach, and while he was glad
because of this, he also was deeply anxious.

His direct acquaintance with the old China extended over the long period
of forty years,—from his arrival at Tengchow in 1863 to his return
from his last furlough, in 1903. During the five years immediately
preceding his death he was face to face with the signs indicative of
the China that is to be. He was therefore exceptionally qualified to
speak intelligently concerning the present situation in that country;
for it is not the man who now for the first time finds himself there,
amid the demand for railroads, and telegraphs, and up-to-date navy and
army, and schools, who is most competent to interpret the movements of
the hour. We are more likely to learn the whole truth if we turn to
veterans like Sir Robert Hart and Dr. W. A. P. Martin and Dr. Mateer,
who by almost lifelong experience know the real mind and heart of China;
which surely, notwithstanding the occurrences of to-day, have not been
completely changed. On the one hand, there can be no doubt of the love
which Dr. Mateer had for the people of China. To promote their welfare
in this world as well as in the next he gave himself to the uttermost
all his long time of residence among them, and when death confronted
him at last, his only reluctance to obey that call of his Master was
because he would be unable to complete what he regarded as perhaps his
greatest service for them. As we have already seen, in his explanation
of the causes of the Boxer outbreak, notwithstanding his heartbreak and
indignation for the horrors and outrages perpetrated, he lays bare the
secret of it, as consisting in part of the wrongs done by foreign nations
and persons to China and the Chinese. There were hundreds and perhaps
thousands in Shantung who revered him as a father, and confided in him as
they did in almost no other human being.

I mention this side of his attitude because there is another that must
be brought out here so clearly that no failure to see it is possible.
He never allowed himself to be blinded as to radical faults of the most
serious nature in the Chinese. It was about the same time as his entrance
on his missionary work that Americans were set agog by the “Burlingame
Mission,” and indulged in very extravagant notions of the civilization of
old China and very rosy anticipations of the future. Even missionaries
caught the fever of the hour, and for home publication wrote articles
that seconded this view. This was so completely foreign to the reality,
as Dr. Mateer saw it, that he responded with an elaborate article in
which he calmly punctured these current notions. It was the fashion
then to regard the Chinese as leading the world in past ages, but in
his opinion in none of their boasted achievements do they deserve such
credit. Largely they have been imitators; and in the realm of their own
inventions and discoveries and organizations they have seldom shown
themselves capable of making the applications that ought to have been so
patent to them that they could not miss them. Perhaps—writing as he did
in reply to overdrawn appreciations on the other side—he may have fallen
into the opposite mistake, to some degree. Perhaps also in later years
he would not have gone quite so far in the direction he then took; but
he never wavered in his opinion that in the lapse of ages during which
the Chinese had lived so exclusively within themselves, characteristics
that are racial have been developed, some of which must be overcome, and
others of which must be immensely transformed, before China can take her
place among the advanced nations of the world. Also, ignorance, prejudice
and superstition stand in the way, and cannot suddenly be dispelled. He
continued to believe that, notwithstanding the present rush to introduce
western appliances, the hatred of the foreigner, except among a minority,
remains in the heart of officials and people. He believed too that,
because of their faithlessness to obligations which they had assumed
toward other governments, the apparent aggressions of foreign nations
were not always and altogether without a measure of justification.
Chinese law he considered to be still so much a mere whim of officials,
often corrupt, that the time has not yet come for an American citizen,
whether missionary or merchant or mechanic, to be left safely to the
uncertainties of a native court.

Dr. Mateer was one of the leading “makers of the new China.” It is
because of his “Mandarin Lessons” that it is now, in comparison with
the olden times, so easy to acquire the language; thus not only the
missionary but also the agents of modern civilization are helped to gain
speedy access to the people. He was the first to plant a college in the
great province of Shantung, the birthplace of Confucius and Mencius,
and still the center to which the race turns as that from which has
emanated their most dominant cult. He took the lead, even of all the
missionary colleges, in the place which he assigned to physical science.
With his own money he built a museum which he described as “a kind of
polytechnic, for exhibiting foreign sciences and machinery to Chinese
students and visitors.” There they could see the appliances of steam and
of electricity at work, including a model railroad, and the telephone and
telegraph. When the governor of the province organized his university at
the capital, it was the man whom Dr. Mateer had made his successor in the
college at Tengchow who was at first placed at its head, and five of the
graduates were chosen to fill chairs in the new institution. He prepared
text-books in mathematics, for which there is an enormous demand in the
schools which are supplanting those of the olden time. To him more than
to any other individual is due the translation of the New Testament
into a form of the language which is just as intelligible to the man
who can read but little, as to the educated; and which cannot be widely
circulated without starting upward tendencies more mighty than those of
railroads and western machinery. It would be preposterous to claim for
any one person that he has been the maker of the new China; but there are
not very many who, as to the mighty transformation apparently not far
distant, rank so high up as Dr. Mateer.

Thus far in holding him up as one of these leaders I have not mentioned
his influence as an effective missionary in the sphere usually occupied
by the representatives of the gospel; and for the reason that, as to
this, he is a sharer with a multitude of others. At present there must
be about four thousand men and women—ordained ministers, and lay men and
women—in that line of Christian service in China, and there are about
two hundred thousand Chinese Christians. These, though scattered far and
wide among the hundreds of millions of the population, are sufficient to
be powerfully felt on the side of genuine progress. Though in rapidly
lessening numbers, their presence stretches back to the coming of Robert
Morrison, a hundred years ago. Dr. Mateer’s own judgment as to the
relation of the missionary work to the present situation is well worth
attention. In an article written by request, about nine months before his
death, he said:

    The nation is in a state of transition which, when compared
    with her past and her traditions, is nothing short of
    marvelous. Who would have predicted thirty-five years ago that
    such a state of things as the present would so soon prevail?
    God has used a variety of powerful forces to awaken China from
    her long sleep, not the least of which have been the presence
    and influence of the missionary. Aside from his main business,
    which is the conversion of individuals and the upbuilding
    of churches, he has had a powerful influence in a number of
    important matters. First, his residence in all parts of inland
    China has done far more than is generally known to remove
    prejudice and to familiarize the people with foreign ideas
    and things. Second, he has been a main factor in starting the
    anti-foot-binding movement that is now sweeping over the land.
    Third, he has been the chief mover in the remarkable anti-opium
    reformation that is now enlisting the utmost effort of the
    Chinese government. Lastly, in the intellectual awakening, and
    in starting the wonderful educational propaganda now being
    pushed forward by the government, he has been a potent factor.
    Missionaries have made the text-books, and the graduates of
    their schools have set the pace for this remarkable movement;
    and this has been done notwithstanding the intense prejudice
    that exists against Christianity and its professors.

Of the fact that he was face to face with a state of things that promised
tremendous changes he was fully conscious. No man could have been more
alive to his environment during these last years of his life. May 2,
1905, he wrote to a generous friend in the United States: “The state of
things in China to-day presents a great contrast with what it was when I
arrived here forty-one and a half years ago. Then everything was dead
and stagnant; now all is life and motion. It is just fairly beginning, it
is true, but there is the promise of great things in the near future.”
September 1, 1907, in another letter to a friend, he says: “This great
and massive people, so long below the horizon of the western world,—a
misty, unknown land,—is looming large in the east, and the eyes of the
west are on it. China is awakening from the sleep of ages. Her senses
are still dull, benumbed by the traditional customs and conservative
follies of the past, but her eyes are opening more and more, day by day.
It is true she still wants to sleep on, but she cannot. The clamor of the
world’s progress dins in her ears. Giant hands are shaking her. Specters
fill her imagination and groundless fears make her troubled. She essays
to rise, but has no strength. She is growing frantic at the realization
of her own weakness and incompetence.”

[Illustration: CELEBRATING DR. MATEER’S SEVENTIETH BIRTHDAY]

Facing the new China he, while gladdened on the whole by the outlook, yet
saw grave dangers in the way. Some of these are due, in his estimation,
to characteristics that have rooted themselves very deeply in the spirit
of the people at large. In his article on “Education in China” he said:

    It is a peculiarity of the Chinese character that they are
    very hard to convince of the utility of a new thing, and must
    always be doubly sure before they decide to act; but as soon as
    the decision is made, they at once grow recklessly impatient
    for the consummation. The old educational methods and ideals
    are now abolished and the government is rushing headlong
    into new and hitherto untried measures. They issue commands
    to their subordinates without providing the means of carrying
    them out. The result is a chaos of more or less futile effort,
    attended by burdensome taxes and illegal exactions that produce
    disaffection and rebellion. The lack of competent teachers
    handicaps the whole movement. To the eye of a western educator
    most of their primary and secondary schools are little short
    of a farce. Mission schools have trained a large number of
    competent teachers, but in most cases the prejudice against
    Christianity is so strong that heathen schools will not use
    them. This prejudice is much stronger in the secondary schools
    than it is in the provincial colleges and universities. The
    high officials generally take more liberal views, and they are
    free from the social ostracism that prevents a small official
    or a private gentleman from employing a Christian teacher.

On account of the characteristics just described, while he rejoiced in
the immense progress which Christianity was making both in the conversion
of increasing thousands and also in its indirect influence over
multitudes more, he had anxieties as to the near future of the church
in that land. Writing to one of the secretaries of the American Bible
Society, in January, 1906, he said: “If I understand the signs of the
time in China, it will not be many years—I put it at ten to fifteen—until
the Chinese church will declare her independence of the missionaries,
pay her own expenses, and make her own creed.... What this creed will
be, will depend very much on the kind and number of preachers we train
in the meantime.” The speeches made at the Chinese Students’ Alliance,
held at Hartford, August 24, 1910, both by the Chinese and by Americans,
indicate a very strong tendency in this direction.

In view of the entire situation, national and religious, he iterated
and reiterated that the most imperative duty of missionaries in China
at present is the training of native preachers and teachers on a scale
and in a manner that will fit them to meet the emergency, and to take
advantage of the opportunity for the evangelization of the land and the
starting of the church that soon must be, on a voyage that will not,
through lack of chart and compass and proper guidance, wreck itself on
the way. Here are some of his deliberate utterances within the last three
years of his life:

    Allow me to say that at the present time in China I regard
    schools and the training of teachers and preachers as the chief
    thing,—much more important than the founding of new stations,
    with expensive buildings, in order to cover new territory. This
    is not a passing thought, but is said advisedly. The time for
    training these teachers and preachers is limited; before many
    years the native church will declare her independence, when all
    will depend on the intelligence and soundness of her leaders.

Again taking a view that includes the church, but that is so broad as to
sweep over the entire national situation, he said:

    “China is fascinated by the power, skill, and knowledge of the
    west. She covets these things, and clamors impatiently for
    them, but they do not come at her call. She has caught up the
    idea that education will solve the problem and speedily lift
    her into the family of nations. She issues edicts to annul
    the old and inaugurate the new. She commands the opening of
    schools in every county, not realizing that without teachers,
    or methods, or money efficient schools are impossible. True to
    her character, she is deceiving herself with a sham; a mere
    pretense of knowledge. The old is passing faster than the new
    is coming, and there are ominous signs of danger ahead. There
    are already a good many competent Christian teachers in China,
    and very few others; but Chinese conservatism hates and fears
    Christianity, and will not employ Christian teachers if it can
    possibly be avoided. China has still one great and fundamental
    lesson to learn, namely: that Christianity is not her enemy,
    but her friend; that faithful and honest men are not made by
    simply teaching them geometry and chemistry. She will presently
    learn, however, that Christianity holds the only patent there
    is for the construction of high moral character. She resents
    the idea now, but sooner or later she will be compelled to
    admit it. In the meantime she needs men to teach her, and to
    show her the way. Never perhaps in the world’s history was the
    saying of Christ more conspicuously exemplified: “The harvest
    truly is plenteous, but the laborers are few.”

Ever since he set foot on the soil of that country he had kept on
pleading for reinforcements in his work,—now a physician, then a teacher,
again a man capable of overseeing mechanical operations, and always more
ordained missionaries. He entertained very common-sense notions as to
the sort of reinforcements that are desirable. He says in an old letter
directed to theological students in the seminary where he was trained:
“I might add more especially that missionaries should not be men of one
idea, unless perchance that idea be a zeal for saving souls. The men
needed are those who have well-balanced, practical minds.... The man of
vivacious temperament, pleasing address, ready wit, and ready utterance,
other things being equal, will make the best missionary.” The language
he did not regard as at all beyond the acquisition of any person with
fair ability and faithful application, though he recognized more than a
moderate measure of these as essential to the writing of books. As the
new China loomed up before him, his cry for help became, if possible,
more earnest; it came from the very depths of his soul, and with an
intensity which words could not adequately express.

Before proceeding to relate the story of his death, can I do better than
to give the last of these appeals of which we have the records? The
letter from which I quote is dated Wei Hsien, September 1, 1907, just a
year before his Master called him home. He said:

    Tell the young men of America for me, that China now presents
    to the church the greatest opportunity of the ages. God has
    opened the door,—opened it wide. Three hundred and fifty
    millions of people are ready to hear the gospel message. This
    door has not been opened without great strife and effort. In
    the face of steady and persistent opposition, and through much
    suffering and bloodshed, a large and lasting impression has
    been already made. The dark and discouraging days are over and
    the future is bright with promise. As I look back over the
    first twenty-five years of my missionary life, it seems like a
    troubled dream. The last fifteen years have wrought wonders in
    China. Old customs and prejudices are giving way. The bright
    dawn of better things is upon us. The most conservative and
    immovable people in the world, persistently wedded to the
    old ways, are getting used to new things, and are ready to
    accept whatever promises profit and prosperity. All ears are
    open, and the preaching of the gospel is nowhere opposed or
    resisted. I often wish I were young again, just ready to start
    in on the bright opening campaign. In a large sense the future
    of the church and of the world lies wrapped up in this great
    people. Why in the providence of God the gospel of salvation
    has not long ere this reached this oldest and greatest nation
    is an unexplained mystery. These unconverted millions of the
    Mongolian race will presently come into their inheritance of
    truth and grace, and then who shall say what they will become,
    and do? Their fecundity, their physical stamina, their patient
    persistence and intellectual vigor, are factors that will count
    in the world’s future history.... As I look at the situation
    in the light of the past, and forecasting the probabilities
    of the future, a more inviting field for the exercise of
    consecrated talent has rarely, if ever, presented itself in
    the history of civilization. Very few people in the church in
    the west understand and appreciate the present condition of
    things in China. The political forces and problems are better
    understood than the moral and religious. It is still true that
    “the children of the world are wiser in their generation than
    the children of light.” The faith of the long, old centuries
    is passing rapidly away, but what shall the new faith be? This
    is the great Christian question of the hour. The young men of
    China are mad to learn English, because there is money in it.
    With English come books and newspapers, sowing the seeds of
    agnosticism, and skepticism, and rationalism, and so forth.
    The cry is, Who will champion the truth? Who will administer
    the antidote? Who will uphold the cross? Who will testify
    for Christ? The call is urgent. Satan is in the field. The
    opportunity is passing. The time is strategic. The changes of
    many years are now crowded into one. Young men, it is time to
    be up and doing! The march of events will not wait on your
    tardiness. Who will hear the Master’s trumpet call?




XVI

CALLED UP HIGHER

    “I have given my life to China: I expect to live there, to die
    there, and to be buried there.”—FROM HIS FAREWELL ADDRESS IN
    THE CENTRAL PRESBYTERIAN CHURCH, Allegheny, Pa., 1862.

    “I expect to die in heathen China, but I expect to rise in
    Christian China.”—ANOTHER FAREWELL ADDRESS.


In the chapter on the Mandarin revision we left the committee on the Old
Testament, in the summer of 1908, at work on Genesis and the Psalms,
down at Chefoo, with the Goodrich and the Mateer family keeping house
together. Dr. Goodrich had been the dean of the Union Theological
Seminary at Peking, and so was thoroughly versed in the educational phase
of missions, still occupying so large a place in the heart and mind of
Dr. Mateer. These two men also had served together on the revision of the
New Testament, from the beginning to the end. They were in many features
of their character very different from each other, and yet in their
common labors and in their convictions they were in thorough harmony.
Mrs. Goodrich and Mrs. Mateer had come out on the same steamer in 1879,
to join the forces of the American Board, as unmarried missionaries; and
the subsequent years had served to cement their friendship. The house in
which they resided at Chefoo during that summer looked out on a charming
scene: the “island,” the bay, and the passage, with craft of all kinds,
Chinese junks and sampans, and steamers, small torpedo boats, and big
battleships of every nation, either riding at anchor or coming up into
the harbor. From the back windows the eye rested on a jagged range of
hills, crowned at the top by a curious wall, so like the views of the
Great Wall shown in pictures that ignorant sailors imagined it to be that
famous structure. One can easily understand that under such circumstances
the two families greatly enjoyed the earlier part of the session of the
committee. Dr. Goodrich, in the following quotation from the article
which he published in the January issue of “The Chinese Recorder,” in
memory of Dr. Mateer, had in mind his entire acquaintance with him,
extending over thirty-five years, but it is tinged especially with the
recollection of the preceding summer. He says:

    Much of the time we have been together in the protracted daily
    sessions of the committee, as well as in the long evening
    walks, when we talked on everything between the zenith and the
    nadir; for then his thoughts were “ready to fly East as West,
    whichever way besought them.” If he were not widely read, he
    had thought widely and deeply, being at once conservative,
    progressive, and original. He had strong opinions, and was
    at times severe and stern in maintaining them. But he loved
    those of a contrary opinion with a true and deep affection.
    From first to last he was a royal friend. Dr. Mateer thought
    naturally in terms of logic and mathematics, but not without a
    side in his nature for poetry and sentiment.

    Dr. Mateer’s character, especially during the later years,
    was constantly mellowing, and the past summer, which our two
    families spent together in our own “hired house” at Chefoo,
    must ever be remembered as one of the happiest periods of our
    lives, without a break or jar to mar its enjoyment. Was it a
    sort of unconscious preparation for the sweeter joys and more
    perfect fellowship in the dear upper home?

    Dr. Mateer worked on with his usual untiring faithfulness,
    during the last summer, though not quite well at times. How
    he lived in the Psalms, upon which he bestowed loving labor!
    Sometimes he would look out from his little study to the room
    which held all too closely his beloved wife, who has followed
    the Bible revision with an interest scarcely less intense than
    his own, and consult with her on some difficult phrase, or tell
    her of some beautiful figure he had succeeded in translating.

    In the early morning we took a dip in the sea—he was a good
    swimmer—and after he had “talked with Him,” at six o’clock he
    was ready for his teacher. In the evening his walks were less
    regular and shorter than in other years.

In explanation of one sentence of the preceding it needs to be stated
that by an accident Mrs. Mateer was then so disabled that she kept her
room.

During the summer he suffered from a chronic tendency to dysenteric
diarrhea, yet it was not until well toward the close of the session
of the Committee that he remained in bed for the entire day. At first
he worked on there, upon the translation of the Psalms, which he was
especially anxious to give to the people in such language that they
could readily catch it with the ear, and that the Psalms might be to the
Chinese church the rich heritage they are to the English-speaking race.
At length it became evident that his case was fast becoming so critical
that if medical aid under the most favorable conditions could save his
life, the very best that could be had must be secured at once. So it was
decided that he ought to go on a steamer down to Tsingtao in the German
concession. It would require twenty-four hours to make the trip; but when
asked whether he was able to endure the journey, he replied: “I must. I
shall die if I remain here.”

The necessity for the change was not due to any lack of medical care
or friendly ministrations at Chefoo; it was made in order to secure
the superior advantages which a good hospital affords. Fortunately the
voyage was quiet. His wife went with him; and Dr. and Mrs. Goodrich
also accompanied them. It was Tuesday night when they reached Tsingtao,
and friends were at the landing; and, supported in loving arms, he was
carried at once in a carriage to the Faber Hospital, where Dr. Wunsch,
a skilled physician, exhausted his efforts to save him. Dr. Hayes was
already there, and at Dr. Mateer’s request spent each day in the hospital.

Friday of that week was the anniversary of their marriage, but it was
impracticable for his wife to be brought to his bedside. Saturday it
became evident that the end was not far away, and she was permitted
to see him; and he seemed so comforted by her presence, though he was
too weak to talk much, that they allowed her to stay. In response to
a telegram, his brother Robert and Madge, his wife, came at once.
Saturday afternoon his mind wandered, and seemed to run on the affairs
of the college. Sunday morning he asked Robert to pray with him; and in
connection with this one of the great passions that had long possessed
him manifested itself. As on the journey down on the boat he lay
exhausted, he had said to Dr. Goodrich: “They must do their best to cure
me at the hospital, so that I can finish the Psalms. That is all I have
to live for now”—meaning, of course, by this, only the work to which he
had given himself. Now, when his brother in his prayer asked that the
sufferer at whose bedside he knelt might be given an abundant entrance
into the heavenly rest, Dr. Mateer cried out: “Raise your faith a notch
higher, Robert. Pray that I may be spared to finish the translation of
the Psalms.” Then he asked that Dr. Hayes be called in, and he requested
him to pray for this; and when this was done he added, “O Lord, may this
prayer be answered!”

On Sabbath when some of his “boys,” alumni of the Shantung College, who
were living in the town came to see him, he was so weak that he could
only say to them, “Good-by.”

All those last days he took great comfort in prayer. As he gradually went
down into the shadow of death, his faith continued firm and bright. To
an inquiry by his wife as to his trust in Christ, he replied: “Yes, I
have nothing to fear.” Some time before the end he said to his brother
Robert, “I have laid up all in my Father’s keeping.” The very last
words which he was heard distinctly to articulate were indicative of a
passion that possessed his soul even far more strongly than his desire to
complete his work on the Scriptures. Those who knew him most intimately
recognized in him a man of extraordinary reverence for God,—for him
whom, from his childhood’s memorizing of the catechism on to the end, he
believed to be infinite, eternal, and unchangeable in his being, wisdom,
power, holiness, justice, goodness, and truth. He was one of those who
in the public services of a house of worship always stood in prayer,
though about him all might be sitting in their seats. He thought no other
posture except kneeling or standing appropriate in this act of social
worship. His whole conception of religion, theoretical and practical, was
saturated with a holy fear of God. To him God was his heavenly Father,
who has manifested himself above all else in the person and work of
Jesus Christ, and unto whom he constantly turned with holy boldness; but
whenever he came consciously into the divine presence he was devoutly
reverent. It was in keeping with his whole religious life, therefore,
that his last audible words, were “Holy! Holy! True and Mighty!” Then—not
long afterward—he fell asleep. He died at 10:25 in the morning of
September 28, 1908.

Among his papers a little book was found which when it was opened proved
to be a collection of private prayers recorded in 1863, the year in which
he went to China. The last of these prayers is the following:

    Permit not the great adversary to harass my soul, in the last
    struggle, but make me a conqueror, and more than a conqueror
    in this fearful conflict. I humbly ask that my reason may be
    continued to the last, and if it be Thy will, that I may be so
    comforted and supported that I may leave testimony in favor of
    the reality of religion, and thy faithfulness in fulfilling
    thy gracious promises, and that others of thy servants who
    may follow after, may be encouraged by my example to commit
    themselves boldly to the guidance and keeping of the Shepherd
    of Israel. And when my spirit leaves this clay tenement, Lord
    Jesus receive it. Send some of the blessed angels to conduct my
    inexperienced soul to the mansion which thy love has prepared.
    And oh, let me be so situated, though in the lowest rank, that
    I may behold thy glory!

This prayer, which in his young manhood he had recorded in that little
book, was fulfilled so far as its petitions concerned his end upon earth;
and who doubts that equally fulfilled were also those petitions which
looked forward to his entrance upon the eternal life?

At Tsingtao a funeral service was held in the little Chinese Presbyterian
chapel. Among those present were Rev. Dr. Bergen and Rev. W. P. Chalfant,
from the Shantung Presbyterian Mission, then holding a meeting at Wei
Hsien, representatives from the Basel and Berlin Protestant Missions, and
a large number of Chinese. After the casket was placed in the church,
former students of the Shantung College came in with long wreaths of
immortelles, and so festooned these about the coffin that they could
remain on the journey yet to be taken. Addresses were delivered in both
English and Chinese, and were full of appreciation for the missionary
just gone up higher. The Chinese speakers were some of his own “boys,”
who then testified to their appreciation of their “old master,” as they
were accustomed to call him. After the service the casket was taken to
the same steamer on which he had been brought down, and thus was removed
to Chefoo, in care of his brother Robert and Mr. Mason Wells. That
evening the casket was escorted by a number of Chinese Christian young
men to the rooms of the Naval Young Men’s Christian Association; and the
next morning to Nevius Hall, on Temple Hill, where it remained until the
time of burial, covered with flowers provided by loving hands.

During this delay the missionaries up at Tengchow had, in response to a
telegram, exhumed the remains of Julia, and caused them to be transferred
to Chefoo, where they were placed in the vault prepared in the cemetery.
Her monument, however, was left standing in the original burial place,
and the name of Dr. Mateer has also been inscribed on it.

The funeral service was at 2.45 P.M., on Sabbath; and the large, new
church on Temple Hill was filled to overflowing. The conduct of this
service was in the hands of the Chinese, Pastor Wang of the Temple Hill
church presiding, and Pastor Lwan of the Tengchow church assisting. In
a sermon based on Revelation 14:13, Pastor Wang spoke of Dr. Mateer’s
long and active life, of his power as a preacher who addressed himself
straight to the hearts of the people, and of the enduring character of
the work he had accomplished. Rev. Lwan followed in an address in which
he dwelt upon the large number of people who would mourn the death of
Dr. Mateer, and the many different places where memorial services would
be held; on his adaptability to all classes of men in order to win them
to Christ, and on his unfailing assurance that the gospel would finally
triumph in China.

The English service followed immediately afterward in the cemetery; but
on account of the large number of foreign missionaries who had come, and
the limited space, announcement had to be made before leaving the church
that of the many Chinese who were present, only those who had been Dr.
Mateer’s students could be admitted. One of the great regrets incident to
the burial was that Dr. Corbett, who had come out to China with him on
that long first voyage, and who had been his close associate on the field
in so much of the work, and who cherished for him the warmest regard,
could not be present. He was away in a country field when death came to
Dr. Mateer, and the news did not reach him in time for him to return to
the funeral. In his absence Rev. Dr. W. O. Elterich, of Chefoo, conducted
the service. After he had spoken, Rev. J. P. Irwin, of Tengchow,—who
had been associated with Dr. Mateer in the same station, and who as a
consequence knew him intimately,—bore his testimony especially to the
unceasing activity of the life of him whose body was about to be lowered
into the grave, and the impossibility that his work should have been
finished even if he had lived to be a hundred years old; to the warm
heart hidden beneath an exterior that did not always reveal it; and to
the purpose now fulfilled, but formed nearly half a century before by him
and by her whose remains now rest at his side, to spend their whole lives
in giving the gospel to China, and to be buried in its soil.

Their graves are in a very beautiful spot, directly in front of the upper
walk leading in from the gate, and in close proximity to those of Dr.
Nevius and of others of their missionary friends and associates.

[Illustration: AT THE GRAVE OF DR MATEER]

The tributes paid to his character and work were so numerous, both out
in China and in the United States and in other Christian lands, that all
that is practicable here is to make some selections that may serve as
representatives. That of Dr. Corbett deserves the place of precedence.
Their strong attachment was mutual. In an article filling several
columns of “The Presbyterian Banner,” Dr. Corbett paid his tribute to
his deceased friend. Much of this is of necessity a condensed rehearsal
of his life and of the leading characteristics therein revealed. He
concludes by saying:

    Personally I shall ever esteem it one of the greatest blessings
    of my life that it has been my privilege to have enjoyed
    the friendship, and of being a colaborer with this great
    man for nearly fifty years. More than forty years ago it
    was my privilege to spend with him weeks and months on long
    itinerating journeys, preaching daily to hundreds who had never
    heard the gospel, and at no place finding Christians to cheer
    our hearts. Often after a long day of exhaustion, preaching in
    the open air at great markets and on crowded streets, in the
    evening we would kneel together at the inn and earnestly pray
    for God’s richest blessing upon our efforts to bring men to a
    saving knowledge of the truth. Often the thought came into our
    mind, Can these dry bones live? Shall we live to see Christian
    churches established and shepherded by Chinese pastors? His
    unwavering faith in the ultimate and universal triumph of the
    gospel in China was a tower of strength to all associated
    with him. When the news of his death reached me at our inland
    station, the thought rushed into my mind: “Know ye not that
    there is a prince and a great man fallen this day in Israel?”

    The world will ever seem more lonely without him. His sympathy
    and help could always be counted on in every kind of true
    missionary work. His labors were crowned with success and honor
    continuously, until he was summoned by the Master to a higher
    and wider sphere where his saints serve him.

It seems to me that the man who is entitled to be heard next is the
Rev. Dr. W. M. Hayes, now of Tsingchow fu, but formerly—after the
resignation of Dr. Mateer—the head of the Tengchow College. There is
no one of his associates on the mission field in whom Dr. Mateer had
greater confidence; and for years they were in such constant contact
that they knew each other most thoroughly. A few days after the burial
a memorial service was held at Wei Hsien, and at this Dr. Hayes made
an extended address before an audience including the students of the
college. The respective lines of thought which he first elaborated were
his faithfulness to Christ’s service, his resolution, his attention to
great matters, and his industry. In the conclusion he said:

    Let us strive to make his strong spiritual qualities our own.
    Of these, the most conspicuous were three: First, his faith.
    The morning he died, replying to an inquiry of his brother,
    he said, “I have left those things long ago in the hands of
    my Father.” Later, and only a few hours before his death, he
    said, as if speaking to himself, “We are justified of the
    Lord Jesus.” It is not strange that with such a faith he fell
    asleep as a little child would in its mother’s arms. Second,
    his reverential spirit. Though he did not fear the face of
    man, and was outspoken in his convictions, yet, especially
    in his later years, as one who had served with him on the
    Translation Committee from the first remarked, his reverence in
    approaching the divine presence was apparent to all. This was
    characteristic of him to the end. The last distinct utterance
    which he made was, “Holy! Holy! Holy! True and Mighty.” Lying
    prone on his couch, it seemed as if he saw the King in his
    beauty, and the vision filled his soul with godly fear.
    Third, his forgiving spirit. Being a man of decided views, and
    disapproving of what did not seem to him wise and good, he did
    not always approve of the course taken by his colleagues; yet
    if convinced that a man was working with a single heart for the
    interest of Christ’s kingdom, he was ready to forgive, and to
    hope for the best. He loved the Lord who had forgiven him, and
    so loved those who had offended against himself. This extended
    both to those with whom he labored, and to those for whom he
    labored. One of his marked characteristics was not to give over
    any man who had fallen away, and he was always ready to give
    him another chance.

I have already noticed the intimacy of Dr. Chauncey Goodrich, of Peking,
with Dr. Mateer. The tribute which he paid his long-time friend, and his
associate and captain on the Mandarin Revision Committee through the many
years of their labors, is perhaps the most comprehensive of all that have
been published. It filled fourteen pages of “The Chinese Recorder,” and
touches all the leading features of the life and work of Dr. Mateer. What
he says as to the Mandarin version has especial weight. His testimony was:

    In the interest of truth it must be added that no man gave
    so much time and hard work, or dug quite so deep. His effort
    to produce a translation which should match the original,
    to translate the figures and preserve their beauty, was
    extraordinary.... At these sessions Dr. Mateer by his strong
    and masterful personality, as well as by the thoroughness of
    his preparation, did much to set the style of the work.

Turning to some of his leading characteristics, he proceeded thus:

    First, his personality. In the Conference of 1890, Dr. Wright,
    secretary of the British and Foreign Bible Society, was
    with us. He remarked that “of all the men present at that
    conference, there were two whose personality most impressed
    him.” One of these was Dr. Mateer. He bore himself like a
    sort of prince among men, _facile princeps_. He was born to
    lead, not to follow. Having worked out his own conclusions, he
    was so sure of them that he expected, almost demanded, their
    acceptance by others. Yet he was not arrogant and was truly
    humble. Moreover, he could ask forgiveness for words that he
    felt had been too hasty or too harsh, feeling much broken by
    giving pain to a friend. In this he showed his greatness. He
    could also forgive and forget. But he was still a leader by the
    very force of his personality.

    He had the quality of perseverance in a large degree.
    Having undertaken a work, he held to it with unwavering and
    unconquerable persistence to the end, ... and that not only
    because he gripped the work, but because the work gripped him.
    Had his life been spared, he would have worked steadily on
    through the Old Testament till the last verse of Malachi was
    finished, and the whole was carefully reviewed. Of Dr. Mateer’s
    habit of working till the end was reached Dr. Hamilton writes:
    “Not many months ago, at a meeting of the Shantung Board of
    Directors, we had a considerable amount of unfinished business,
    and the week was hastening to its close. No one had more work
    awaiting him at home than the Doctor. Yet when the question
    of the time of our dispersion was raised, he said: ‘I have
    always made it a rule, when I attend meetings of this kind, to
    finish up the business in hand, no matter how long it takes.’”
    United to this quality of perseverance was a kindred quality of
    thoroughness, that appeared in everything he attempted.

    Dr. Mateer possessed a rugged strength of character. He was
    almost Spartan in his ability to endure hardships, and in his
    careless scorn for the amenities and “elegant superfluities”
    of modern life. Yet “beneath a rugged and somewhat austere
    exterior” he had a heart of remarkable tenderness. He was a
    block of granite with the heart of a woman.

Rev. Mr. Baller also had been associated with Dr. Mateer in the revision
of the Scriptures since 1900. He says of him:

    He has left behind him an example of strenuous toil that it
    would be difficult to parallel; of iron constitution, he was
    able to do an amount of work that would have killed most men.
    His devotion to the cause of Christ was beyond praise. His
    recreation consisted in change of occupation, and he made all
    tend to the one end.

Ada, who in the last eight years of his life stood nearer to him by
far than any other, and knew his innermost life, puts on record this
supplement as to some of his traits not so fully brought out by the
testimony of his friends:

    Next to his reverence, the most noteworthy feature of his
    character was his love of truth: truth in the abstract,
    scientific truth and truth in the common conversation of life,
    but especially in matters of religion. He had no patience with
    the popular maxim that it does not matter what a man believes,
    so long as he is sincere. “Is there no such thing as truth?”
    he would say. “Does it make no difference to a man whether the
    bank in which he invests is broken? Men are not such idiots in
    the ordinary affairs of life.” If it came to a choice between a
    polite lie and the impolite truth, he would choose the latter.
    He exalted truth above every other virtue. His love of it freed
    him from that trammeling of conventionality which binds so
    many. He would be the slave of no man-made custom.

    Associated with this characteristic, perhaps a result of it,
    was the kindred love of freedom. One of his favorite texts was,
    “And ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you
    free.” This sturdy independence he sought to impress on all
    minds coming under his influence. He had no patience with that
    kind of education that simply trained the Chinese to become
    “lackeys of the foreigners.” How his lips would curl as he
    muttered that phrase! He would waste money often in trying to
    help some one to assertive, manly work in independent lines,
    rather than as an employee. This sturdy force in his character
    was like the magnetic crane, which lifts pieces of iron, even
    though they have been hidden in the ground. It compelled the
    manhood in other men to assert itself; though hidden from view,
    yet to burst from its covering, and to be drawn up higher.

As already noted, the West Shantung Mission was in session at Wei Hsien
when the tidings of Dr. Mateer’s death came; and before they adjourned
they adopted a highly appreciative minute concerning him. In it they
said, among other equally strong tributes to his worth:

    No one ever went to him in trouble without finding sympathy
    and help. Frugal in his style of living, he gave generously
    of his personal means to many a needy man; and he made many
    considerable gifts to the college and to other departments of
    the work he so much loved. His name will long be a fragrant
    memory in our midst, and the Chinese will more and more, in the
    years to come, rise up and call him blessed.

The English Baptist Mission at their first meeting after his death
adopted resolutions expressive of their deep sense of loss. One of these
will serve as an example of all:

    Combined with great strength of will and an enthusiasm which
    overcame all difficulties and opposition which stood in the way
    of the accomplishment of the great and arduous tasks, he was
    endowed with much tenderness of heart and a devoted loyalty to
    the gospel. He was a successful educator, a fine administrator,
    a powerful preacher, and a distinguished scholar; and his
    removal from amongst us has left a gap which will not soon or
    easily be filled.

The Presbyterian Board of Foreign Missions, under whom he had served for
forty-five years, adopted an extended and highly appreciative paper. In
one of the paragraphs, they say:

    Dr. Mateer was a man of unusual ability and force of character;
    an educator, a scholar, and an executive of high capacity....
    The Board records, with profound gratitude to God, its sense
    of the large usefulness of this great missionary educator.
    It mourns that the work is no longer to have the benefit of
    his counsel, but it believes that he builded so wisely and so
    well that the results of his labors will long endure, and that
    his name will always have a prominent place in the history of
    missionary work in the Chinese Empire.

Secretary Brown, of that Board, in a letter to Rev. Robert Mateer, of Wei
Hsien, said: “I regarded him as one of the great missionaries not only of
China, but of the world.”

Scores upon scores of personal letters, and a large number of articles
published in newspapers and periodicals, are available as tributes to
his work and character. Necessarily, they repeat what is said in the
quotations already given, though almost every one makes some valuable
addition. Few of them were meant for publication, and it is not because
of a lack of appreciation that any of them are omitted here.

Shall his biographer add his own estimate of the work and character of
Dr. Mateer? If the writing of this book has been at all what it ought
to be, this cannot be still needed; for, if he has revealed the inner
and the outer life of this great Christian missionary as it deserves,
and as he has aimed to do, then to turn back now and rehearse his
characteristics would be a superfluity. Besides, if I begin, where shall
I end? I must tell of his personality; his individuality; of his physique
and of his psychical nature; of his peculiarities of intellect,—its
vigor, versatility and vision; of his great heart, and the tenderness
of it that was not always externally manifest enough to command
recognition; of his will that yielded never to numbers or force, but
only to truth and duty; of a conscience whose voice would have made him
defy anything that man could do to him; of a piety that rooted itself in
the sovereignty and in the grace of Almighty God, and in the redemption
which Christ finished on the cross; of a consecration that laid himself
and all that he could bring upon the altar of divine service; of the
preacher, the teacher, the scholar, the man of science, the man of
business, and of the son, the husband, the brother, the fellow-disciple
and associate in Christian service; of his economy of time and of money,
and of his generosity; of his conservatism and his progressiveness; of
his singleness of purpose, his courage, his persistence, his efficiency;
of his weaknesses as well as of his strength; of his many successes and
his few failures; and of how much more I cannot enumerate. I would be
justified in comparing him with the very foremost of the servants of
Christ, living or dead, who during the past century have consecrated
their lives to the evangelization of China; or with Verbeck of Japan, or
Duff of India. However, I will here venture further, only to invite as
many as may to look well into the story of his life; and I am confident
that they will join with me in saying: “This was a Christian; this was as
distinctively a missionary, and as efficient as anyone of our age; and at
the same time this was as manly a man as our generation has seen.”

In the “Pilgrim’s Progress” we read: “After this it was noised abroad
that Mr. Valiant-for-truth was taken with a summons by the same post as
the other; and had this for a token that the summons was true, ‘That his
pitcher was broken at the fountain.’ When he understood it he called
for his friends, and told them of it. Then, said he, I am going to my
Father’s; and though with great difficulty I am got thither, yet now I do
not repent me of all the trouble I had been at to arrive where I am. My
sword I give to him that succeeds me in my pilgrimage, and my courage and
skill to him that may get it. My marks and scars I carry with me, to be a
witness for me that I have fought His battle who now will be my rewarder.
When the day that he must go hence was come, many accompanied him to the
river side, into which as he went he said, ‘Death, where is thy sting?’
And as he went down deeper, he said, ‘Grave, where is thy victory?’ So he
passed over, and all the trumpets sounded for him on the other side.”




INDEX


  Aground off coast of China, 63

  Algebras, 164

  Anglo-Chinese college, 216, 218

  Anniversary of graduation, 39

  Apparatus, 209, 211, 244

  Apprehensions as to China, 308, 313

  Arithmetic, 162


  Baller, Rev. Mr., 182, 258, 333

  Baptism, infant, tract, 160

  Beaver Academy, 43, 239

  Bergen, Paul D., 225, 229, 325

  Birth, 15

  Birthday, seventieth, 273, 295

  Books in preparation, 160, 166

  Boyish traits, 17, 25, 237

  “Boxer” uprising, 264, 284, 286

  Brown, Arthur J., 9, 12, 336

  Brown, Julia A., 53

  Brown, Margaret, 54, 123, 143, 153, 168

  Business capability, 154


  Canal, Grand, 169

  Candidate for ministry, 42, 44, 48

  Capp, Mrs., 54, 123, 143, 144, 153, 168, 276

  Caring for converts and churches, 123, 126, 174, 178, 183, 192, 193,
        194, 201

  Catechism, 161

  Chalfant, W. P., 325

  Chapel at Tengchow, 110

  Characteristics, personal, 25, 28, 45, 82, 83, 90, 91, 101, 148, 170,
        171, 236, 320, 324, 330, 332, 333, 335, 336

  Characters written, Chinese, 165, 253

  Chefoo, 67, 203, 264, 265, 273, 281, 299, 300, 320, 326

  China, appointed to, 57

  China as a mission field, 70, 317

  China, the “new,” 150, 286, 305, 311, 317

  Chinese characteristics, 308, 312

  Chinese language, 105, 108, 165, 252, 269

  Chinese Presbyterian church, 199, 200, 204, 205

  Chow Yuen, 123, 184

  Christianity in China, 173, 310, 313

  Classmates, 37, 38

  Coal press, 75

  Coffin, making a, 242

  College student, 34, 93

  Conference, first missionary, 252, 255

  Conference, second missionary, 252

  Conference, third missionary, 266, 267, 272

  Controversies, 151, 170, 197, 203, 290

  Conversion, 92

  Converts, early, 123, 142, 143, 176, 177, 192

  Corbett, Hunter, 59, 62, 67, 76, 102, 116, 119, 144, 176, 239, 300,
        327, 328

  Country school, 29

  Cumberland valley, 15

  Curriculum of Tengchow school, 136, 138, 144


  Dangers, 63, 121, 122, 124, 280, 281, 283, 284

  Death, 324

  Delaware, Ohio, 52, 58

  Delay after appointment, 51, 54, 99

  Discipline, church, 142, 175, 200

  Discipline, school, 140, 141

  Diven, grandfather, 20

  Doctorate of Divinity, 293

  Doctorate of Laws, 293

  Duffield, James, 30

  Dunlaps creek academy, 32

  Dwelling houses, 80, 228


  Education and missions, 129, 159, 312, 315

  Education, the “new,” in China, 244

  Electrical machinery, 214, 248

  Elterich, W. O., 328

  Employment for converts, 246, 334

  English Baptist mission, 225, 335

  English in school and college, 203, 216, 218, 230, 292

  Entertainments, 245, 250

  Experimentation, scientific, 213


  Faber hospital, 322

  Famines, 287

  Farm life, 22

  Father, 16, 18

  Field, Cyrus W., 213

  Fitch, G. F., 157, 163, 170

  Funeral services, 325, 326

  Furloughs, 145, 298, 299, 300


  General Assembly, 206, 303

  Generosity, 171, 172, 287

  Geometry, 163

  Goodrich, Chauncey, 91, 165, 166, 258, 259, 266, 271, 272, 319, 320,
        322, 323, 331

  Graduates of college, 144, 145, 149, 233, 295, 323, 326

  Grier, Margaret, 82


  Hamilton, W. B., 332

  Happer, Andrew P., 216

  Haven, Ada, 299

  Hayes, Watson M., 147, 164, 179, 210, 214, 225, 240, 322, 323, 329

  Hays, Isaac N., 93

  Hebrew at Chautauqua, 299

  “Hermitage,” the, 22, 238, 304

  Home life, 23, 41, 79, 82

  Honors and distinctions, 38, 293

  House-building, 76, 78, 228

  Hunterstown academy, 31

  Hymn book and hymns, 161


  Illness, last, 321

  Inns, Chinese, 68, 116

  Invitations declined, 43, 52, 218, 294

  Irwin, J. P., 328

  Itinerations, 112, 116, 119, 123, 124, 125, 127, 184, 186, 329


  Japanese bombardment of Tengchow, 284

  Jefferson College, 33, 238


  Kiao-chow, 195, 286

  Kirkwood, Mrs. Jennie, 17, 23, 40

  Korean expedition, 297

  Kwan Yin temple, 73, 129, 135, 210


  Language, learning the, 105, 108, 109

  Licentiate, a, 49

  Licentiates, Chinese, 201

  Locomotives and Baldwin Works, 239, 243

  Lwan, Pastor, 327


  Maker, a, of “new” China, 309

  Mandarin Dictionary, 165, 166

  Mandarin Elementary Lemons, 170, 300

  Mandarin Lessons, 167, 169, 172

  Mandarin version, 252, 255, 256, 259, 263, 264, 265, 267, 268, 271,
        319, 321, 322, 331

  Manufacturing, 240

  Marriage, 53, 299

  Martin, W. A. P., 167, 249, 306

  Mateer, Ada Haven, 82, 170, 241, 248, 250, 266, 299, 303, 319, 321,
        322, 324, 333

  Mateer, Horace N., 17

  Mateer, Jennie W., 17, 23, 40

  Mateer, John L., 17, 156, 278

  Mateer, Julia A., 53, 62, 78, 108, 114, 123, 126, 129, 134, 137, 147,
        169, 170, 192, 194, 276, 280, 298, 299

  Mateer, Lillian, 17, 146, 147

  Mateer, Robert M., 17, 146, 323, 324, 326

  Mateer, William D., 17, 240

  Mechanical ability, 155, 236

  Medical work, 86, 298

  Mercer, S. B., 32

  “Methods of Missions,” 151, 196, 292

  Miao, 123, 184

  Miller, J. R., 44

  Mills, Rev., 72, 114, 126, 167, 174, 179, 194, 199, 243, 276, 291, 298

  Ministry, a Chinese, 161, 200, 314

  “Mission,” the, 196

  Missionary, a foreign, 40, 42, 49, 51, 54, 57

  Missionary qualifications, 316

  Moderator of Synod, 203

  Mother, 16, 20, 40, 50, 299, 304

  Museum, 245


  Nanking, 169, 294

  Nevius, J. L., 71, 145, 151, 196, 256, 259

  New Testament revision, 258, 260, 264, 266

  Ningpo, 203


  Observatory, 209, 214

  Old Testament revision, 272, 273, 319, 322

  Ordination, 53


  Parentage, 16, 18

  Pastorate, 179, 180, 192

  Pecuniary affairs, 171, 172

  Peking, 264, 278, 285, 294

  Periodicals and contributions, 150

  Persecutions, 187, 195

  Policy of college, 230

  Preacher, as a, 91, 102, 181

  Preaching in Chinese, 109, 204

  Premises of school and college, 129, 135, 147, 209, 210, 229

  Presbyterian Board of Foreign Missions, 335

  Presbytery of Shantung, 199, 200

  Presidency of college, 179, 214, 229, 231

  Press, the mission, 152, 155, 157, 278

  Profession of religion, 33

  Provincial college, 215, 247, 309

  Publications, 150, 160, 161, 162, 164, 165, 166, 167, 169, 170

  Pupils, 129, 132, 134, 135, 137, 138, 146


  “Rebels,” Tai-Ping, 71, 280

  Religious life, 33, 89, 93, 101, 104

  Removal to Wei Hsien, 226

  Revisers, Mandarin version, 256, 258, 264, 272


  Sabbath School letters, 133

  School-Book Commission, 159

  Science Hall, 228, 229

  Science teaching, 212

  Shanghai, 62, 152, 202, 252, 278, 282, 285

  Shantung, province, 71, 111, 284, 289

  Shantung college, 128, 207, 220, 253, 303

  Shantung Christian University, 222, 234

  “Shen,” 151, 170, 291

  Siberian trip, 243, 300, 302

  Social life, 82, 193

  Southern Baptist mission, 70, 220

  Stated supply, 178, 179

  Stereotyping, 155

  Stove, making a, 75

  Student visitors, 108, 245

  Students converted, 142, 143, 149

  Superintending the mission press, 152, 153

  Surgery, 86

  Synod of China, 152, 201


  Tai An, 124

  Tengchow, 68, 70, 84, 108, 208, 215, 264, 280, 281, 304

  Tengchow church, 72, 174, 177, 192

  Tengchow school, 129, 132, 135, 138, 140, 146, 149, 153, 277

  Tengchow station, 71, 73, 81, 223

  Terms, ecclesiastical, 204

  Terms, technical and scientific, 159, 160

  Theological student, a, 46, 96

  Theology, teaching, 212

  Tientsin massacre, the, 281

  Tours and travels, 68, 112, 114, 116, 119, 123, 124, 125, 126, 169,
        171, 192, 193, 296, 298, 299, 300, 322

  Translating and its lessons, 269, 271

  Travel, modes of, 68, 112

  Tributes, 327-338

  Tsinan, 125, 226, 234, 289

  Tsingchow, 119, 120, 125, 226, 229

  Tsingtao, 233, 322, 325

  Tsou Li Wen, 259, 260

  Type-making, 155


  Union in Shantung Christian University, 226

  Union of Presbyterians in China, 204, 205


  Voyage, first, 58, 99


  Walker, Mrs. Lillian, 17, 18, 146, 147

  Wang Yuen Teh, 259, 327

  War, Chino-Japanese, 284

  Wedding journey, 303

  Wei Hsien, 119, 226, 228, 285, 295, 330

  Wei Hsien, at, 228, 243, 248, 250, 295

  Welcome at Tengchow, 145

  Wells, Mrs. Margaret G., 82

  Wells, Mason, 82, 285, 326

  West Shantung mission, 325, 334

  Western Theological Seminary, 43, 46

  Wilson, Samuel, 33

  Workshop, 240, 241


  Yangtse, the, 169, 171, 253

  Yuan Shih K’ai, 215, 284